37l5210

37l5210
IBM Netfinity Servers
S10L-9838-01
IBM Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY
Hardware Maintenance Manual
September 1998
We Want Your Comments!
(Please see page 364)
IBM Netfinity Servers
S10L-9838-01
IBM Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY
Hardware Maintenance Manual
September 1998
We Want Your Comments!
(Please see page 364)
IBM
Note
Before using this information and the product it
supports, be sure to read the general information
under id=nots..
First Edition (September 1998)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United
Kingdom or any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL
BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions,
therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to
the information herein; these changes will be incorporated
in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the
program(s) described in this publication at any time.
This publication was developed for products and services
offered in the United States of America. IBM may not offer
the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries, and the information is subject
to change without notice. Consult your local IBM
representative for information on the products, services,
and features available in your area.
Requests for technical information about IBM products
should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
 Copyright International Business Machines
Corporation 1997, 1998. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government users–Documentation related to
Restricted rights–Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject
to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
ii
Netfinity Server HMM
About This Supplement
This supplement contains diagnostic information,
Symptom-to-FRU Indexes, service information, error
codes, error messages, and configuration information for
the Netfinity Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661.
Important
This manual is intended for trained servicers who are
familiar with IBM PC Server products.
Important Safety Information
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this
book before performing any of the instructions.
Leia todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de
executar qualquer operação.
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type
Attention et
Danger avant de procéder aux opérations décrites par les
instructions.
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine
Anweisung ausführen.
iii
Accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di
pericolo prima di effettuare qualsiasi operazione.
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precaución y
peligro ante
de llevar a cabo cualquier operación.
Online Support
Use the World Wide Web (WWW) or the IBM PC
Company BBS to download Diagnostic, BIOS Flash, and
Device Driver files.
File download address is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/files.html
The IBM PC Company BBS can be reached at (919)
517-0001.
IBM Online Addresses:
The HMM manuals online address is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/cdt/hmm.html
The IBM PC Company Support Page is:
http://www.us.ibm.com/support/index.html
The IBM PC Company Home Page is:
http://www.pc.ibm.com
iv
Netfinity Server HMM
Contents
About This Supplement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . .
Online Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661 .
General Checkout . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Tools
. . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Service Information . .
ServeRAID System Board Controller
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . .
Undetermined Problems . . . . .
Parts Listing (Type 8661)
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
Related Service Information . .
Safety Information
. . . . . . .
Send Us Your Comments! . . . .
Problem Determination Tips . . .
Phone Numbers, U.S. and Canada
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks
. . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1998
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iii
iii
iv
1
8
11
16
18
65
163
288
322
324
331
332
364
365
366
368
368
v
vi
Netfinity Server HMM
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
General Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-On Self-Test (POST)
. . . . . . . . . .
POST Beep Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST Error Messages
. . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Error Messages
. . . . . . . . .
Software-Generated Error Messages . . . . .
System Error Log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Diagnostic Programs
. . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Test Log
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypassing an Unknown Power-on Password
. .
Configuring the Ethernet Controller . . . . . . .
Configuring Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility Program . . . . . . .
Configuring ISA and PCI Adapters
. . . . . . .
Failover for Redundant Ethernet
. . . . . . . .
Special Considerations When Combining
Failover and Hot-Plug Functions . . . . . .
Configuring for Failover . . . . . . . . . . .
OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IntraNetWare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light Path Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity System Management Processor
. . . .
System Requirements for the Advanced System
Management Service with Netfinity Manager
Accessing the System Management Processor
without Netfinity Manager
. . . . . . . . .
System Power Menu Selections
. . . . .
Boot Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . .
Using Remote Video Mode to Monitor and
Access POST . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity Advanced System Management Token
Ring Connection Option
. . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Instructions
. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Netfinity Manager
. . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Option
. . . . . . . . .
Resolving Configuration Conflicts . . . . . . . .
Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts
.
Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts . .
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Advanced Configuration Functions
. .
Setting the BootCd Feature . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1998
8
11
11
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
23
25
26
27
27
27
27
28
29
30
35
36
36
38
39
41
43
43
46
47
48
48
49
49
50
52
53
54
1
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu .
System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Card Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices and I/O Ports
. . . . . . . . . . .
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Power-On Password Menu . . .
Using the Administrator Password Menu
.
Start Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACPI Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cache Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Bus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced ISA Settings
. . . . . . . . .
System Service Processor Settings . . . .
Plug and Play
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID System Board Controller . . . . . . . .
Understanding RAID Technology . . . . . . . .
Interleave Depth and Stripe-Unit Size
. . . .
Supported RAID Levels . . . . . . . . . . .
RAID Level-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAID Level-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced RAID Level-1 . . . . . . . . .
RAID Level-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Configuration Program
. . . . . . .
Starting the Configuration Program
. . . . .
Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning about Custom Configuration
. . . .
Using Custom Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Information Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Drive State Descriptions . . . . . . .
Physical Drive State Descriptions
. . . . . .
Changing the ServeRAID Configuration Settings
Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Bar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program . . . . .
Viewing the Controller Status
. . . . . . . .
Viewing the Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Configuration Functions . . . . . .
Setting the Bootable CD-ROM Feature . . . .
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Netfinity Server HMM
56
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
59
60
61
62
62
63
63
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
64
64
65
65
65
65
67
67
67
68
69
69
70
71
72
73
75
76
78
82
83
84
85
86
95
95
96
97
98
100
Starting the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program . . . . . . . . . . .
Options Pull-Down Menu
. . . . . . . . .
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling or Disabling the Alarm
. . . .
Resetting the Alarm . . . . . . . . . .
Polling Options
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRaid the Administration Functions . . . .
Array Administration
. . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Drive Administration . . . . . . . .
Creating Logical Drives
. . . . . . . .
Initializing Logical Drives . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Logical Drives . . . . . .
Unblocking Logical Drives
. . . . . . .
Logical Drive Migration Administration . . .
Change RAID Levels
. . . . . . . . .
Adding a Physical Drive . . . . . . . .
Physical Device Administration
. . . . . .
Setting Physical Device States . . . . .
Rebuilding a Device . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter Administration
. . . . . . . . . .
Copying the Drive Configuration to the
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying the Adapter Configuration to the
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing the Adapter . . . . . . . . .
Scanning for New Drives . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Monitoring Functions . . . . . . .
Monitoring the Adapter Status Information
.
Monitoring the Device Event Logs . . . . .
Monitoring the Logical Drive Information . .
Monitoring the Physical Device Information .
ServeRAID IPSSEND Program (Starting)
. . .
ServeRAID IPSSEND Program (Using)
. . . .
ServeRAID Server Roll-Out Commands
. .
ServeRAID Error-Recovery Commands
. .
ServeRAID Problem-Isolation and Debug
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAID Configuration Commands . . . . . .
ServeRAID IPSMON Program (Starting) . . . .
ServeRAID IPSMON Program (Using) . . . . .
ServeRAID Device Drivers and Utility Programs
(Installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM ServeRAID Utility Programs . . . . . .
Obtaining ServeRAID Updates . . . . .
Administration and Monitoring Program . . . .
ServeRAID Programs for Windows NT and
Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Background-Server Components
.
ServeRAID Programs for OS/2 and NetWare
.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
100
101
102
103
103
103
103
104
105
105
105
107
108
108
109
109
110
111
111
112
114
114
114
115
115
116
116
117
118
118
119
120
120
122
123
123
125
127
130
132
132
134
134
134
134
134
135
135
3
ServerRAID Programs for OpenServer and
UnixWare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the ServeRAID WIN32-Based Program
Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers
. . . . .
Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
Windows NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files while Installing Windows
NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files after Installing Windows
NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers for
NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files while Installing NetWare
3.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files after Installing NetWare
3.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files while Installing NetWare
4.1X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files after Installing NetWare
4.1X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for OS/2
Installing the Files while Installing OS/2 .
Installing the Files after Installing OS/2 .
Starting the Administration and Monitoring
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
OpenServer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files for OpenServer
. . .
Adding BTLD at Boot Time . . . . . . .
Adding BTLD after the Initial Installation
Using an IDE CD-ROM Drive to Install
OpenServer Files
. . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files for OpenServer 5.0.0 . .
Installing the Files for OpenServer 5.0.2
and 5.0.4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers for
UnixWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing UnixWare on a ServeRAID Drive
Installing UnixWare on a Non-ServeRAID
Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Files while Installing UnixWare
Installing the Files after Installing UnixWare
Installing an HBA Diskette File Using
Pkgadd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an HBA Diskette File Using
SCOAdmin
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the ServeRAID Background-Server
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServerRAID Background-Server Components
.
Command-Line Parameters . . . . . . . .
Logging Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background-Server Component Security . .
Background-Server Component Name
Resolution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Netfinity Server HMM
136
136
138
138
138
139
139
139
140
141
142
143
143
145
146
147
147
148
148
149
149
149
150
150
152
154
154
154
154
155
156
156
156
157
157
IPSSEND and IPSMON Programs
. . . . . .
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare . . . . . . . .
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for
OpenServer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for UnixWare
Installing IPSSEND for DOS . . . . . . . .
Rebuilding a Defunct Drive . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for the Rebuild Operation . . . .
General Information about the Rebuild
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Rebuilding the Defunct Drive .
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs for Hot-Plug PCI Slots
. . . . . . .
Adapter Considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Plug and Play Technology
. . . . . . . .
Plug and Play Adapters
. . . . . . . .
Legacy Adapters
. . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility Program . . .
Enabling Hot-Plug PCI Support
. . . . . .
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Begin
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Jumper Positions
. . . . . . . . .
Two-Pin Jumper Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Three-Pin Jumper Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Trim Bezels and Server Door .
Reconfiguring the Server
. . . . . . . . .
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD-ROM Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a CD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DASD Backplane Removal . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics Panel LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . .
External Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting External SCSI Devices
. . . .
Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . .
Setting SCSI IDs for External Devices
.
Installation Procedure
. . . . . . . . .
Input/Output Ports and Connectors
. . . .
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management Port C . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard and Auxiliary-Device Ports . .
Ethernet Port
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Serial Bus Ports . . . . . . .
Front Bezel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot-Plug PCI Adapter Installation . . . . . . .
Installing a Non-Hot-Plug Adapter . . . . .
Verifying Compatibility between Network
Adapters and Device Drivers . . . . . . .
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
158
158
160
160
161
161
161
162
162
163
165
166
167
168
168
168
168
169
170
173
174
174
175
176
176
178
179
180
183
183
183
185
186
187
187
187
187
187
187
188
189
189
190
190
192
192
194
195
199
202
5
Hot-Swap Power Supply Installation . . . . . .
Hot-Swap Power Supply Removal
. . . . . .
Hot-Swap Fan Assembly Replacement
. . . .
Information LED Panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Panel Cover Removal
. . . . . .
Information Panel LED Assembly Removal
. .
Input/Output Connectors and Expansion Slots .
Interior LED and Speaker Assembly
. . . . .
Internal Drives Installation
. . . . . . . . . .
Internal Drive Bays . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI Drives
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination (Internal SCSI Devices)
. .
Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)
. . . . . .
Installing a 5.25-inch Removable-Media Drive
Installing a Drive in a Hot-Swap Bay . . . .
Replacing a Drive in a Hot-Swap Bay
. . .
Installing Devices in the NetBAY3 . . . . . . .
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Rear Panel . . . . . . . . .
Installing Devices on Side Rails . . . . . .
Removing Cage Nuts . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Cage Nuts
. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Cantilevered Devices
. . . . . .
Installing Devices on the NetBAY3 Base Plate
Memory-Module Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microprocessor Kit Installation
. . . . . . . .
Preparing to Install Options . . . . . . . . . .
Power Backplane Removal . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Filler Plate . . . . . . . . . . .
NetBAY3 Bezel Installation . . . . . . . . . .
Processor Board Component Locations . . . .
Processor Board Jumpers
. . . . . . . . . .
Processor Board Removal
. . . . . . . . . .
Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Removing the Server
. . . .
Preparing the Rack
. . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Server in the Rack
. . . .
Removing the Server from a Rack
. . .
SCSI Backplane Component Locations
. . . .
SCSI Backplane Option Jumpers . . . . . . .
Server Cabling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Door and Trim Bezels Removal on the
Tower Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shuttle Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Cover(s) Removal
. . . . . . . . . . .
System Board Component Locations
. . . . .
System Board Jumpers
. . . . . . . . . . .
System Board Removal
. . . . . . . . . . .
Top Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Regulator Card Removal . . . . . . .
6
Netfinity Server HMM
202
206
208
210
212
213
215
218
219
219
220
221
222
222
222
226
228
232
232
233
233
234
235
235
236
237
241
246
248
250
252
253
254
255
257
258
259
259
259
260
265
271
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
282
283
286
287
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . .
Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . .
No Beep Symptoms . . . . . .
Control Panel System Error LED
Diagnostic Error Codes
. . . .
Error Symptoms . . . . . . . .
Power Supply LED Errors. . . .
POST Error Codes . . . . . . .
SCSI Error Codes . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Controller Error Codes
ServeRAID Startup Messages
.
System Board LEDs . . . . . .
System Board SCSI LEDs
. . .
Undetermined Problems . . . . . .
Parts Listing (Type 8661)
. . . . .
System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboards
. . . . . . . . . .
Power Cords
. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
288
288
291
291
294
301
302
304
310
311
315
320
321
322
324
325
329
330
7
General Checkout
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable
read-only memory (ROM) on the system board. These
programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of your server: the system board, Ethernet
controller, video controller, RAM, keyboard, mouse
(pointing device), diskette drive, serial port, and parallel
port. You can also use them to test some external
devices. See “Diagnostic Programs” on page 11.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused
by the hardware or by the software, you can run the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem
might cause several error messages. When this occurs,
work to correct the cause of the first error message. After
the cause of the first error message is corrected, the other
error messages might not occur the next time you run the
test.
A failed system might be part of a shared DASD cluster
(two or more systems sharing the same external storage
device(s)). Prior to running diagnostics, verify that the
failing system is not part of a shared DASD cluster.
A system might be part of a cluster if:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The customer identifies the system as part of a
cluster.
One or more external storage units are attached to
the system and at least one of the attached storage
units is additionally attached to another system or
unidentifiable source.
One or more systems are located near the failing
system.
If the failing system is suspect to be part of a shared
DASD cluster, all diagnostic tests can be run except
diagnostic tests which tests the storage unit (DASD
residing in the storage unit) or the storage adapter
attached to the storage unit.
8
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. For systems that are part of a shared DASD
cluster, run one test at a time in looped mode.
Do not run all tests in looped mode, as this could
enable the DASD diagnostic tests.
2. If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnose
the first error code displayed.
3. If the computer hangs with a POST error, go to
the “Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
4. If the computer hangs and no error is displayed,
go to “Undetermined Problems” on page 322.
5. Power Supply problems, see “Symptom-to-FRU
Index” on page 288.
6. Safety information, see “Safety Information” on
page 332.
7. For intermittent problems, check the error log;
see, “Error Logs” on page 64.
001
IS THE SYSTEM PART OF A CLUSTER?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 004.
003
Schedule maintenance with the customer. Shut down all
systems related to the cluster. Run storage test.
004
–
–
–
–
–
–
Power-off the computer and all external devices.
Check all cables and power cords.
Set all display controls to the middle position.
Power-on all external devices.
Power-on the computer.
Check the control panel system error LED; if on, see
“Control Panel System Error LED” on page 291.
– Check the error log. If an error was recorded by the
system, see “Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
– Start the Diagnostic Programs. See “Running
Diagnostic Programs” on page 14.
– Check for the following responses:
1. No beep.
2. Readable instructions or the Main Menu.
(Step 004 continues)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
9
(CONTINUED)
004 (continued)
DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES?
Yes No
005
Find the failure symptom in “Symptom-to-FRU Index”
on page 288.
006
– Run the Diagnostic Programs. If necessary, refer to
“Running Diagnostic Programs” on page 14.
If you receive an error, go to “Symptom-to-FRU Index”
on page 288.
If the diagnostics completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see “Undetermined Problems” on
page 322.
10
Netfinity Server HMM
Diagnostic Tools
The following tools are available to help identify and
resolve hardware-related problems:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Diagnostic Programs
Power-on self-test (POST)
POST beep codes
Error messages
Troubleshooting charts
Option diskettes
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
Diagnostic Programs
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable
read-only memory (ROM) on the system board. These
programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of your server, such as the the system board,
Ethernet controller, video controller, RAM, keyboard,
mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial port, and
parallel port. You can also use them to test some external
devices.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused
by the hardware or by the software, you can run the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
Note
a single problem might cause several error messages.
When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first
error message. After the cause of the first error
message is corrected, the other error messages might
not occur the next time you run the test.
To run the Diagnostic Programs, see “Running Diagnostic
Programs” on page 14.
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
11
Power-On Self-Test (POST)
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests
to check the operation of server components and some of
the options installed in the server. This series of tests is
called the power-on self-test or POST.
POST does the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Checks the operation of some basic system-board
operations
Checks the memory
Compares the current server configuration with the
stored server configuration information
Configures PCI adapters
Starts the video operation
Verifies that drives (such as the diskette, CD-ROM,
and hard disk drives) are connected properly
If you have a power-on password or administrator
password set, you must type the password and press
Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.
While the memory is being tested, the amount of available
memory appears on the screen. These numbers advance
as the server progresses through POST and the final
number that appears on the screen represents the total
amount of memory available. If POST finishes without
detecting any problems, a single beep sounds, the first
screen of your operating system or application program
appears, and the System POST Complete (OK) light is
illuminated on the information LED panel.
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds
and an error message appears on your screen.
Note
A single problem might cause several error messages.
When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first
error message. After the cause of the first error
message is corrected, the other error messages
usually will not occur the next time you run the test.
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288. refid='sympmq'..
12
Netfinity Server HMM
POST Beep Codes
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful
completion or the detection of a problem.
Ÿ
One beep indicates the successful completion of
POST.
Ÿ
More than one beep indicates that POST detected a
problem. For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
Error Messages
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not
intended to be used to identify a failing part.
Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems
indicated by error messages should be performed by
trained service personnel.
Hardware error messages that occur can be text, numeric,
or both. Messages generated by your software generally
are text messages, but they also can be numeric.
POST Error Messages: POST error messages
occur during startup when POST finds a problem with the
hardware or detects a change in the hardware
configuration. For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
Diagnostic Error Messages:
Diagnostic error
messages occur when a test finds a problem with the
server hardware. These error messages are alphanumeric
and they are saved in the Test Log. For a list of error
codes and messages, see “Symptom-to-FRU Index” on
page 288.
Software-Generated Error Messages:
These
messages occur if a problem or conflict is found by an
application program, the operating system, or both.
Messages are generally text messages, but they also can
be numeric. For information about these error messages,
refer to the documentation that comes with your software.
System Error Log
The system error log contains all error and warning
messages issued during POST and all system status
messages from the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor. See “System Error Log” on
page 64 for information about how to view the system
error log.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
13
Option Diskettes
An optional device or adapter might come with an Option
Diskette. Option Diskettes usually contain option-specific
diagnostic test programs or configuration files.
If your optional device or adapter comes with an Option
Diskette, follow the instructions that come with the option.
Different instructions apply depending on whether the
Option Diskette is startable or not.
Running Diagnostic Programs
While you are running the diagnostic programs, F1
displays Help information. Pressing F1 from within a help
screen provides a help index from which you can select
different categories. Pressing Esc exits Help and returns
to where you left off.
Notes
1. To run the diagnostic programs, you must start
the server with the highest level password.
That is, if you enter the power-on password and
an administrator password is set, you cannot run
the programs. You can only view the error
messages in the Test Log.
2.
3.
4.
5.
You must enter the administrator password to run
the diagnostic programs.
If the server stops during testing and you cannot
continue, restart the server and try running the
diagnostic programs again.
You might have to install a wrap connector on
your active parallel, serial, or Ethernet port to
obtain accurate test results for these ports. If
you do not have a wrap connector, contact your
IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
You might need a scratch diskette (that is, a
diskette which has no contents that you want to
save) to obtain accurate test results when testing
the diskette drive.
The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests
assume that a keyboard and mouse are attached
to the server.
To start the diagnostic programs:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down your
operating system and restart the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears,
press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is
set, the server prompts you for it. Type in the
appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostics Programs screen appears.
14
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the
screen.
5. Select the test you want to run from the list that
appears; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
When the tests have completed, you can view the
Test Log by selecting Utility from the top of the
screen.
Also, you can view server configuration information
(such as system configuration, memory contents,
interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory access
(DMA) use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting
Hardware Info from the top of the screen.
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists
during normal server operations, a software error might be
the cause. If you suspect a software problem, refer to the
information that comes with the software package.
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288
Viewing the Test Log
If you are already running the diagnostic programs,
continue with step 4 in this procedure.
To view the Test Log:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down your
operating system and restart the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears,
press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is
set, the server prompts you for it. Type in the
appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostic Programs screen appears.
4. Select Utility from the top of the screen.
5. Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then,
follow instructions on the screen.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
15
Features
The following table summarizes the features of the
Netfinity 5500-M10.
Microprocessor
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Intel Pentium II Xeon microprocessor with
MMX technology
32 KB of level-1 cache
512 KB of level-2 cache (min.)
Expandable to two microprocessors
Memory
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Standard: 128 MB (min.), expandable to 2 GB
100 MHz registered, error correcting code (ECC),
synchronous dynamic random access memory
(SDRAM)
Four dual inline memory-module (DIMM) sockets
Diskette Drive
Ÿ
Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
Hard Disk Drives
Ÿ
Up to six hot-swappable hard disk drives supported
CD-ROM Drive
Ÿ
Standard: 32X IDE
Keyboard and Auxiliary Device
(standard only on tower models)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Keyboard
Mouse
Expansion Bays
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Six slim (1-inch) or three half-high (1.6-inch) hot-swap
drive bays
Three 5.25-inch removable-media bays (one used by
CD-ROM drive)
The IBM Netfinity NetBAY3 (tower model only) allows
installation of options to provide extra expansion bays
Expansion Slots
Up to seven adapters can be installed.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Four 32-bit hot-plug PCI slots
Two standard (non-hot-plug) 32-bit PCI slots
One 16-bit ISA slot
Upgradable Microcode
Ÿ
BIOS, diagnostics, Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor, and ServeRAID upgrades
(when available) can update EEPROMs on the
system board
Security Features
16
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Door and top cover lock (tower model only)
NetBAY3 bezel lock
Power-on and administrator passwords
Selectable drive-startup
Keyboard password
Systems management security
– User log-in password
– Read-only or read/write access
– Dial back
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) Alerts
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Power supplies
Fans
Memory
Hard disk drives
Microprocessors
Voltage regulator modules (VRMs)
Integrated Functions
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Two serial ports
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports
One parallel port
Mouse port
Keyboard port
Video port
IBM ServeRAID controller (two channels) on system
board
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet port (controller on
system board)
Redundant Ethernet capability, through the use of an
optional network interface card (NIC)
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
on system board
Dedicated Advanced System Management I/O port
Video controller (with 1 MB video memory) compatible
with:
– Super video graphics array (SVGA)
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)
Power Supply
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
400 W (115–230 V ac)
Automatic voltage range selection
Built-in overload and surge protection
Automatic restart after a loss of power
For redundant power, an optional 400 W power
supply is available
Redundant Cooling
Ÿ
Three hot-swap fans
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
17
Additional Service Information
The following additional service information supports
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
18
“Bypassing an Unknown Power-on Password” on
page 19.
“Configuring the Ethernet Controller” on page 20.
“Configuring Options” on page 22.
“Configuration Overview” on page 23.
“Configuration/Setup Utility Program” on page 25.
“Configuring ISA and PCI Adapters” on page 26.
“Failover for Redundant Ethernet” on page 27.
“Light Path Diagnostics” on page 30.
“Netfinity System Management Processor” on
page 35.
“Netfinity Advanced System Management Token Ring
Connection Option” on page 43.
“Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 48.
“Specifications” on page 50.
“Status LEDs” on page 52.
“Using the Advanced Configuration Functions” on
page 53.
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu” on
page 56.
Netfinity Server HMM
Bypassing an Unknown Power-on
Password
When a power-on password is set, POST does not
complete until you enter the password. If you forget the
power-on password, you can regain access to the server
through either of the following methods:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Enter the administrator password at the power-on
prompt, if an administrator password has been set.
(If necessary, see “Using the Administrator Password
Menu” on page 61 for details.) Start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the
power-on password. See “Using the Power-On
Password Menu” on page 60.
Change the position of the jumper on J24 as
described in Table 12 on page 282 to bypass the
power-on password check. You can then start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the
power-on password. See “Using the Power-On
Password Menu” on page 60.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
19
Configuring the Ethernet Controller
Your Netfinity 5500-M10 comes with an Ethernet controller
on the system board. The Ethernet controller provides
10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX support through the RJ-45
connector on the back of your server. When you connect
your server to the network, the Ethernet controller
automatically detects the data-transfer rate (10 Mbps or
100 Mbps) on the network and then sets the controller to
operate at the appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet
controller will adjust to the network data rate, whether the
data rate is standard Ethernet (10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
(100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX).
This process is also known as auto-negotiating. This
auto-negotiation occurs without requiring software
intervention. The controller supports half-duplex (HDX)
and full-duplex (FDX) modes at both speeds.
Note
The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that
the cabling in the network be Category 5 or higher.
Fast Ethernet operates at a data rate of 100 Mbps; that is,
ten times faster than standard Ethernet. However, except
for the different operating speeds, Fast Ethernet and
standard Ethernet are structurally identical. Applications
and protocols that are currently hosted on a standard
Ethernet system can be seamlessly migrated to a Fast
Ethernet system. (In a very small number of cases, minor
tuning might be required to adjust the application to the
higher performance of a Fast Ethernet system). Because
of the equivalence of the two types of Ethernet, mixed
Ethernet and Fast Ethernet systems also can be designed
and implemented.
The bandwidth required at each workstation connected to
a server is generally far less than the bandwidth required
at the server. This is because the server might have to
handle the bandwidth of multiple workstations at the same
time. A cost-effective solution to the bandwidth
requirements of this type of system is a mixed Ethernet
and Fast Ethernet network. This mixed network consists
of standard Ethernet connections at the workstations and
Fast Ethernet connections at the servers.
The Ethernet controller is a PCI device, and is therefore, a
Plug and Play device. You do not have to set any jumpers
or configure the controller for your operating system before
you use the Ethernet controller. However, you must install
a device driver to enable your operating system to address
the Ethernet controller (refer to your operating-system
documentation).
If you need additional Ethernet connections, you can install
an Ethernet adapter, such as the IBM 10/100 PCI Ethernet
20
Netfinity Server HMM
adapter. Review your network-adapter documentation for
any additional configuration requirements and for
troubleshooting information.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
21
Configuring Options
Before installing a new device or program, read the
documentation that comes with it. Reading the instructions
helps you to determine the steps that are required for
installation and configuration. The following list provides a
preview of the actions that might be required to configure
your server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
record the current configuration settings.
See “Configuration/Setup Utility Program” on
page 25.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server system board.
See “Changing Jumper Positions” on page 174 and
“System Board Jumpers” on page 282.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the instructions that came with the adapter.
4. Install the adapter in the server.
See “Adapters” on page 165.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that came with the
software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 48.
22
Netfinity Server HMM
Configuration Overview
You play a key role in how your server allocates resources
to organize and interconnect hardware devices and
software programs. This allocation process is referred to
as configuration. The steps required to configure your
server depend on the number and types of devices and
programs that you install.
Your server supports several types of adapters and SCSI
devices. Because of this flexibility, you can choose from
among many adapters and devices that comply with any of
the following standards:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA)
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
In general, the greater the number and variety of hardware
devices and software programs that you install in your
server, the more you will have to interact with your server
and your devices to correctly configure your system.
Your server comes with the following hardware
configuration utility programs:
Ÿ
Configuration/Setup Utility
Ÿ
With the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program,
you can configure system board functions, such as
serial and parallel port assignments; change interrupt
request (IRQ) settings; and change the startup
sequence for drives that you install. You also can
use this utility program to set passwords for starting
up the server and accessing the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
ServeRAID
You can use ServeRAID programs to define and
maintain your disk arrays. You can also use these
programs to configure SCSI devices (such as
hot-swap drives) that are attached to the ServeRAID
controller on the system board. Refer to the
“ServeRAID Information” section of this Server Library
for complete instructions.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
23
Before installing a new device or program, read the
documentation that comes with it. Reading the instructions
helps you to determine the steps required for installation
and configuration. The following actions are typically, but
not always, required to configure your server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
record the current configuration settings.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server system board.
See “Changing Jumper Positions” on page 174 and
“System Board Jumpers” on page 282.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the device installation instructions.
4. Install the device in the server.
See “Locations” on page 163.
If you install an ISA adapter that is not a Plug and
Play device, select the Plug and Play choice on the
main menu of the Configuration/Setup Utility program
to assign the ISA legacy resources. See “Plug and
Play” on page 64 for more information.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that come with the
software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 48.
24
Netfinity Server HMM
Configuration/Setup Utility Program
For most configurations, the server will operate using the
default system settings. You need to change the settings
only to resolve configuration conflicts or to enable or
change device functions (for example, defining diskette
types, and so on).
When you want or need to change the default settings, the
Configuration/Setup Utility program provides a convenient
way to display and change the settings.
After you run and exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility
program, configuration information is stored in nonvolatile
random-access memory (NVRAM). While the server is off,
the configuration information remains available for the next
system startup.
Always run the Configuration/Setup Utility program if you
add, remove, or relocate any hardware option, or if you
receive an error message instructing you to do so. Review
this information and the information that comes with the
option before making changes.
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
2. When the message Press F1 for
Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note
If you enter the power-on password and an
administrator (supervisor-level) password is also
set, a limited version of the menu appears. To
see the full menu, you must restart the server
and enter the administrator password when you
are prompted to enter a password. See “System
Security” on page 59 for additional information.
The Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu
appears. For information about the menu, see “Using
the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu” on
page 56.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
25
Configuring ISA and PCI Adapters
You cannot assign an ISA adapter to the same interrupt
that you have assigned to a PCI adapter. This is because
the Netfinity 5500-M10 does not support interrupt sharing
among PCI and ISA adapters.
If a situation occurs where you need an additional
interrupt, you can use an interrupt from another function
that you might not need, such as COM2 (Interrupt 3).
To configure ISA adapters, select Plug and Play and
follow the instructions on the screen. See “Plug and Play”
on page 64 and “Plug and Play Technology” on page 168
for additional information.
PCI devices automatically communicate with the server
configuration information. This usually results in automatic
configuration of a PCI device. If a conflict does occur, see
“Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 48.
Multiple-function PCI adapters use more than one interrupt.
When you install one of these adapters, review the IRQ
assignments in the Configuration/Setup Utility programs
(see “PCI Routing” on page 57). Verify that the IRQ
assignments are correct.
Your Netfinity 5500-M10 uses a rotational interrupt
technique to configure PCI adapters. This technique
enables you to install a variety of PCI adapters that
currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
26
Netfinity Server HMM
Failover for Redundant Ethernet
Your Netfinity 5500-M10 has an integrated Ethernet
controller. The IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter
is an optional redundant network interface card (NIC
adapter) that you can install in your server. If you install
this NIC adapter and connect it to the same logical
segment as the primary Ethernet controller, you can
configure the server to support a failover function. You
can configure either the integrated Ethernet controller or
the NIC adapter as the primary Ethernet controller. In
failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a
link failure, all Ethernet traffic associated with it is switched
to the redundant (secondary) controller. This switching
occurs without any user intervention. Applications with
active sessions do not experience any data loss. When
the primary link is restored to an operational state, the
Ethernet traffic automatically switches back to the primary
Ethernet controller.
Note that only one controller in the redundant pair is active
at any given time. For example, if the primary Ethernet
controller is active, then the secondary Ethernet controller
cannot be used for any other network operation.
Note
Your operating system determines the maximum
number of IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant
Adapters that you can install in your server. See the
documentation that comes with the adapter for more
information.
Special Considerations When Combining
Failover and Hot-Plug Functions: If your
operating system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and the
optional redundant NIC adapter is installed in a hot-plug
PCI slot, you can replace the NIC adapter without
powering off the server — even if it is the primary Ethernet
controller. Disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the
primary Ethernet controller will cause the Ethernet traffic to
be automatically switched to the secondary Ethernet
controller. This can be very useful when a network
problem is caused by faulty adapter hardware or when you
want to upgrade the primary adapter hardware.
Configuring for Failover:
The failover feature
currently is supported by OS/2, Windows NT, and
IntraNetWare. The setup required for each operating
system follows.
OS/2
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the
instructions provided with the adapter and in
“Adapters” on page 165.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
27
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet
Ethernet Family adapter device driver.
3. Using the MPTS Utility program, select the driver from
the list and select the Edit button.
Note
Only one driver instance needs to be loaded for
each redundant pair of Ethernet controllers.
4. Change the PermaNet Server Feature keyword to
TRUE and specify the Primary and Standby slots that
contain the redundant pair. Refer to “System Board
Component Locations” on page 280 for the locations
and slot numbers of the PCI slots. The integrated
controller is located in slot E.
5. To enable the writing of messages to the
IBMCOM\LANTRAN.LOG file when a failover occurs:
a. Copy the file PCNETOS2.EXE from the root
directory of the diskette created using the
ServerGuide CDs to your hard disk drive.
b. Add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS
file:
Run=d:\path\PCNETOS2.EXE
where d and path are the drive and path to
which you copied PCNETOS2.EXE.
6. Restart the server.
The failover function is now enabled.
Windows NT
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the
instructions provided with the adapter and in
“Adapters” on page 165.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet
Ethernet Family adapter device driver.
3. From the NT desktop, select Control Panel, then
select the Network icon, then the Adapters tab.
4. Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the
redundant pair and then select the Properties...
button.
5. Check the Grouping box. This will show the possible
combinations for redundant pairs.
6. Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK.
Note that the integrated Ethernet controller is located
at PCI bus 0, slot 14.
7. Select Close to exit from the Network setup.
When you restart the server, the failover function will
be in effect.
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event
Viewer log. If the DMI instrumentation code for the
integrated Ethernet controller is active (PCNET.EXE was
run), a popup message is generated also.
28
Netfinity Server HMM
IntraNetWare
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the
instructions provided with the adapter and in
“Adapters” on page 165.
2. Load the device driver by using the following
command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW.
LAN PRIMARY=x SECONDARY=y
where d and path are the drive and path where the
driver is located, and x and y are the PCI slot
numbers where the redundant pair is located.
The slot number associated with the integrated
Ethernet controller can vary depending upon the
configuration of the server. To determine the slot
number, load the driver with no parameters. The
driver will display the available slot numbers. The slot
number that is greater that 10000 will be the slot
number of integrated Ethernet controller. When the
slot number of the integrated Ethernet controller is
determined, reload the driver with the appropriate
parameters.
3. When the driver is loaded, bind it to a protocol stack.
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:
Ÿ
Ÿ
A message is generated to the operating system
console.
The custom counters for the device driver contains
variables that define the state of the failover function
and the location of the redundant pair. You can use
the NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.
Note
If the primary adapter was hot-replaced while the
Ethernet traffic was being handled by the secondary
Ethernet controller, the traffic does not automatically
switch back to the primary adapter when the primary
adapter comes back online. In this case, issue the
command:
LOAD d:\
path\PCNTNW
SCAN
where d and path are the drive and path where the
driver is located. This command causes the device
driver to locate the primary adapter and switch the
Ethernet traffic to it.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
29
Light Path Diagnostics
The light path diagnostics built into your server allow you
to quickly identify the type of system error that occurred.
Your server is designed so that any LEDs that are
illuminated remain illuminated when the server shuts down
as long as the AC power source is good and the power
supplies can supply +5V current to the server. This
feature helps you isolate the problem if an error causes the
server to shut down.
The light path diagnostics begins with the System Error
LED on the information LED panel. (See the illustration in
“Information LED Panel” on page 210.) When this light is
illuminated, use the following information to isolate the
problem.
Ÿ
If the System Error LED on the information LED panel
on the front of the server is on, a system error was
detected. Check to see which of the LEDs on the
diagnostics panel inside the server are on.
– SMI LED on
A systems management event occurred.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem
persists, go to “General Checkout” on
page 8.
–
NMI LED on
A non-maskable interrupt occurred. The PCI 1
or PCI 2 LED will probably also be on.
Actions:
1. If the PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED is on,
follow the instructions for those
LEDs.
2. If the PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED is not on,
restart the server. If the problem
persists, go to “General Checkout”
on page 8.
–
PCI 1 LED on
An error occurred on the primary PCI channel.
An adapter in PCI slot 5 or 6 or the system
board caused the error.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a problem with the
integrated ServeRAID controller or
the Ethernet controller, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
2. If you cannot isolate the failing
adapter from the information in the
error log, try to determine the failing
adapter by removing one adapter at
a time from the primary PCI bus
30
Netfinity Server HMM
(PCI slots 5 and 6) and restarting
the server after each adapter is
removed.
If the problem persists, go to “General
Checkout” on page 8.
–
PCI 2 LED on
An error occurred on the secondary PCI channel.
An adapter in PCI slot 1, 2, 3, or 4 or the system
board caused the error.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information.
2. If you cannot correct the problem
from the information in the error log,
try to determine the failing adapter
by removing one adapter at a time
from the secondary PCI bus (PCI
slots 1–4) and restarting the server
after each adapter is removed.
If the problem persists, go to “General
Checkout” on page 8.
–
MEM LED on
A memory error occurred. Check the DIMM
Error LEDs on the processor board.
- DIMM 1 Error LED on
The DIMM in DIMM slot 1 has failed.
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 1.
-
DIMM 2 Error LED on
The DIMM in DIMM slot 2 has failed.
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 2.
-
DIMM 3 Error LED on
The DIMM in DIMM slot 3 has failed.
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 3.
-
DIMM 4 Error LED on
The DIMM in DIMM slot 4 has failed.
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 4.
–
FAN 1 LED on
Fan 1 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Note
A failing fan can also cause the TEMP and
DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 1.
–
FAN 2 LED on
Fan 2 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
31
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP
and DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 2.
–
FAN 3 LED on
Fan 3 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Note
A failing fan can also cause the TEMP and
DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 3.
–
TEMP LED on
The system temperature has exceeded the
maximum rating.
Actions:
1. Check to see if a fan has failed. If it
has, replace the fan.
2. Make sure the room temperature is
not too hot. (See “Specifications”
on page 50)
If the problem persists, go to “General
Checkout” on page 8.
–
VRM LED on
One of the voltage regulator modules on the
processor board has failed. Check the VRM
Error LEDs on the processor board.
- Primary Processor Cache VRM Error LED
on
The cache VRM for the primary
microprocessor slot has failed.
Actions:
1. Turn off the server, reseat the
VRM, and restart the server.
2. If the problem persists, replace
the VRM.
If the problem persists, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
-
Primary Processor Core VRM Error LED on
The core VRM for the primary
microprocessor slot has failed.
Actions:
1. Turn off the server, reseat the
VRM, and restart the server.
2. If the problem persists, replace
the VRM.
If the problem persists, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
-
32
Secondary Processor Cache VRM Error
LED on
Netfinity Server HMM
The cache VRM for the secondary
microprocessor slot has failed.
Actions:
1. Turn off the server, reseat the
VRM, and restart the server.
2. If the problem persists, replace
the VRM.
If the problem persists, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
-
Secondary Processor Core VRM Error LED
on
The core VRM for the primary
microprocessor slot has failed.
Actions:
1. Turn off the server, reseat the
VRM, and restart the server.
2. If the problem persists, replace
the VRM.
If the problem persists, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
–
CPU LED on
One of the microprocessors has failed. Check
the Microprocessor Error LEDs on the processor
board.
- Primary Microprocessor Error LED on
The microprocessor in the primary
microprocessor slot has failed.
Actions:
1. Turn off the server, reseat the
microprocessor, and restart the
server.
2. If the problem persists, replace
the microprocessor.
If the problem persists, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
-
Secondary Microprocessor Error LED on
The microprocessor in the secondary
microprocessor slot has failed.
Actions:
1. Turn off the server, reseat the
microprocessor, and restart the
server.
2. If the problem persists, replace
the microprocessor.
If the problem persists, go to
“General Checkout” on page 8.
–
PS1 LED on
The primary power supply has failed.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
33
Action: Replace the primary power supply.
–
PS2 LED on
The secondary power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the secondary power supply.
–
DASD 1 LED on
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a temperature problem
and the fans are working correctly,
go to “General Checkout” on
page 8.
2. If the amber Hard Disk Status LED
on one of the hot-swap hard disk
drives is on, refer to the “ServeRAID
Information” section of this Server
Library for more information.
Ÿ
34
System Error LED on the information LED panel on
the front of the server is off. The light path
diagnostics have not detected a system error.
Netfinity Server HMM
Netfinity System Management
Processor
The following information is about the system management
processor that is integrated in the server. It also describes
how to access the system management processor without
Netfinity Manager. The following information is for the
Netfinity System Management Processor.
One of the features of the Netfinity 5500-M10 is the
integrated system management processor.
Note
To use all of the functions of the system management
processor, you must install the Advanced System
Management service for Netfinity Manager. You also
will need a user-provided modem attached to serial
port A to use the remote functions. Refer to “Serial
Ports” on page 188 for information about serial port A.
The Advanced System Management service gives you the
ability to configure and monitor many features of your
server's system management processor. You can connect
to, and directly access and control, the system
management processor of a remote system. With the
Advanced System Management service you can configure
Advanced System Management service events (such as,
POST, loader, and operating-system timeouts; and critical
temperature and voltage failures). If any of these events
occur, the Advanced System Management service can be
configured to automatically forward a Netfinity alert in one
of three ways:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Alert forwarded to another Netfinity system
Alert forwarded to a standard numeric pager
Alert forwarded to an alphanumeric pager
In addition, with the Advanced System Management
service you can remotely monitor, record, and replay all
textual data generated by a remote system during POST.
While monitoring a remote system during POST, you can
enter key commands on your keyboard that will then be
relayed to the remote system.
The Netfinity Manager software is included in your
ServerGuide package. Refer to the documentation that
comes with ServerGuide for information on how to install
the Netfinity Manager software. Then, refer to the online
Netfinity documentation or the online Advanced System
Management Service for Netfinity Manager User’s Guide
for information on using the system management
processor.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
35
System Requirements for the Advanced
System Management Service with Netfinity
Manager: The minimum system requirements for using
the Advanced System Management service are:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
System management processor (built into the Netfinity
5500-M10)
Netfinity Manager or Client Services for Netfinity
Manager, version 5.10.4 or later
2 MB of available hard disk drive space
Accessing the System Management
Processor without Netfinity Manager:
If for
some reason you are unable to use Netfinity Manager to
access and manage your system management processor,
you can use a terminal program and a modem to connect
directly to the system management processor. This
modem should be connected to management port C.
(Refer to “Management Port C” on page 189 for
information on management port C.) When connected,
you will be able to access a variety of monitor,
configuration, and error log data. You can also power the
remote (Netfinity 5500-M10) system on or off, shutdown
and restart the server, and initiate remote video mode on
the system management processor. Remote video mode
enables you to remotely monitor all textual output
generated during POST. All POST data will be displayed
in the terminal program window as the remote system
completes POST. While you are monitoring POST on the
remote system, all local (terminal program) keystrokes are
relayed automatically to the remote system, enabling you
to use POST utilities (such as system configuration, RAID
mini-configuration program, and diagnostic programs) that
can be accessed during POST.
To use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the system management processor:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the system management processor modem. The
modem settings you should use are:
Baud
57.6 k
Data Bits
8
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Flow Control Hardware
2. Log in to the system management processor.
When you have established a connection with the
system management processor, you will be prompted
for a username and password. You must provide a
username and password combination that has been
previously configured for use with the system
management processor. You can use one of two
username and password combinations:
36
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the system management processor
microcode, the default username (USERID) and
password (PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable,
notify the system administrator.
When you have logged into the system management
processor, the following main menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
To access a menu item, press the number or letter that
corresponds to the information you want to access. After
you select a menu item, subsequent menus will offer more
specific information that pertains to the selection you made
from the main menu.
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Selecting Y Disconnect Current Logon ends
the current session and requires you to enter a
new username and password before continuing.
Selecting Read displays the last entry.
Selecting Read Last steps backwards through
the entries.
Selecting Write executes the command.
Menu Selection
Data Available for Viewing
Monitors
System board temperature, CPU
temperatures, power supply temperatures,
voltage readings, voltage regulator module
readings, fan status, redundant power supply
status
Error Logs
Contents of system error log
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
37
Menu Selection
Data Available for Viewing
Service Processor
Configuration
System management processor modem
configuration, dial-out entries, dial-out alerts,
dial-in logins, system status, thresholds,
system statistics, VPD information and system
state
System Services
Status of system management processor
watchdog timers and event alerts sent to the
server
System Power
Current system power status, power-off
configuration and power-off delay values.
Note
You can use selections available from
the System Power menu to power the
system on or off. For more information,
see “System Power Menu Selections”
on page 38.
Boot
You can use selections available from the
Boot menu to shutdown and restart your
system or to restart the system management
processor. For more information, see “Boot
Menu Selections” on page 39.
Remote Terminal
Status
Current remote terminal status
Start Remote
Video
Use Start Remote Video to enable your
terminal program to remotely monitor and
manage the server during POST. For more
information, see “Using Remote Video Mode
to Monitor and Access POST” on page 41.
When you are finished accessing the system management
processor using a terminal program, select Disconnect
Current Logon from the main menu and then use your
terminal program to close the connection to the system
management processor.
System Power Menu Selections: You can use the
selections available from the System Power menu to:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
View data regarding the current server power status
View data regarding the server power configuration
Power the server off
Power the server on
To access these functions:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the system management processor modem.
2. Log in to the system management processor.
When you have established a connection with the
system management processor, you will be prompted
for a username and password. You must provide a
username and password combination that has been
previously configured for use with the system
management processor. You can use one of two
username and password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
38
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD, is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the system management processor
microcode, the default username (USERID) and
password (PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable,
notify the system administrator.
When you have logged into the system management
processor, the following main menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
3. Select 6 System Power.
The following System Power menu appears:
1
2
3
4
Current Power Status
Power Configuration
Power On
Power Off
4. Select a System Power menu item.
Ÿ Select 1 Current power Status for information
about the current server power status.
Ÿ Select 2 Power Configuration for information
about the server power configuration.
Ÿ Select 3 Power On to power the server on (if it
is currently powered off).
Ÿ Select 4 Power Off to power the server off (if it
is currently powered on).
Boot Menu Selections: You can use the selections
available from the Boot menu to:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Shutdown the server operating system and then
restart the server
Restart the server immediately, without first
performing an operating system shutdown
Restart the system management processor
To access these functions:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the system management processor modem.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
39
2. Log in to the system management processor.
When you have established a connection with the
system management processor, you will be prompted
for a username and password. You must provide a
username and password combination that has been
previously configured for use with the system
management processor. You can use one of two
username and password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD, is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the system management processor
microcode, the default username (USERID) and
password (PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable,
notify the system administrator.
When you have logged into the system management
processor, the following main menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
3. Select 7 Boot.
The following Boot menu appears:
1 Reboot w/OS Shutdown
2 Reboot immediately
3 Restart SP
4. Select a Boot menu item.
Ÿ Select 1 Reboot w/OS Shutdown to shutdown
the server operating system and then restart the
server.
Ÿ Select 2 Reboot immediately to restart the
server immediately, without first shutting down
the operating system.
Ÿ Select 3 Restart SP to restart the system
management processor.
40
Netfinity Server HMM
Using Remote Video Mode to Monitor and
Access POST: You can use a terminal program to
remotely monitor all textual output generated during POST.
All POST data will be displayed in the terminal program
window as the remote system completes POST. While
you are monitoring POST on the remote system, all local
keystrokes are relayed automatically to the remote system,
enabling you to use POST utilities (such as system
configuration, RAID mini-configuration program, or
diagnostic programs) that can be accessed during POST.
To use Remote Video Mode to monitor and access POST
on the server:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the system management processor modem.
2. Log in to the system management processor.
When you have established a connection with the
system management processor, you will be prompted
for a username and password. You must provide a
username and password combination that has been
previously configured for use with the system
management processor. You can use one of two
username and password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD, is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the system management processor
microcode, the default username (USERID) and
password (PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable,
notify the system administrator.
When you have logged into the system management
processor, the following main menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
3. Start (or restart) the server.
Ÿ If the remote server is currently powered off:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
41
Ÿ
a. Select 6 System Power from the main
menu.
b. Select 4 Power On from the System Power
menu.
If the server is currently powered on, you must
restart the server. You can use selections from
the System Power menu or the Boot menu to
restart the server in several ways.
To restart the server using System Power menu
selection:
a. Select 6 System Power from the main
menu.
b. Select 3 Power Off from the System Power
menu.
c. Once the server has powered off, select 4
Power On to restore power to the server.
To restart the server using Boot menu
selections:
a. Select 7 Boot from the main menu.
b. Select either 1 Reboot w/OS Shutdown or
2 Reboot Immediately to restart the
server.
Note
For information on the System Power and
Boot menus, see “System Power Menu
Selections” on page 38 and “Boot Menu
Selections” on page 39.
4. After you restart the server, return to the main menu
and select Z Start Remote Video.
Once you have started Remote Video mode on the system
management processor, all textual output generated during
POST will be sent to your terminal window. Your terminal
will also act as a fully-active remote session, enabling you
to enter keyboard commands that will be sent to the
remote server. In this way, you can enter key commands
and key-combinations that access POST operations and
utilities such as system setup or the RAID
mini-configuration program.
When you have finished using Remote Video mode, press
Ctrl+R, then press Ctrl+E, and then press Ctrl+T. This
will end Remote Video mode and return you to the main
menu.
42
Netfinity Server HMM
Netfinity Advanced System
Management Token Ring Connection
Option
The Netfinity Advanced System Management Token Ring
Connection includes an IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PC
Card that you install in the PCMCIA slot on the Advanced
System Management PCI Adapter. The option also
includes a PC Card to 9-pin D-shell cable that you first
connect to the PC card and then route through the rear
chassis cut-out on the server. Finally, the option includes
a complete copy of Netfinity Manager version 5.20.2. The
licensed version of Netfinity Manager, shipped with the
option replaces the licensed version of Netfinity Manager
that comes with ServerGuide (included with the Netfinity
server). The version of Netfinity Manager, shipped with
the option, includes advanced features that enable you to
configure and control the Advanced System Management
PCI Adapter.
Attention
After you have installed the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Token Ring Connection, you
must not enable or use the Ethernet port that is
included on the Advanced System Management PCI
Adapter. Enabling the Ethernet port while the IBM
Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PCMCIA card is installed on
the adapter will cause the system to become unstable.
To enable, configure, or use the Ethernet port, you
must first remove the IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring
PCMCIA card from the Advanced System
Management PCI Adapter.
The option ships with the following components:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PC Card
Token Ring Cable
Safety Information Booklet
Netfinity Manager CD-ROM
Installation Instructions
Attention
Before proceeding, read the safety information
included with the option.
To install the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Token Ring Connection, do the following:
1. Use the Netfinity Manager Advanced System
Manager service to disable the Ethernet network
interface (if it is enabled).
This step is necessary only if you have used the
Advanced System Management service previously to
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
43
2.
3.
4.
5.
enable the Ethernet network interface on the
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter. For
information on how to enable or disable network
interfaces on the adapter, see the Advanced System
Management section of the Server Library that was
included with the server.
Shut down and power off the server.
Disconnect the server power cord from the wall
socket.
Remove the server cover.
Locate and remove the Advanced System
Management PCI Adapter.
To remove the Advanced System Management PCI
Adapter from the server:
a. Unplug all connections from the back of the
adapter.
b. Carefully move aside any cables (such as DASD
cables or power cables) that block access to the
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter.
c. Disconnect the power cable from the top of the
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter.
d. Carefully remove the adapter from the server.
6. Install the PCMCIA card .2/ into the PCMCIA slot on
the adapter .1/ as shown in the following figure.
7. Connect one end of the token ring cable .2/ to the
PCMCIA connector on the PCMCIA card .1/ as
shown in the following figure.
name=d3lr2008width=17p.
8. Lock the PCMCIA connector by pushing the slide .4/
forward as shown.
9. Locate and remove the external connector knockout
on the back panel of the server.
To remove the external connector knockout, use a flat
blade screwdriver to carefully tap the bottom edge of
the knockout panel. The knockout will bend toward
the interior of the server. After the external connector
knockout has bent in slightly, insert the tip of the
screwdriver between the edge of the knockout and
44
Netfinity Server HMM
the back panel of the server and gently pry the
knockout off.
Attention
Be careful not to bend the back panel of the
server while removing the knockout.
10. Reinstall the Advanced System Management PCI
Adapter. Be sure to reconnect any cables that you
disconnected when removing the adapter from the
server.
11. Insert the end of the token ring cable .3/ into the
external connector opening and secure it in place with
the included screws.
12. Replace the server cover and reconnect the server to
a power source.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
45
Installing Netfinity Manager:
The option ships
with a complete, licensed copy of Netfinity Manager. It
replaces the version of Netfinity Manager that was included
with the the of ServerGuide. Netfinity Manager includes
updated software designed to support the Netfinity
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter. If you have
previously installed an earlier version of Netfinity Manager
on the server, uninstall the earlier version and then install
the version of Netfinity Manager included with the option.
The Advanced System Management service, installed
when you install Netfinity Manager, provides the most
extensive functionality available with the Netfinity
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter. You also
must use the Advanced System Management service to
configure the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Token Ring Connection. If you do not install Netfinity
Manager, many of the advanced functions of the Netfinity
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter will not be
available to you. For information on how to install Netfinity
Manager, see the ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager
Information section of the Server Library. Once you have
installed Netfinity Manager, see the Advanced System
Management section of the Server Library for information
on how to use Netfinity Manager and the Advanced
System Management service to manage, monitor, and
configure the Advanced System Management PCI Adapter.
46
Netfinity Server HMM
Troubleshooting the Option:
Confirm that the
Advanced System Management PCI Adapter is correctly
configured to use the IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PC
Card. You must use the Advanced System Management
service (included with Netfinity Manager) to configure the
network functions of the Advanced System Management
PCI Adapter.
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, unplug the computer and all
attached devices from electrical outlets before
performing any troubleshooting procedure.
.
Try the following troubleshooting procedures.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Remove and reattach all IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring
PC Card cables.
Remove the IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PC Card.
Inspect the IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PC Card for
damage.
Reinstall the IBM Turbo 16/4 Token Ring PC Card.
Check the system documentation for instructions
about the installation of options. Look for a section
about system setup or system configuration. Follow
all procedures.
After completing these steps, reassemble the system,
connect the power cord, and retry the failing
operation.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
47
Resolving Configuration Conflicts
The resources used by your server consist of IRQs, DMA,
I/O ports addresses, and memory. This information is
useful when a resource configuration conflict occurs.
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
A device is installed that requires the same resource
as another device. (For example, a conflict occurs
when two adapters try to write to the same address
space.)
A device resource is changed (for example, changing
jumper settings).
A device function is changed (for example, assigning
COM1 to two serial ports).
A software program is installed that requires the same
resource as a hardware device.
The steps required to resolve a configuration error are
determined by the number and variety of hardware devices
and software programs that you install. If a hardware
configuration error is detected, a configuration error
message appears after the server completes POST and
before the operating system is loaded. You can bypass
the error by pressing Esc while the error message is
displayed.
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures the
system hardware and PCI IRQs. The program does not
consider the requirements of the operating system or the
application programs. See “Resolving Software
Configuration Conflicts” on page 49 for additional
information.
Resolving Hardware Configuration
Conflicts: Use the following information to help
resolve hardware configuration conflicts:
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view
and change resources used by the system board
functions and the installed options. Record the
current settings before making any changes. (See
“Configuration/Setup Utility Program” on page 25 for
instructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing the
conflict.
3. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Some devices
use jumpers and switches to define the system
resources that the devices need. If the settings are
incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be
shared, a conflict occurs and the device will remain
deactivated by the configuration program.
4. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurations
are not supported. If you must remove an adapter,
see “Adapters” on page 165.
48
Netfinity Server HMM
Resolving Software Configuration
Conflicts: The memory-address space and IRQs used
by some hardware options might conflict with addresses
defined for use through application programs or the
expanded memory specification (EMS). (EMS is used only
with DOS.)
If a conflict exists, one or more of the following conditions
might exist:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The system cannot load the operating system.
The system does not work.
An application program does not operate, or it returns
an error.
Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.
To resolve conflicts, you can change the software or
hardware configuration.
Note
Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view
the addresses used by your system board functions.
(See “Configuration/Setup Utility Program” on page 25
for instructions.)
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to
change the addresses used by the application program or
the device driver. You can use the Configuration/Setup
Utility program to change addresses.
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict,
refer to your operating-system documentation or the
documentation that comes with the device drivers.
Software Installation
Use ServerGuide to verify that you have the proper
working environment for the specific operating system you
are installing.
1. Follow the instructions provided in your ServerGuide
package to install your operating system.
What to do next?
Ÿ
To install application programs, refer to the
application program documentation.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
49
Specifications
The following list contains the specifications for the
Netfinity 5500-M10.
Size (Tower Model)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Depth: 700 mm (27.6 in.)
Height with NetBAY3: 530 mm (20.9 in.)
Height without NetBAY3: 356 mm (14 in.)
Width: 483 mm (19 in.)
Front clearance: 305 mm (12 in.)
Rear clearance: 100 mm (4 in.)
Side clearance: 50 mm (2 in.)
Size (Rack Model)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Depth: 650 mm (25.6 in.)
Height: 356 mm (14 in.) (8 U)
Width: 440 mm (17.3 in.)
Weight (Tower Model)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Unpacked, minimum configuration (with empty
NetBAY3): 40.1 kg (88.4 lb.)
Unpacked, maximum configuration: 56 kg (123.4 lb.)
Weight (Rack Model)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Unpacked, minimum configuration: 33.8 kg (74.4 lb.)
Unpacked, maximum configuration: 51.5 kg (113.4
lb.)
Heat Output
Ÿ
Approximate heat output in British thermal units (Btu)
per hour:
– Minimum configuration: 1023.9 Btu
– Maximum configuration: 2764.6 Btu
Environment
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Air temperature
– System on: 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)
– System on: 10° to 32° C (50° to 89.6° F)
Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m (7000 ft.)
– System off: 10° to 43° C (50° to 110° F)
Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
Humidity
– System on: 8% to 80%; maximum wetbulb,
23° C (73.4° F)
– System off: 8% to 80%; maximum wetbulb,
27° C (80.6° F)
Altitude: 0 to 2133 m (0 to 7000 ft.)
Acoustical Noise Emissions Values
Ÿ
50
Sound power, idling
– 6.2 bel for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
Netfinity Server HMM
–
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
6.3 bel for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
Sound power, operating
– 6.2 bel for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 6.3 bel for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
Sound pressure, idling
– 47 dBA for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 48 dBA for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
Sound pressure, operating
– 47 dBA for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 48 dBA for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
These levels are measured in controlled acoustical
environments according to ISO 7779 (EMCA-74), and are
reported in accordance with ISO 9296 (EMCA-109). The
declared sound power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large portion of machines operate. Sound
pressure levels in your location might exceed the average
1-meter values stated because of room reflections and
other nearby noise.
Electrical Input
Ÿ
Ÿ
Sine-wave input (50± or 60± Hz) is required
Input voltage
– Low range
- Minimum: 90 V ac
- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range
- Minimum: 180 V ac
- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (KVA) approximately
- Minimum configuration as shipped: 0.2
KVA
- Maximum configuration: 0.78 KVA
Electrostatic Discharge
Ÿ
Tested to 8 KV
Immunity
Ÿ
Verified to comply with EN 50082-1
Safety Standards
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
UL 1950
CSA C22.2 No. 950-M93
EN 60950 and countries deviations
IEC 950
NOM-019
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
51
Status LEDs
Your server has LEDs to help you identify problems with
some server components (see, “Symptom-to-FRU Index”
on page 288).
Status LEDs are located on the following components:
Ÿ
Information panel
Ÿ
For more information, see “Information LED Panel” on
page 210.
Hard disk drive trays
Ÿ
For more information, see “Controls and Indicators”
on page 180.
Power supply
Ÿ
For more information, see “Power Supply LEDs” on
page 252.
Diagnostic panel
Ÿ
For more information, see “Diagnostics Panel LEDs”
on page 186.
Processor board
Ÿ
See “Processor Board Component Locations” on
page 255 for locations of the LEDs on the processor
board.
System board
See “System Board Component Locations” on
page 280 for locations of the LEDs on the system
board.
52
Netfinity Server HMM
Using the Advanced Configuration
Functions
The Advanced Functions choice allows you to initialize the
configuration (reset the ServeRAID controller settings),
import the configuration information from the drives, enable
and disable the Boot CD-ROM and INT13 extensions, and
view the controller and PCI information.
When you select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu,
a screen similar to the following appears.
IBM ServeRAID Adapter Disk Array Mini-Configuration Ver. X.XX
Advanced Functions
Initialize Configuration
Import Configuration from Drive(s)
Configure BIOS Settings
Adapter and PCI Information
Exit
Select a choice using the Up and Down Arrow keys, then press Enter.
Descriptions of the choices available from the Advanced
Functions menu are as follows:
Attention
The following choices might result in loss of data
due to changes in the configuration.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Initialize Configuration resets the ServeRAID
controller settings to their factory defaults and sets all
functional hard disk drives to the RDY state.
Import Configuration from Drive(s) reads the most
common configuration information from the drives in
the server and copies it to the controller’s NVRAM
and to the controller’s EEPROM module.
Boot CD-ROM and INT13 Extensions is used to
configure the BootCd feature. When BootCd is
enabled, the ServeRAID controller attempts to start
(boot) from a CD, if the CD-ROM drive contains a
startable (boot-enabled) CD, and no other controller is
currently using INT13 extensions.
Attention:
Only one controller can support INT13 extensions.
Adapter and PCI Information displays the
ServeRAID controller hardware and PCI register
information, as shown in the following example
screen.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
53
IBM ServeRAID Adapter Disk Array Mini-Configuration Utility Ver. X.XX
Adapter Information
PCI Reg Information
Code Seg.(Cs):
CB80h
Data Seg.(Ds):
9A00h
Adapter No:
1
Dev, Ven Id (00h):
002Eh 1014h
Status, Cmd(04h):
0200h 0107h
Class, Rev Id(08h):
010000h 04h
Intr No:
0009h
Bist,Hdr,Lat,Cach (0Ch):
I/O Adr:
F400h
Base Adr Reg0(10h):
0000F401h
Mem Adr:
FDFFE000h
Base Adr Reg1(14h):
FDFFE000h
Base Adr Reg2(18h):
00000000h
Base Adr Reg3(1Ch):
00000000h
Base Adr Reg4(20h):
00000000h
Base Adr Reg5(24h):
00000000h
Reserved(28h):
00000000h
Reserved(2Ch):
00000000h
Exp ROM Adr(30h):
00000000h
Reserved (34h):
00000000h
Reserved(38h):
00000000h
Bus No:
00h
Device No:
0Eh
StatusQ Start:
0009E814h
StatusQ End:
0009E82Ch
StatusQ Head:
0009E818h
Status Tail:
0009E814h
OS/2 Table:
Part Number:
4800h
01K8562
MaxLat,MinG,IntP,Intl(3Ch):
00h 00h 40h 08h
00h 00h 00h 00h
Press any key to continue.
Setting the BootCd Feature:
When you select
Boot CD-ROM and INT13 Extensions, a screen similar to
the following appears.
IBM PC ServeRAID Adapter Disk Array MiniConfiguration Utility Ver. X.XX
Boot CD-ROM Configuration
BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM
Display Boot CD-ROM Menu
No
No
BIOS Support for Int13 Extensions
No
BIOS Support for reading Partition tables
Yes
BIOS Support for Service Processor
No
Save Configuration in Adapter
Exit
Select a choice using the Up and Down Arrow keys, then press Enter.
To enable the BootCd feature:
1. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
highlight BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM.
Press Enter to change No to Yes. This also changes
No to Yes next to Display Boot CD-ROM Menu and
BIOS Support for INT13 Extensions.
2. Ensure that the screen displays Yes next to BIOS
Support for reading Partition tables. If not, use the
Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlight BIOS
Support for reading Partition tables; then, press
Enter to change No to Yes.
3. Highlight Save Configuration for Adapter; then,
press Enter. A Configuration Saved message
appears. The Main Menu of the Mini-Configuration
program returns.
Note
Highlighting Exit, instead of Save Configuration
for Adapter, and pressing Enter causes any
changes you made not to be saved.
54
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the server.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
55
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
Main Menu
From the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, you can
select settings that you want to change. The
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu is similar to the
following screen:
IBM SurePath Setup - © IBM Corporation
Configuration/Setup Utility
• System Summary
• System Information
• Devices and I/O Ports
• Date and Time
• System Security
• Start Options
• Advanced Setup
• Plug and Play
• Error Logs
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Default Settings
Exit Setup
<F1> Help
<Esc> Exit
< ↑ > < ↓ > Move
<Enter> Select
Pressing F1 displays Help information for a selected menu
item.
Note
The choices on some menus might differ slightly,
depending on the BIOS version that comes with your
server.
To change configuration settings:
1. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
highlight the menu item for the configuration setting
that you want to change; then, press Enter.
2. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
choose the appropriate setting for the selected menu
item; then, press Enter.
3. Repeat step 1 through step 2 for each setting that
you want to change. Press Esc to return to the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
4. After making changes, you can select:
Ÿ Save Settings to save the selected changes.
Ÿ Restore Settings to delete the changes and
restore the previous settings.
Ÿ Load Default Settings to cancel the changes
and restore the factory settings.
5. To exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu, select Exit Setup. If you made any changes
and did not save them with the Save Settings choice,
the system prompts you to save or discard the
changes when you attempt to exit from the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
56
Netfinity Server HMM
System Summary: Select this choice to display
configuration information, including the type and speed of
the microprocessor and amount of memory.
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on
this summary screen. You cannot edit the fields.
The System Summary choice appears on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu and on the limited
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
System Information:
Select this choice to display
information about your Netfinity 5500-M10, and to view the
IRQ settings for the RAID and Ethernet controllers on the
system board, and other PCI adapters that you purchase
and install.
Changes that you make on other menus might appear on
this summary screen. You cannot edit any fields.
The System Information choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Product Data: Select this choice to view system
information, such as the machine type and model, the
system serial number, the system board identifier, and the
revision level or issue date of the flash electronically
erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) for the system
management processor, diagnostics, and BIOS.
System Card Data: Select this choice to view
information for the system board, processor board, power
supply, power backplane, DASD backplane, etc..
PCI Routing: Select this choice to view the IRQ
settings for PCI adapters and for the Ethernet, SCSI, and
other controllers on the system board. See “PCI Bus
Control” on page 63 for information about changing the
PCI IRQ settings.
Devices and I/O Ports: Software recognizes ports
through their port assignments. Each port must have a
unique port assignment. The Configuration/Setup Utility
program normally handles this, but you might have special
hardware or software that requires you to change these
assignments.
Note
Serial port A can be shared by the system
management processor and operating system. Serial
port B is used by the operating system only.
Management port C is controlled exclusively by the
system management processor, cannot be used by
the operating system, and cannot be configured using
the Configuration/Setup utility program.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
57
Select the Devices and I/O Ports choice to view or
change the assignments for devices and input/output ports.
You can add serial ports by installing a serial adapter in an
expansion slot. See the documentation that comes with
the serial adapter for information about port assignments.
You can configure the parallel port as bidirectional; that is,
so that data can be both read from and written to a device.
In bidirectional mode, the server supports Extended
Capabilities Port (ECP) and Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP).
To display or change the assignments for devices,
serial ports, or the parallel port:
1. Select Devices and I/O Ports.
2. Select a device or port; use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to advance through the settings
available.
The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on
the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Notes
1. When you configure the parallel port as
bidirectional, use an IEEE 1284-compliant cable.
The maximum length of the cable must not
exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet).
2. The universal serial bus (USB) is configured
automatically. For further details about Plug and
Play devices, see “Plug and Play” on page 64.
3. If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse
port, the USB keyboard emulates a mouse and
you will not be able to disable the mouse setting
in the Configuration/Setup Utility.
Date and Time:
Select this choice to set the system
date and time.
The system time is in a 24-hour format:
hour:minute:second.
The system date is in standard format for your country.
For example, in the United States, the format is
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year).
Select Date and Time; then, use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to advance through each data field.
Type the new information; the system saves the
information as you type it.
The Date and Time choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
58
Netfinity Server HMM
System Security: To control access to the
information in your server databases, you can implement
two levels of password protection. Implementing these
security measures helps you to ensure the integrity of the
data and programs that are stored in your server.
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the
unattended-start mode. This locks the keyboard and
mouse, but allows the system to start the operating
system. The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you
enter the correct password.
The System Security choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup menu.
To set, change, or delete a password:
1. Select System Security.
2. Select the password that you want to change.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
After you set a power-on or administrator password, you
must enter the password when you turn on the server.
(The passwords do not appear on the screen as you type
them.)
Type of Password
Results
No password set
Ÿ
Ÿ
No password required to start system.
You can access all choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Power-on password
only
Ÿ
You must enter the password to complete
the system startup.
You can access all the choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Ÿ
Administrator
password only
Ÿ
Ÿ
Administrator and
power-on password
Ÿ
You must enter the password to complete
the system startup.
Administrator password provides access to
all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
You can enter either password to complete
the system startup.
– Administrator password provides
access to all choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
You can set, change, or delete both
the administrator and power-on
passwords, and allow a power-on
password to be changed by the user.
– Power-on password provides access to
a limited set of choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
This might include changing or deleting
the power-on password.
– If you forget the power-on password,
and the administrator password has
been set, use the administrator
password at the power-on password
prompt; then, start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and
change the power-on password.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
59
Using the Power-On Password Menu: When a
power-on password is set, you must enter a password
each time that you start the system.
To set a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Power-on Password
data field.
You can use any combination of up to seven
characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your power-on
password. Keep a record of your password in a
secure place.
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Power-on Password
Again data field and type the password again.
Note
A message appears if the two passwords do not
match. If this happens, press Esc to cancel the
request and return to the System Security menu.
4. Select Change Power-on Password to save the new
password; then, press Enter.
When a power-on password is set, POST does not
complete until you enter the password. If you forget the
power-on password, you can regain access to the server
through one of the following methods:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If an administrator password has been set, enter the
administrator password at the power-on prompt. (See
“Using the Administrator Password Menu” on page 61
for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and change the power-on password as
previously described in this section (see steps 1
through 4).
You can change the position of the Power-On
Password Override jumper, as described in
“Bypassing an Unknown Power-on Password” on
page 19.
You can remove the battery as described in “Battery
Replacement” on page 170 and then reinstall the
battery.
To delete a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Power-on Password; then, press
Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to
delete the power-on password. Press Esc to cancel
the request and return to the System Security menu.
60
Netfinity Server HMM
To allow the system to start in unattended mode when
a power-on password is set:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password screen appears.
2. Select Allow for unattended boot with password.
Press the Left Arrow (←) key or Right Arrow (→) key
to toggle the entry to On.
Using the Administrator Password Menu: The
administrator password (sometimes called a
supervisor-level password) controls access to some
features of the server, including the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
Attention
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten,
it cannot be overridden or removed. You must replace
the system board.
To set an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System
Security menu: then, press Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Administrator
Password data field.
A password can contain any combination of up to
seven alphanumeric characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9).
Keep a record of your password in a secure place.
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Administrator
Password Again data field and type the password
again.
Note
A message appears if the two passwords do not
match. If this happens, press Esc to cancel the
request and return to the System Security menu.
4. Select Change Administrator Password to save the
new password; then, press Enter. The password
becomes effective immediately.
To delete an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Administrator Password; then, press
Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to
delete the administrator password. Press Esc to
return to the System Security menu.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
61
To enable a user to change the power-on password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Administrator Password screen appears.
2. Select Power-on password changeable by user.
Press the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
toggle the entry to Yes.
When this choice is enabled, System Security appears on
the limited Configuration/Setup Utility menu. The System
Security menu contains the Power-on Password choice.
Start Options:
Start options take effect when you
start your server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as
the keyboard speed. You also can specify whether the
keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also can
enable the server to run in disketteless and monitorless
operation.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the
device from which the operating system loads. For
example, you can define a startup sequence that checks
for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks
the hard disk drive in bay 1, and then checks a network
adapter.
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for
changes in the master boot record at startup. You also
can choose to run POST in the enhanced mode or the
quick mode.
Select Start Options; then, use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to advance through each data field.
The Start Options choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Advanced Setup: Select Advanced Setup to
change values for advanced hardware features, such as
cache control, ROM shadowing, and PCI bus control.
A warning message displays above the choices on this
menu, to alert you that the system might malfunction if
these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the
instructions on the screen carefully.
Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to scroll
through each data field after you select one of the setup
options.
The Advanced Setup choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
62
Netfinity Server HMM
ACPI Control: Select this choice to enable or disable
the advanced configuration and power management
interface (ACPI) in the BIOS. You can choose to change
the ACPI hardware signature or select an IRQ for ACPI.
Cache Control: Select this choice to enable or disable
the microprocessor cache. In addition, you can define the
microprocessor cache mode as write-back (WB) or
write-through (WT).
Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum
system performance.
Note
If the system does not start (boot) successfully after
three attempts, the default configuration is loaded,
disabling the cache.
PCI Bus Control: Select PCI Bus Control to get the
following choices:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
PCI-PCI Bridge Pre-fetching: Set PCI-PCI bridge
pre-fetching to Enabled for maximum performance.
If you experience problems running peer-to-peer
adapters, disable this function.
PCI Primary Bus MLT: This setting is for the primary
master latency timer (MLT). It can be used to help
tune performance of the server.
PCI Secondary BUS MLT: This setting is for the
secondary master latency timer (MLT). It can be
used to help tune performance of the server.
PCI Interrupt Routing: This choice can be used to
manually override the interrupts for PCI devices. Any
changes that you make in PCI Interrupt Routing will
not be reflected in the IRQ settings displayed in the
PCI Routing selection of the System Information
menu until you restart the server.
Memory Settings: Select this choice to manually
disable or enable a row of memory.
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory
configuration, the server can automatically disable the
failing row of memory and continue operating with reduced
memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually
enable the row of memory after the problem is corrected.
Choose Memory Settings from the Advanced Setup
menu; then use the the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓)
key to highlight the row that you want to enable. Use the
Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to select Enable.
Advanced ISA Settings: Select this choice to select
the I/O recovery timer settings.
System Service Processor Settings: Select this
choice to change the system management processor IRQ.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
63
Plug and Play:
Before you can install Plug and Play
adapters, you must configure ISA legacy adapters (if
applicable) and assign the resources that are used by
these adapters. When you install an ISA legacy adapter,
you must allocate the system resources that the adapter
will use. Select Plug and Play to view and identify these
resources, which include:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Memory
I/O ports
Direct memory access (DMA)
Interrupt
Note
These menus do not display the resources that are
required for the system or by Plug and Play devices.
Select Plug and Play; then, use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down
Arrow (↓) key to highlight the assignment that you want to
change. Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
select from the list of available choices.
Enter the appropriate values in the Interrupt Resources
data fields. These values range from 0 through 15.
The Plug and Play choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Note
For further details about Plug and Play devices, see
“Plug and Play Technology” on page 168.
Error Logs:
Select Error Logs to choose to view
either the POST error log or the system error log.
POST Error Log: Select POST Error Log to view the
three most recent error errors detected and logged during
POST. You can clear the Post error log from this screen
by selecting Clear error logs.
System Error Log: Select System Error Log to view
the system error log. The system error log contains all of
the error and warning messages generated during POST
and all system status messages from the system
management processor. The most recent error is
displayed first. Use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓)
keys to move through the system error log. You can clear
the system error log by selecting Clear error logs.
Save Settings:
After you make configuration
changes, review them to be sure that they contain the
correct information. If the information is correct, select
Save Settings to save the selected changes.
64
Netfinity Server HMM
Restore Settings: After you make configuration
changes, review them to be sure that they contain the
correct information. If the information is incorrect, or if you
do not want to save these changes, select Restore
Settings to delete the changes and restore the previous
settings.
Load Default Settings:
If you make configuration
changes and then decide that you want to use default
values instead, select Load Default Settings to cancel the
changes and restore the factory settings.
Exit Setup:
Select to exit from the
Configuration/Setup utility program. If you have made any
changes, you will be asked if you want to make the
changes or exit without making the changes.
ServeRAID System Board Controller
The following information is for the integrated ServeRAID
controller on the system board.
Ÿ
“Understanding RAID Technology” on page 67.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Configuration Program” on page 71.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program” on page 95.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program”
on page 100.
Ÿ
“ServeRaid the Administration Functions” on
page 105.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Monitoring Functions” on page 118.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID IPSSEND Program (Starting)” on
page 122.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID IPSSEND Program (Using)” on
page 123.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID IPSMON Program (Starting)” on
page 132.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID IPSMON Program (Using)” on page 132.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Device Drivers and Utility Programs
(Installation)” on page 134.
Ÿ
“Administration and Monitoring Program” on
page 134.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Programs for Windows NT and Windows
95” on page 134.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Background-Server Components” on
page 135.
Ÿ
“ServeRAID Programs for OS/2 and NetWare” on
page 135.
Ÿ
“ServerRAID Programs for OpenServer and
UnixWare” on page 136.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
65
Ÿ
“Installing the ServeRAID WIN32-Based Program” on
page 136.
Ÿ
“Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers” on page 138.
Ÿ
“Starting the ServeRAID Background-Server
Components” on page 155.
Ÿ
“ServerRAID Background-Server Components” on
page 156.
Ÿ
“IPSSEND and IPSMON Programs” on page 158.
Ÿ
“Rebuilding a Defunct Drive” on page 161.
66
Netfinity Server HMM
Understanding RAID Technology
RAID is the technology of grouping several hard disk
drives in a computer into an array that you can define as
one or more logical drives. Each logical drive appears to
the operating system as a single drive. This grouping
technique greatly enhances logical-drive capacity and
performance beyond the physical limitations of a single
hard disk drive.
When you group multiple physical hard disk drives into a
logical drive, the ServeRAID controller can transfer data in
parallel from the multiple drives in the array. This parallel
transfer yields data-transfer rates that are many times
higher than with nonarrayed drives. This increased speed
makes the system better able to meet the throughput (the
amount of work in a given amount of time) or productivity
needs of the multiple-user network environment.
The ability to respond to multiple data requests provides
not only an impressive increase in throughput, but also a
decrease in response time. The combination of parallel
transfers and simultaneous responses to multiple requests
allows disk arrays to provide a high level of performance in
network environments.
Interleave Depth and Stripe-Unit Size
: With RAID technology, data is striped across an array
of hard disk drives. This data-distribution scheme
complements the way the operating system requests data.
The granularity at which data from one file is stored on one
drive of the array before subsequent data is stored on the
next drive of the array is called the interleave depth.
You can control the interleave depth and maximize the
performance of your ServeRAID controller by setting a
stripe-unit size that is close to the size of the system I/O
requests. You can set the stripe-unit size to 8 KB, 16 KB,
32 KB, or 64 KB. For example, performance in
transaction-based environments, which typically involve
large blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit
size is set to 32 KB or 64 KB; however, performance in file
and print environments, which typically involve multiple
small blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit
size is set to 8 KB or 16 KB.
The collection, in logical order of these stripe units, from
the first drive of the array to the last drive of the array, is
called a stripe. (See page 90 for more information.)
Supported RAID Levels
: Disk arrays are used to improve performance and
reliability. The amount of improvement depends on the
application programs that you run on the server and the
RAID levels that you assign to the logical drives.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
67
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers support RAID
level-0, RAID level-1, Enhanced RAID level-1, and RAID
level-5.
RAID Level-0: RAID level-0 stripes the data across all
the drives in the array. This offers substantial speed
enhancement, but provides for no data redundancy. RAID
level-0 provides the largest capacity of the RAID levels
offered, because no room is taken up for redundant data
or data-parity storage.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
of three hard disk drives defined as one RAID level-0
logical drive. Notice that the data is striped across all the
drives in the array, but no copies of the data or parity
information is stored.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stripe 1
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Stripe 2
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Stripe 3
Block 7
Block 8
Block 9
A hard disk failure within the array results in loss of data in
the logical drive assigned RAID level-0, but only in that
logical drive. If you have logical drives assigned RAID
level-1 or level-5 in the same array, they will not lose data.
Note
The ServeRAID controller automatically assigns RAID
level-0 to all logical drives in an array containing only
one hard disk drive.
When you replace a failed drive, the ServeRAID controller
can rebuild all the RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical
drives automatically onto the replacement hard disk drive.
However, any data stored in a failed RAID level-0 logical
drive is lost.
Though the risk of data loss is present, you might want to
assign RAID level-0 to one of the logical drives to take
advantage of the speed offered with this RAID level. You
could use this logical drive to enter data that you back up
each day and for which safety is not of primary
importance, that is, data that you can re-create easily.
You also might want to use a RAID level-0 logical drive
when the work you are doing requires maximum capacity.
68
Netfinity Server HMM
RAID Level-1
: RAID level-1 provides 100% data redundancy and
requires two hard disk drives. With RAID level-1, the first
half of a stripe is the original data; the second half of a
stripe is a mirror (copy) of the data, but written to another
drive.
Because the data is mirrored, the capacity of the logical
drive when assigned RAID level-1 is 50% of the physical
capacity of the two hard disk drives in the array.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
of two hard disk drives defined as one RAID level-1 logical
drive. Notice that the data on Drive B is a mirror copy of
the data on Drive A.
Drive A
Drive B
.
.
.
Data Stripe 1
Block 1
Mirror Stripe
1
Block 1
Data Stripe 2
Block 2
Mirror Stripe
2
Block 2
Data Stripe 3
Block 3
Mirror Stripe
3
Block 3
.
If one of the hard disk drives fails, the ServeRAID
controller switches read and write requests to the
remaining functional drive in the array.
Enhanced RAID Level-1: When you group more than
two physical drives into an array and you select RAID
level-1, the ServeRAID controller automatically assigns the
IBM Enhanced RAID level-1 to the array.
The Enhanced RAID level-1 combines mirroring with data
striping. This RAID level stripes data and copies of the
data across all the drives in the array. As with the
standard RAID level-1, the data is mirrored, and the
capacity of the logical drive is 50% of the physical capacity
of the grouping of hard disk drives in the array.
The Enhanced RAID level-1 requires a minimum of three
drives and, depending upon the stripe-unit size, supports a
maximum of eight or 16 drives.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
with three hard disk drives. The logical drive is assigned
the Enhanced RAID level-1. Notice that the first stripe is
the data stripe and the second stripe is the mirror (copy) of
the first data stripe, but shifted one drive.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
69
.
.
.
.
.
.
Data Stripe 1
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Mirror Stripe
1
Block 3
Block 1
Block 2
Data Stripe 2
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Mirror Stripe
2
Block 6
Block 4
Block 5
RAID Level-5: RAID level-5 requires a minimum of
three hard disk drives. This RAID level stripes data and
parity across all drives in the array. When an array is
assigned RAID level-5, the capacity of the logical drive is
reduced by one drive (for data-parity storage).
RAID level-5 is generally the most desirable choice,
because it offers both data protection and increased
throughput. RAID level-5 gives you higher capacity than
RAID level-1, but RAID level-1 offers better performance.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
with three hard disk drives. The logical drive is assigned
RAID level-5. Notice that the storage of the data parity
also is striped, and it shifts from drive to drive.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stripe 1
Block 1
Block 2
Parity 1+2
Stripe 2
Block 3
Parity 3+4
Block 4
Stripe 3
Parity 5+6
Block 5
Block 6
Stripe 4
Block 7
Block 8
Parity 7+8
70
Netfinity Server HMM
ServeRAID Configuration Program
The graphical interface in the ServeRAID Configuration
Program makes it easy for you to create, delete, change,
or view your ServeRAID configuration. Before you begin,
review the following illustration to become familiar with the
layout of the configuration program screens.
1
2
3
4
5
Descriptions of the numbered areas are as follows:
1. Menu Bar Provides standard File, View, Actions, and
Help pull-down menus. See “Menu Bar” on
page 86 for more information.
2. Tool Bar Provides quick-path icons for common tasks.
The icons from left to right are Save the
Configuration Event Log, Configure the
ServeRAID Controller, Configure for
Clustering, Scan for New or Removed Ready
Drives, Create an Array, and Help. See “Tool
Bar” on page 85 for more information.
Provides an expandable tree view of your
ServeRAID subsystem. You will perform
most of your ServeRAID configuration and
maintenance tasks by first selecting the
ServeRAID controller, array, logical drive,
hot-spare drive, or physical drive objects from
this Main Tree.
4. Main Panel Provides specific device information or
configuration instructions. When the
configuration program is in the Information
mode and you select an object from the Main
Tree, detailed information about the object
appears in this panel. When the
configuration program is in the Configuration
mode, the instructions needed to configure
your ServeRAID subsystem appear in this
panel.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
71
5. Event Viewer Provides advisory and progressive-status
information and messages during the
ServeRAID configuration process. Each
message appears with a time stamp, a date
stamp, and an icon that classifies the severity
of the event. Attention messages identify
potential data-loss situations, and Fatal
messages inform you when a failure has
occurred.
Starting the Configuration Program
: The ServeRAID Configuration Program runs in two
modes: the Configuration mode and the Information mode.
In the Configuration mode, you can create or delete disk
arrays, create or delete logical drives, and define your
hot-spare drives. When this mode is active, only a limited
set of functions is available from the Menu and Tool Bars.
See “Configuration Mode” on page 73 for more
information.
In the Information mode, you can view the existing device
and configuration information for your ServeRAID
subsystem. When this mode is active, you can use the
functions available from the Menu and Tool Bars to
customize settings for your ServeRAID controllers. See
“Information Mode” on page 78 for more information.
The ServeRAID Configuration Program is provided on the
IBM ServeRAID Configuration CD packaged with the
ServeRAID adapter, and it also is provided on the
ServerGuide CD (CD 1) that comes with some IBM server
models.
Notes
1. If you are configuring a ServeRAID controller on
a system board, see the installation instructions
and CDs provided with your server for
information about starting the configuration
programs for the server.
2. To gain access to the ServeRAID Configuration
or Mini-Configuration programs, you must restart
the server.
To start the configuration program:
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Configuration CD (or the
ServerGuide CD 1) into the CD-ROM drive; then, turn
on the server.
One of the following screens will appear:
Ÿ If the configuration program detects unconfigured
ServeRAID controllers, the program starts in the
Configuration mode and a screen similar to the
following appears.
72
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program - [Configure the ServeRAID Controller]
? X
File View Actions Help
IBM Server (BEST SERVER)
Controller 1 (not configured)
This program will guide you through the configuration of your ServeRAID
controller. You must configure each controller before you can use it.
To begin the configuration process, select a controller from the tree on
the left and select 'Express' or 'Custom' configuration path below;
then, click on the 'Next' button.
Configuration Paths
Express Configuration for Controller 1
Select this choice to configure your ServeRaid
controller automatically.
Custom Configuration for Controller 1
Select this choice to configure your ServeRaid
controller manually.
< Back
Next >
Cancel
Help
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The program found 1 ServeRAID controllers.
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program started.
Click on the Cancel button to switch from the
Configuration mode to the Information mode. all
ServeRAID controllers in the server are
configured, the program starts in the Information
mode and a screen similar to the following
appears.
IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program - [Controller 1 Information]
? X
File View Actions Help
IBM Server (BEST SERVER)
Controller 1
ServeRAID Controller Information
Description or Value
Controller Number
Firmware Version
Read-Ahead Cache Mode
Stripe-Unit Size
Rebuild Rate
Hot-Swap Rebuild
Data Scrubbing
Auto-Synchronization
Number of Arrays
Number of Logical Drives
Number of Hot-Spare Drives
1
3.00.00
Enabled
8K
High
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
2
2
0
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The program found 1 ServeRAID controllers.
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program started.
Click on the
icon on the Tool Bar to
switch from the Information mode to the
Configuration mode.
2. Continue with one of the following:
Ÿ “Configuration Mode”
Ÿ “Information Mode” on page 78
Configuration Mode
: You can use the Configuration mode to create up to
eight independent disk arrays for each ServeRAID
controller. The Configuration mode provides two
configuration paths: Express Configuration and Custom
Configuration.
Express Configuration provides a quick and easy path for
you to automatically configure your ServeRAID controller.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
73
This choice creates the most efficient ServeRAID
configuration based on the number and capacity of the
Ready drives available in your system. If four or more
Ready drives of the same capacity are available, this
choice also will define a hot-spare drive for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller. A hot-spare drive is a physical drive
that is defined for automatic use when a similar drive fails.
The Express Configuration choice groups up to 16 Ready
drives of the same capacity into one disk array and defines
one logical drive for each array. This choice defines the
size of the logical drive, based on the amount of free
space available, and it assigns the highest RAID level
possible, based on the number of physical drives available.
For example, if your server contains one 1024 MB Ready
drive, two 2150 MB Ready drives, and four 4300 MB
Ready drives, Express Configuration will create three
arrays and one hot-spare drive as follows:
Array A:
The total capacity of this array is 1024 MB
(1 x 1024 MB) and it contains one 1024 MB
RAID level-0 logical drive.
Array B:
The total capacity of this array is 4300 MB
(2 x 2150 MB) and it contains one 2150 MB
RAID level-1 logical drive.
Array C:
The total capacity of this array is 12900 MB
(3 x 4300 MB) and it contains one 8600 MB
RAID level-5 logical drive.
Hot Spare: Express Configuration defines one of the four
4300 MB drives as a hot-spare drive, as
follows:
Ÿ
Ÿ
When there are four or more Ready
drives of the same capacity, Express
Configuration groups three of the drives
into one array (as in Array C) and
defines one of the drives as a hot spare.
A hot-spare drive must be of equal or
greater capacity than the drive that it is
intended to replace. In this
configuration, the 4300 MB drive can
replace any failed drives in Array B or
Array C.
Using Express Configuration
To use the Express Configuration path:
1. Click on the ServeRAID controller that you want to
configure in the Main Tree.
2. Click on the Express Configuration radio button.
3. Click on the Next button.
4. Review the information that appears on the
Configuration Summary screen.
74
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. Some operating systems have size
limitations for logical drives. Before you
save the configuration, you might want to
verify that the size of the logical drive is
appropriate for your operating system. See
your operating-system documentation for
more detailed information.
2. To change the configuration, click on a
Modify icon button.
5. Click on the Apply button to accept and save the
configuration.
6. If you have not already done so, install your operating
system. See the server documentation or the
documentation provided with your operating system
for more information.
After you install your operating system, see “ServeRAID
Device Drivers and Utility Programs (Installation)” on
page 134 (or see the installation instructions provided with
your server) for information about installing the ServeRAID
device drivers and utility programs.
Learning about Custom Configuration
: The Custom Configuration path allows you to manually
configure your ServeRAID subsystem. Using this path,
you can select the drives that you want to include in each
array, define the number and size of the logical drives for
each array, and select the drives that you want to use as
hot spares.
Before you select the Custom Configuration path, consider
the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are not familiar with the IBM implementation of
RAID technology, you might want to review the
information provided in “Understanding RAID
Technology” on page 67 before you begin.
Each ServeRAID controller supports a maximum of
eight arrays.
Each ServeRAID controller supports a maximum of
eight logical drives.
When you create an array, you group hard disk drives
into one storage area. You can define this storage
area as a single logical drive, or you can subdivide it
into several logical drives. Each logical drive appears
to the operating system as a single physical hard disk
drive.
If you have only one array, you can define it as a
single logical drive, or you can divide it into several
logical drives. Typically, the first logical drive defined
on the first ServeRAID adapter or controller found by
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
75
the basic input/output system (BIOS) during startup
will be your startup (boot) drive.
If you have two or more arrays, each array can be
one logical drive, or you can divide each array into
multiple logical drives, as long as the total number of
logical drives for all of the arrays does not exceed
eight.
Note
Independent of the RAID logical drives, most
operating systems allow you to partition the
logical drives further.
The optimal way to create arrays is to use hard disk
drives that have the same capacity.
Ÿ
Hard disk drive capacities influence the way you
create arrays. Drives in an array can be of different
capacities (1 GB1, or 2 GB, for example), but RAID
controllers treat them as if they all have the capacity
of the smallest disk drive.
For example, if you group three 1 GB drives and one
2 GB drive into an array, the total capacity of the
array is 1 GB times 4, or 4 GB, not the 5 GB
physically available. Similarly, if you group three 2
GB drives and one 1 GB drive into an array, the total
capacity of that array is 4 GB, not the 7 GB physically
available.
A hot-spare drive is a disk drive that is defined for
automatic use in the event of a drive failure. The
hot-spare drive must be of equal or greater capacity
than the drive that it is intended to replace. If a
physical drive fails and it is part of a RAID level-1 or
RAID level-5 logical drive, the ServeRAID controller
automatically starts to rebuild the data on the
hot-spare drive.
You can include a maximum of 16 physical drives in
an array when the stripe-unit size is set to 8 KB (the
default setting) or 16 KB, and you can include a
maximum of 8 physical drives in an array when the
stripe-unit size is set to 32 KB or 64 KB. (See
“Interleave Depth and Stripe-Unit Size” on page 67
and page 90 for more information.)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Using Custom Configuration
: To use the Custom Configuration path:
1. Click on the ServeRAID controller that you want to
configure in the Main Tree.
1
When referring to hard-disk-drive capacity, GB means
approximately 1 000 000 000 bytes; total user-accessible
capacity may vary depending on operating environment.
76
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Click on the Custom Configuration radio button.
3. Click on the Next button.
4. Using the right mouse button, click on the drive or
SCSI Channel icons in the Main Tree to select the
drives that you want to add to your arrays, delete
from your arrays, or define as hot-spare drives; then,
select a choice from the pop-up list.
or
Drag the drive or SCSI Channel icon from the Main
Tree and drop it on the Array or Hot-Spare Drive icon
in the Main Panel on the right. If you change your
mind, you can drag the icons back to the Main Tree
to remove them from the configuration.
5. After you select the data drives for your arrays and
define your hot-spare drives, click on the Next button.
If you change your mind, you can:
Ÿ Remove a specific drive from a newly defined
array or delete an entire newly defined array. To
do this, click on the Back button, use the right
mouse button to click on the specific drive or
Array icon in the Main Panel on the right, and
then select Remove from New Array or Delete
New Array.
Ÿ Remove a specific hot-spare drive or all newly
defined hot-spare drives. To do this, click on the
Back button, use the right mouse button to click
on the Hot-Spare Drive icon in the Main Panel
on the right, and then select Remove New
Hot-Spare Drive or Remove All New
Hot-Spare Drives.
6. Select a RAID level for the logical drive from the
RAID pull-down menu in the Main Panel. (See
“Supported RAID Levels” on page 67 for descriptions
of the supported levels.)
7. Move the sliding bar in the Main Panel from right to
left to allot data and parity space for the logical drive.
Notes
1. You can define from one to eight logical
drives.
2. Some operating systems have size
limitations for logical drives. Before you
save the configuration, you might want to
verify that the size of the logical drive is
appropriate for your operating system. See
your operating-system documentation for
more detailed information.
3. Typically, the first logical drive defined on
the first ServeRAID adapter or controller
found by system BIOS during startup will be
your startup (boot) drive.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
77
8. If free space is available and you want to define
another logical drive, click on the Add Logical Drive
button in the Main Panel.
9. Repeat steps 6, 7, and 8 for each logical drive that
you want to define; then, continue with step 10.
10. Click on the Next button.
11. Review the information that appears on the
Configuration Summary screen.
Note
To change the configuration, click on a Modify
icon button.
12. Click on the Apply button to accept and save the
configuration.
13. If you have not already done so, install your operating
system. See the server documentation or the
documentation provided with your operating system
for more information.
After you install your operating system, see “ServeRAID
Device Drivers and Utility Programs (Installation)” on
page 134 (or the installation instructions provided with
your server) for information about installing the ServeRAID
device drivers and utility programs.
Information Mode
: You can use the Information mode to view the
configuration information for the server, ServeRAID
controllers, arrays, logical drives, hot-spare drives, and
physical drives that make up your ServeRAID subsystem.
You also can use this mode to change some of the
ServeRAID controller settings.
Viewing the Device and Configuration Information
To view the current settings:
1. Click on the plus (+) box next to the object in the
Main Tree to expand that portion of the tree.
2. Click on the icon for the server, ServeRAID controller,
array, logical drive, hot-spare drive, or physical drive
to view its current settings.
Detailed information about the selected device will appear
in the Main Panel on the right. The following pages
provide descriptions of the device information that might
appear.
System Information Panel
When you select the server from the Main Tree, the
following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
78
System Name shows the name you assigned to the
server.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Number of Controllers shows the total number of
ServeRAID adapters and controllers found in the
server.
ServeRAID Controller Information Panel
When you select a ServeRAID controller from the Main
Tree, the following information appears in the Main Panel
on the right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller Type shows the type of ServeRAID
controller, such as ServeRAID II, ServeRAID-3H, or
ServeRAID-3L.
BIOS Version shows the level of basic input/output
system code currently installed for the ServeRAID
controller.
Firmware Version shows the level of microcode
currently installed for the ServeRAID controller.
Physical Slot shows the actual physical slot location
for the ServeRAID controller; for example, PCI slot 4.
Battery Backup Write Cache provides information
about the optional battery-backup cache device.
Statements such as Installed, Not Installed, Defective,
or Replace Battery might appear for this feature.
Read-Ahead Cache Mode shows the current setting,
Enabled or Disabled, for the read-ahead cache mode.
(See page 89 for more information.)
Stripe-Unit Size shows the current setting of 8 KB,
16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB for the stripe-unit size. (See
“Interleave Depth and Stripe-Unit Size” on page 67
and page 90 for more information.)
Rebuild Rate shows the current setting (High,
Medium, or Low) for the rebuild rate. (See page 89
for more information.)
Hot-Swap Rebuild shows the current setting,
Enabled or Disabled, for the hot-swap rebuild feature.
This feature is set to Enabled when the level of
ServeRAID firmware in use supports this feature.
Data Scrubbing shows the current setting, Enabled
or Disabled, for the data-scrubbing feature. This
feature is set to Enabled when the level of ServeRAID
firmware in use supports this feature. The
data-scrubbing feature continuously reads all sectors
of RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives “in the
background” while your system is running. If a
defective sector is found, it is automatically repaired.
With this feature Enabled, you no longer need to
synchronize RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical
drives on a weekly basis.
Auto-Synchronization shows the setting for this
feature. The auto-synchronization feature always
appears as Enabled when the level of ServeRAID
firmware in use supports this feature. (See page 91
for more information.)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
79
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Clustering shows the current setting, Enabled or
Disabled, for this feature.
ServeRAID Controller Host ID appears only when
the controller is part of a shared-disk cluster.
Cluster Partner Host ID appears only when the
ServeRAID controller is configured for use in a
shared-disk cluster.
Number of Arrays shows the total number of arrays
(1 to 8) defined for this ServeRAID controller.
Number of Logical Drives shows the total number of
logical drives (1 to 8) defined for this ServeRAID
controller.
Number of Hot-Spare Drives shows the total
number of hot-spare drives defined for this
ServeRAID controller.
Array Information Panel
When you select the Arrays icon from the Main Tree,
general information about all configured arrays (such as
size, free space, and number of logical drives in each
array) appears in the Main Panel on the right.
When you select a specific array from the Main Tree, the
following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Array Letter shows the letter (A through H) assigned
to the array.
Array Size in MB shows the total size, in MB, of the
array.
Free Space in MB shows the amount of free space
available in the array.
Number of Logical Drives shows the number of
logical drives (1 to 8) defined for the array.
Number of Physical Drives shows the number of
physical drives grouped in the array.
Logical Drive Information Panel
When you select a logical drive from the Main Tree, the
following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
80
Logical Drive Number shows the number (1 to 8)
assigned to the logical drive.
Array Letter shows the letter (A through H) assigned
to the array in which the logical drive resides.
Drive State shows the current state of the logical
drive. See “Logical Drive State Descriptions” on
page 82 for descriptions of the states that might
appear in this field.
RAID Level shows the RAID level (0, 1, or 5)
assigned to the logical drive.
Data Space in MB shows the amount of space in the
logical drive defined for data storage.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Parity Space in MB shows the amount of space in
the logical drive allocated for parity storage.
Date Created shows the date that you created the
logical drive.
Write-Cache Mode shows the current setting, write
through or write back, for the logical drive.
Battery Backup Write Cache shows the current
setting, Enabled or Disabled, for the battery backup
cache device. When the battery backup cache device
is installed, write cache is set to the write-back mode.
Merge-Group Number appears if the ServeRAID
controller is part of a cluster. The valid settings in the
Shared state are 1 through 8. Valid settings in the
Non-Shared state are 201 through 215.
Merge-Group State shows the current setting,
Shared or Non-Shared, for this parameter.
Hot-Spare Drive Information Panel
When you select the Hot-Spare Drives icon from the Main
Tree, information about the total number of functional
hot-spare and standby hot-spare drives defined for the
ServeRAID controller appears in the Main Panel on the
right.
When you select a specific hot-spare drive from the Main
Tree, the following information appears in the Main Panel
on the right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
SCSI ID shows the SCSI ID assigned to the drive.
Channel shows the SCSI channel to which the
hot-spare drive is attached.
Drive Type shows the type of physical drive. For a
hot spare, this will always appear as Hard Disk Drive.
Size in MB shows the total capacity of the hard disk
drive in MB.
Drive State shows the drive state. For a hot spare,
this will always appear as Hot Spare.
Vendor shows characters that represent the drive
manufacturer.
Product or Model Number shows characters that
represent the product or model number for the drive.
Serial Number shows the serial number for the drive.
Drive Firmware Level shows the current level of
microcode in use for the drive.
PFA Error indicates the status, Yes or No, for
predictive-failure alerts. Yes indicates that PFA errors
were detected and that you should plan to replace the
device. No indicates that PFA errors were not found.
Physical Drive Information Panel
When you select the Physical Drives icon from the Main
Tree, information about the total number of drives
connected to each channel of the ServeRAID adapter or
controller appears in the Main Panel on the right.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
81
When you select a specific physical drive from the Main
Tree, the following information appears in the Main Panel
on the right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
SCSI ID shows the SCSI ID assigned to the drive.
Channel shows the SCSI channel to which the
physical drive is attached.
Drive Type shows the type of physical drive (Hard
Disk, CD-ROM, Tape, Enclosure, Removable-Media,
or Unknown) selected.
Size in MB shows the total capacity of the drive, in
MB, if the drive is a hard disk. No value will appear if
the physical drive is a CD-ROM or Tape drive.
Drive State shows the current state of the physical
drive. See “Physical Drive State Descriptions” on
page 83 for descriptions of the states that might
appear in this field.
Array Letter shows the letter (A through H) assigned
to the array in which the physical drive resides, if the
physical drive is part of an array.
Vendor shows characters that represent the drive
manufacturer.
Product or Model Number shows characters that
represent the product or model number for the drive.
Serial Number shows the serial number for the drive.
Drive Firmware Level shows the current level of
microcode in use for the drive.
PFA Error indicates the status, Yes or No, for
predictive-failure alerts. Yes indicates that PFA errors
were detected and that you should plan to replace the
device. No indicates that PFA errors were not found.
Channel Information Panel
When you select a SCSI Channel icon from the Main Tree,
the following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Number of Drives shows the number of physical
drives currently attached to the SCSI channel.
SCSI Initiator ID shows the initiator ID for the SCSI
channel.
SCSI Transfer Speed shows the current SCSI
transfer setting (Optimal, Ultra2 SCSI, UltraSCSI, Fast
SCSI 2, or SCSI 2) for the entire channel. See page
93 for more information.
Logical Drive State Descriptions
: The following table provides descriptions of the valid
logical drive states.
82
Netfinity Server HMM
Drive
State
Meaning
Blocked
During a rebuild operation, the ServeRAID
controller sets the state of any RAID level-0
logical drives associated with a failed array
to the Blocked state; then, it reconstructs the
data that was stored in RAID level-1 and
RAID level-5 logical drives.
After the Rebuild operation completes, you
can unblock the RAID level-0 logical drives,
and access them once again. However, the
logical drive might contain damaged data.
You must either re-create, install, or restore
the data from the most recent backup disk or
tape to the RAID level-0 logical drive.
Critical
Migrating
A logical drive in the critical state that is
undergoing a logical drive migration (LDM).
Critical
System
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved
state during a logical drive migration (LDM).
Critical
A RAID level-1 or level-5 logical drive that
contains a defunct physical drive is in the
critical state. A critical logical drive is
accessible, despite a physical drive failure.
Attention
If the state of the logical drive is critical,
replace and rebuild the defunct drive as
soon as possible to prevent the loss of
data. If a second drive fails before the
first rebuild completes, you might lose
valuable data. See “Rebuilding a
Defunct Drive” on page 161 for more
information.
Migrating
The logical drive is undergoing a logical drive
migration; that is, a change in RAID levels, a
change in logical drive size, or an increase in
free space.
Offline
The logical drive is offline and not
accessible. This state occurs if one or more
physical drives in a RAID level-0 logical drive
is defunct. This state also occurs when two
or more physical drives in a RAID level-1 or
level-5 logical drive are defunct.
Okay
The logical drive is okay. It is in a good,
functional state.
System
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved
state during logical drive migration (LDM).
If the state of the logical drive is critical you must replace
and rebuild the defunct drive. See “Rebuilding a Defunct
Drive” on page 161 for more information.
Physical Drive State Descriptions
: The following table provides descriptions of the valid
physical drive states.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
83
Drive
State
Meaning
Defunct
A physical hard disk drive in the Online,
Hot-Spare, or Rebuild state has become
defunct. It does not respond to commands,
which means that the ServeRAID controller
cannot communicate properly with the drive.
A hard disk drive in the Defunct state does
not necessarily mean that you need to
replace the drive. Before you replace the
drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the
server backplane and to the hard disk
drive. Also, check to ensure that all
cables inside the server are connected
properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated
properly in the drive bay.
3. The termination for each device on the
SCSI channel is set properly.
4. Each device on the SCSI channel has
its own, unique SCSI ID.
If the hard disk drive still does not function
after you perform these steps, replace the
drive.
Empty
No device is present in the bay.
Hot Spare
A Hot-Spare drive is a hard disk drive that is
defined for automatic use when a similar
drive fails.
Online
The drive is Online. It is functioning properly
and is part of an array.
Rebuilding
The drive is being rebuilt.
For more information on rebuilding a drive,
refer to “Rebuilding a Defunct Drive” on
page 161.
Ready
The ServeRAID controller recognizes a
Ready drive as being available for definition.
Standby
A Standby drive is a hard disk drive that the
ServeRAID controller has spun down.
Standby
Hot Spare
A Standby Hot Spare is a Hot-Spare drive
that the ServeRAID controller has spun
down. If an Online drive becomes Defunct
and no suitable Hot-Spare drive is available,
a Standby Hot-Spare drive of the appropriate
size automatically spins up, and enters the
Rebuild state.
Changing the ServeRAID Configuration
Settings
: To change the settings:
1. Click on the plus (+) box next to the object in the
Main Tree to expand the tree.
84
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Click on the icon in the Main Tree for the ServeRAID
controller, array, logical drive, hot-spare drive, or
physical drive that you want to change.
3. Click on Actions in the File Menu; then, make a
selection from the pull-down menu.
or
Using the right mouse button, click on the object in
the Main Tree; then, make a selection from the
pop-up list.
See “Menu Bar” on page 86 for descriptions of the choices
available from the Actions pull-down menu.
Tool Bar
: Descriptions of the quick-path icons provided on the
Tool Bar are as follows:
Save the Configuration Event Log: This icon
appears in the Information mode. When you
select this icon, a pop-up window appears and
lets you specify a file name and path for the
ServeRAID Configuration Event Log.
Note
This feature currently is not supported on
IBM Netfinity 3000, 3500, 5000, and 5500
servers; however, IBM intends to support
this feature on these server models in the
near future. The updated BIOS code
needed to support this feature will be
made available on the World Wide Web.
(See page 134 for the instructions needed
to access the IBM support page.)
Configure the ServeRAID Controller: This
icon appears in the Information mode. When
you select this icon, the configuration program
switches from the Information mode to the
Configuration mode. A message will appear at
the bottom of the Main Panel if no Ready drives
are available for the selected ServeRAID
controller. If this occurs, you can click on the
Cancel button to return to the Information mode
or select another ServeRAID controller.
Configure for Clustering: This icon appears
in the Information mode. You can select this
icon to define the ServeRAID controller for use
in a dual-node, high-availability, shared-disk
cluster environment. Detailed instructions for
using the clustering features are provided in the
IBM Netfinity High-Availability Cluster Solution
Installation and User's Guide. You can obtain a
copy of this manual at the following address on
the World Wide Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/netfinity/clustering
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
85
Scan for New or Removed Ready Drives:
This icon appears in the Information mode.
When you select a ServeRAID controller from
the Main Tree and click on this icon, the
configuration program will scan the individual
channel, or all channels, on the controller for
new or removed Ready drives. Use this feature
whenever you physically change the
configuration of your ServeRAID subsystem, for
example, when you physically install or remove
one or more SCSI drives.
Create an Array: This icon appears in the
Information mode if you select a controller from
the Main Tree and that controller has Ready
drives available.
Help: This icon appears in both the
Information and Configuration modes. Select
this icon to access the online ServeRAID Help
facility. Task-oriented Help is available from
many of the pop-up windows that appear during
the configuration process; and, you also can
obtain context-sensitive Help by selecting an
item and then pressing the F1 key.
Menu Bar
: Descriptions of the choices available from the Menu
Bar are as follows:
File
The File pull-down menu contains the
following choices in the Information mode:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
View
The View pull-down menu contains the
following choices in both the Information and
Configuration modes:
Ÿ
Ÿ
86
Save Configuration Event Log: Select
this choice to save configuration event
information (such as the start time and
completion time for a rebuild operation)
to a file.
Clear Configuration Event Log:
Select this choice to erase the event
information stored in the Configuration
Event Log.
Exit: Select this choice to exit from the
ServeRAID Configuration Program.
Small Icons: This is the default setting.
When you select this choice, small icons
appear in the Main Tree on the left and
the Main Panel on the right.
Large Icons: Select this choice to
display large icons in the Main Tree on
the left and the Main Panel on the right.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Options: Select this choice to change
the Initialization and Synchronization
mode, as follows:
– Basic: This is the default setting.
When this mode is Enabled, the
configuration program automatically
initializes each new logical drive
and prevents access to the manual
initialization and synchronization
functions. This choice also forces
the synchronization of all new RAID
level-5 logical drives attached to
older ServeRAID adapter or
controller models that do not
support the auto-synchronization
feature.
– Advanced: When Enabled, this
choice lets you select to
automatically initialize new logical
drives and force the
synchronization of all new RAID
level-5 logical drives before exiting
the ServeRAID Configuration
Program.
Attention
If you disable Automatic
Initialization, the ServeRAID
Configuration Program will not
initialize each logical drive (by
writing zeros to the first 1024
sectors of the logical drive)
when it is created. You still
must initialize all newly defined
logical drives before storing
data. If you disable the
synchronization feature and the
level of firmware being used by
the ServeRAID adapter or
controller does not support the
auto-synchronization feature,
you still must synchronize all
RAID level-5 logical drives
before storing data.
Actions
All choices available from the Actions
pull-down menu also are available from the
pop-up lists that appear when you use the
right mouse button and click on the object in
the Main Tree.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select a
ServeRAID controller from the Main Tree:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
87
Ÿ
Ÿ
Configure the ServeRAID Controller:
This choice is available in the
Information mode only. It appears on
the pull-down menu when there are
Ready drives and logical-drive slots still
available for the ServeRAID controller.
Configure for Clustering: This choice
is available in the Information mode
only. You can select this choice to
define the ServeRAID controller for use
in a high-availability, shared-disk cluster
environment. Detailed instructions for
using the clustering features are
provided in the IBM Netfinity
High-Availability Cluster Solution
Installation and User's Guide. You can
obtain a copy of this manual at the
following address on the World Wide
Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/netfinity/clustering
Ÿ
Initialize the Controller Configuration:
This choice is available in both the
Configuration and Information modes.
Select this choice to delete the
ServeRAID controller configuration.
Attention
After you initialize the controller
configuration, you will not have
access to any data stored on the
logical drives attached to the
selected ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
This choice deletes the existing
configuration information, sets all
functional hard disk drives attached to
the controller to the Ready state, and
deletes all logical drives defined for the
controller.
Ÿ
88
This choice does not change any of the
ServeRAID adapter or controller settings
(such as the stripe-unit size, rebuild rate,
and so on) from their current or
customized values.
Copy the Configuration from the
Drives to the Controller: This choice
is available in the Information mode
only; it copies the configuration
information stored on the hard disk
drives to the ServeRAID controller. This
function is useful when you import
previously configured drives from
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
another system, or when you replace
the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
Disable or Enable Read-Ahead Cache
Mode: These choices are available in
the Information mode only. When
read-ahead cache is set to Enabled
(default setting), the ServeRAID
controller transfers data from a disk to
its local cache in increments equal to
the stripe-unit size. This provides
excellent overall performance when
workloads are steady and sequential.
However, if the workload is random or
the system I/O requests are smaller than
the stripe-unit size, reading ahead to the
end of the stripe might degrade
performance. When read-ahead cache
is set to Disabled, the ServeRAID
controller transfers data from a disk to
local cache in increments equal to the
system I/O request size, without reading
ahead to the end of the stripe.
Change the Rebuild Rate: This choice
is available in the Information mode
only. You can select this choice to set
the priority for Rebuild operations to
High (default), Medium, or Low.
– When the rebuild rate is set to
High, the rebuild I/O request gets
high priority in the execution order.
– When the rebuild request is set
from High to Medium in a heavily
loaded system, it can increase the
rebuild time, but provide better
system performance.
– When the rebuild request is set
from High or Medium to Low in a
moderate to heavily loaded system,
it can increase the disk rebuild
time, but provide better system
performance.
Change the Stripe-Unit Size: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only.
Attention
After you configure an array and
store data on the logical drives, you
cannot change the stripe-unit size
without destroying data in the
logical drives.
The stripe-unit size is the amount of
data written on a given disk before
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
89
Ÿ
writing on the next disk. To maximize
the overall performance, choose a size
that is close to the size of the system
I/O request. You can set the stripe-unit
size to 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB.
When the stripe-unit size is 8 KB (the
default setting) or 16 KB, the maximum
number of physical drives supported in
an array is 16. When the stripe-unit size
is 32 KB or 64 KB, the maximum
number of physical drives supported in
an array is eight. (See “Interleave
Depth and Stripe-Unit Size” on page 67
for more information.)
Scan for New or Removed Ready
Drives: This choice is available in the
Information mode only. When you
select this choice, the configuration
program scans all channels on the
ServeRAID controller for new or
removed Ready drives.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select the Arrays
icon or a specific array icon from the Main
Tree:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Create an Array: This choice appears
in the Information mode if you select the
Arrays icon and Ready drives are
available. When you select this choice,
the configuration program switches from
the Information mode to the
Configuration mode.
Delete All Arrays: This choice is
available in the Information mode only.
It appears on the Actions pull-down
menu if you select the Arrays icon from
the Main Tree and arrays are defined for
the controller.
Delete Array: This choice is available
in the Information mode only. It appears
on the Actions pull-down menu when
you select a specific array icon from the
Main Tree.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select the Logical
Drives icon or a specific logical drive icon
from the Main Tree:
Ÿ
90
Create a Logical Drive in Array: This
choice appears on the Actions pull-down
menu in the Information mode if you
select the Logical Drives icon and free
space is available in one or more arrays.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Change Write-Cache Mode to Write
Through or Write Back: These
choices are available in the Information
mode when you select a specific logical
drive icon from the Main Tree.
When this feature is set to the
write-through mode, the completion
status of a write command is sent after
the data is written to the hard disk drive.
Under certain workloads, you can
improve performance by changing this
setting to the write-back mode, where
the completion status of a write
command is sent after the data is copied
to cache memory, but before the data is
actually written to the storage device.
Attention
1. You might lose data if a power
outage occurs while using the
write-back mode without a
battery-backup cache device.
2. If you do not have a
battery-backup cache installed
and Enabled and you set this
feature to the write-back mode,
wait at least 10 seconds after
your last operation before you
turn off your system. Failure to
follow this practice can result in
lost data.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Synchronize: This choice is available
in the Information mode when you select
a logical drive from the Main Tree and
the following conditions are both true:
– The ServeRAID adapter or
controller does not support the
auto-synchronization feature.
– You previously selected Options
from the View pull-down menu and
disabled the “Synchronize all new
RAID level-5 logical drives” setting.
Synchronizing a logical drive verifies that
the data redundancy for the logical drive
is correct. You must synchronize all
RAID level-5 logical drives before storing
data. (See page 79 for more
information.)
Initialize: This choice is available in the
Information mode when you select a
logical drive from the Main Tree and you
previously selected Options from the
View pull-down menu and disabled the
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
91
Ÿ
“Automatically initialize new logical
drives” setting.
Unblock the Logical Drive: This
choice appears in the Information mode
when you select a specific logical drive
that is in the Blocked state. You can
select this choice to change the Drive
Access setting for the RAID level-0
logical drive from Blocked to Unblocked.
During a rebuild operation, the
ServeRAID controller sets the state of
any RAID level-0 logical drives
associated with a failed array to the
Blocked state.
After the Rebuild operation completes,
you can unblock the RAID level-0 logical
drives, and access them once again.
However, the logical drive might contain
damaged data. You must either
re-create, install, or restore the data
from the most recent backup disk or
tape to the RAID level-0 logical drive.
The following choice appears on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select a hot-spare
drive from the Main Tree:
Ÿ
Remove from Hot-Spare State: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only. Select this choice to remove
a hot-spare drive from the configuration
and set the drive state back to Ready.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select a physical
drive, a physical drive icon, or a SCSI
channel icon from the Main Tree:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Set Drive State to Hot Spare: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only. It appears when the
physical drive that you select from the
Main Tree is in the Ready state. You
can select this choice to add the drive to
the configuration and to change its state
from Ready to Hot Spare.
Set Drive State to Online: This choice
appears in the Information mode, and
you can use it to change the state of a
drive from Defunct to Online.
Attention
You might lose data by setting a
Defunct physical drive that is part of
an array to Online.
92
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Replace Drive and Rebuild: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only. Select this choice when you
want to physically remove a defunct
drive from the system and install a good
drive in its place.
Change the SCSI Transfer Speed:
This choice is available in the
Information mode only. It appears when
you select a SCSI Channel icon. You
can select this choice to change the
transfer speed from its default value of
Optimal. When the transfer speed is set
to Optimal, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller determines the best transfer
speed, based on the types of SCSI
drives and storage enclosures in use.
Choices available are Ultra2 SCSI,
UltraSCSI, Fast SCSI 2, and SCSI 2.
Remove Defunct Drive: This choice
appears in the Information mode only.
After you physically remove a drive,
select this choice to delete the drive
information from the configuration.
Replace Defunct Drive: This choice
appears in the Information mode only.
Select this choice to physically replace a
defunct disk drive.
Note
Always replace a defunct drive with
a drive of equal or greater capacity.
Ÿ
Help
Scan for New or Removed Ready
Drives: This choice is available in the
Information mode only. When you
select this choice, the configuration
program scans the individual channel or
all channels on the ServeRAID controller
for new or removed Ready drives.
The following choices are available from the
Help pull-down menu:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Contents: Select this choice to access
the online Help facility. This choice is
available in both the Information and
Configuration modes. Task-oriented
Help is available from many of the
pop-up windows that appear during the
configuration process; and, you also can
obtain context-sensitive Help by
selecting an item and then pressing the
F1 key.
About: Select this choice to view the
version number and copyright
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
93
information for the ServeRAID
Configuration Program. This choice is
available in both the Information and
Configuration modes.
94
Netfinity Server HMM
ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program
The ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program is a quick way
to display the current settings for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller. You also can use this program to perform a
limited set of the configuration functions without using the
ServeRAID Configuration CD.
To access the Mini-Configuration program:
1. Turn on the server. If the server already is turned on,
press Ctrl+Alt+Del.
2. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt
appears, press Ctrl+i.
3. If your system contains more than one ServeRAID
adapter or controller, a selection screen will appear.
To continue:
a. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
select an adapter or controller.
b. Press Enter.
If your system contains only one ServeRAID adapter
or controller, or after you select a ServeRAID adapter
or controller, the Main Menu appears.
Descriptions of the choices available from the Main
Menu of the Mini-Configuration program are as
follows:
Ÿ View Controller Status shows the current status
of the ServeRAID adapter or controller. (See
“Viewing the Controller Status” for more
information.)
Ÿ View Configuration shows the current
configuration information for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller. (See “Viewing the
Configuration” on page 96 for more information.)
Ÿ Advanced Functions lets you initialize the
configuration, import configuration from drives,
configure BIOS settings, and view the controller
and PCI information. (See “Advanced
Configuration Functions” on page 97 for more
information.)
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
highlight your choice; then, press Enter.
5. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
6. Click on Exit to leave the Main Menu.
Viewing the Controller Status
: When you select View Controller Status from the Main
Menu, the following information appears on the screen:
Ÿ
Unattended shows the current On/Off state of the
Unattended mode.
– When set to Off, you can choose the recovery
method when there is a ServeRAID adapter or
controller startup error.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
95
–
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
When set to On, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller chooses the recovery method when a
startup error occurs.
Read Ahead shows the current On/Off state of the
Read Ahead Cache mode.
BootCD shows the current On/Off state of the
Bootable CD-ROM function. (Refer to “Setting the
Bootable CD-ROM Feature” on page 98.)
CompMode shows the current BIOS compatibility
mode. On indicates 8 GB Extended; Off indicates 2
GB Limited.
Clustered shows the current On/Off state for
clustering.
NVRBB shows the current state of the battery-backup
cache option. The default value is Enabled.
Boot Blk shows the version number of the bootable
microcode loaded for the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
Code Blk shows the current version number of the
firmware loaded for the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
Rebuild Rate shows the current speed setting for
rebuilds: High, Medium, or Low.
Number of Defunct Drives shows the current
number of Defunct physical drives.
Number of Offline Drives shows the current number
of Offline logical drives.
Number of Critical Drives shows the current number
of Critical logical drives.
Config. Updates shows the number of times that the
configuration has been changed since it has been
initialized. When you initialize the configuration, the
Config. Update resets to zero.
Flash Pgms shows the current number of times that
the Flash EEPROM has been written.
Locked, Bad Stripe, or Blocked Drive identifies the
logical drives that are affected.
– Bad Stripe Drives indicates the area of a logical
drive that is inaccessible.
– Locked Stripe Drives is a reserved field.
– Blocked Drives indicates the logical drives that
are blocked. You must unblock a blocked drive
before you can use it. See “Logical Drive State
Descriptions” on page 82 for more information.
Viewing the Configuration
: You can select View Configuration from the Main
Menu to view the number of each logical drive, and to view
the size, RAID level, state, stripe-unit size, write policy,
read-ahead status, and creation date for each logical drive.
96
Netfinity Server HMM
Advanced Configuration Functions
: You can select the Advanced Functions choice to
reset the ServeRAID adapter or controller, initialize the
configuration, import the configuration information from the
drives, configure BIOS settings, and view the adapter,
controller, or PCI information.
When you select the Advanced Functions choice from the
Main Menu, the following choices appear on the screen.
Attention
Be careful when making selections from this menu. If
you change the configuration, you might lose data.
Ÿ
Initialize Configuration lets you reset the
configuration. You will not have access to any data
stored on the logical drives attached to the selected
ServeRAID adapter or controller.
This choice deletes the existing configuration
information, sets all functional hard disk drives
attached to the controller to the Ready state, and
deletes all logical drives defined for the controller.
Ÿ
Ÿ
This choice does not change any of the ServeRAID
adapter or controller settings (such as the stripe-unit
size, rebuild rate, and so on) from their current or
customized values.
Import Configuration from Drive reads the most
common configuration from the drives in the system
and copies it to the ServeRAID adapter or controller
NVRAM and EEPROM module.
Configure BIOS Settings lets you modify the BIOS
settings, such as the Bootable CD-ROM and INT13
Extensions settings, for the ServeRAID adapter or
controller. (See “Setting the Bootable CD-ROM
Feature” on page 98 for more information.)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
97
Notes
1. The Multiple Controller mode has two
settings: Erase and Shrink. When this
parameter is set to Erase, redundant copies
of the ServeRAID BIOS are erased. When
this parameter is set to Shrink, the extra
copies of the ServeRAID BIOS are removed
from memory, but stored for future use.
When you have multiple ServeRAID
adapters and controllers installed, you need
only one active copy of ServeRAID BIOS.
However, to ensure that you will have a
copy of the ServeRAID BIOS available if
your active copy becomes defective or
unavailable, leave the Multiple Controller
parameter set to Shrink.
2. Only one adapter or controller in the system
can support the INT13 extensions.
Ÿ
Ÿ
View Controller and PCI Information shows the
ServeRAID adapter or controller hardware and PCI
register information.
Exit lets you exit the Mini-Configuration program.
Setting the Bootable CD-ROM Feature
: When you attach a CD-ROM drive to the ServeRAID
adapter or controller and set the Bootable CD-ROM feature
to Yes, the ServeRAID adapter or controller will attempt to
start a CD that has a bootable startup partition, if no other
adapter or controller in the system is currently using INT13
extensions. Only one adapter or controller in the system
can support the INT13 extensions.
To enable the Bootable CD-ROM feature:
1. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu of
the Mini-Configuration program.
2. Select Configure BIOS Settings from the Advanced
Functions menu.
3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys to
highlight BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM; then,
press Enter to change No to Yes.
Note
This also changes No to Yes next to Display
Boot CD-ROM Menu and BIOS Support for
INT13 Extensions.
4. Ensure that the screen has Yes next to BIOS
Support for Reading Partition Tables. If not, use
the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys to
highlight BIOS Support for Reading Partition
Tables; then, press Enter to change No to Yes.
98
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
You must perform this next step to save the new
settings.
5. Highlight Save Configuration to the ServeRAID
Controller; then, press Enter. The program displays
a Configuration Saved message, and then returns
you to the Main Menu of the Mini-Configuration
program.
6. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
99
ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program
You can use the Administration and Monitoring Program to
monitor your ServeRAID adapters and controllers, view the
ServeRAID configuration and associated devices, rebuild
an array, create a logical drive, create an array, delete an
array, dynamically increase the logical-drive size, change
RAID levels, and much more.
Starting the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program
: Before you start the ServeRAID WIN32-Based
Administration and Monitoring Program, review the
following illustration to become familiar with the layout of
its Main screen.
1
2
3
8
7
4
6
5
Descriptions of the numbered areas are as follows:
1. Title Bar Displays the title of the application, along with
the minimize icon, the maximize icon, and the
close icon.
2. Menu Bar Displays the pull-down menus for all
supported functions.
3. Tool Bar Displays the icons for the commonly used
functions.
4. Device Area Displays the state of each device
connected to the physical channels of the
ServeRAID adapter or controller, and if
applicable, its array identifier.
5. Status Bar Displays help for the area where the cursor
is currently pointing. Also displays the date
and time.
6. Status Window Displays messages regarding the
operational status of each adapter or
controller.
100
Netfinity Server HMM
7. Logical Drive Area Displays the number of logical
drives created and the status of the logical
drive.
8. Adapter Area Displays the number and status of the
installed ServeRAID adapters and controllers
To start the WIN32-Based Administration and Monitoring
Program:
1. Do one of the following:
Ÿ Double-click on the IBM ServeRAID
Administration icon
or
Select IBM ServeRAID Administration from the
Start menu.
2. The Administration and Monitoring Program starts in
stand-alone mode. After this program loads, you can
access the ServeRAID adapters and controllers.
Ÿ
When the Main window appears:
Ÿ If you are running the program in the stand-alone
mode and you have ServeRAID adapters or
controllers installed in your system, the current
settings of the installed adapters or controllers
will appear on the screen.
Ÿ If you are running the program from a client with
no ServeRAID adapters or controllers, a
message will appear stating that no ServeRAID
adapters or controllers are installed in your
system.
3. To access the server that contains the ServeRAID
adapters or controllers, select Network Settings from
the Options menu.
4. When the window appears prompting for Stand-alone
or Client/Server, click on the Client/Server button.
5. In the edit box, type in the host name of the server
that you want to access.
or
Select the host name from the pull-down list; then,
click on Connect.
Note
If security is enabled on the server, you must
enter a valid user name and password.
Options Pull-Down Menu
: The following choices are available from the Options
pull-down menu on the Main Screen of the Administration
and Monitoring Program:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Network Settings
General Options
Alert Options
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
101
Network Settings
: If you want to monitor the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers across a network, you must switch to
client/server mode.
You can use the Network Settings dialog box to select and
connect to servers in your network that contain IBM
ServeRAID adapters or controllers.
To select and connect to a server:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Click on the
Network Settings from the Options pull-down menu.
A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Click on the Client/Server radio button.
3. If security is enabled on the server to which you are
connecting, type in your User Name and Password
as defined by the security file on the server to which
you are connecting. (Refer to “Background-Server
Component Security” on page 157 for information on
the security file).
4. Type in either the Host Name or the TCP/IP Address
of the system, or select it from the pull-down list.
Note
If your server was started on any port other than
the default (1087), after the Host Name or
TCP/6P Address that you just entered, type in a
colon and the correct port number for your
configuration (for example: ServeRAID:1088).
102
Netfinity Server HMM
5. Click on Connect to initiate a connection with the
remote system.
General Options: When you select General Options
from the Options pull-down menu, a screen similar to the
following appears.
You can use this screen to:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Enable or Disable the alarm
Reset the alarm
Set the polling options
Enabling or Disabling the Alarm: The alarm alerts
you to a failure in the system. It sounds if any of the
following conditions occur:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
A DDD hard disk drive is found.
A Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) error occurs.
A ServeRAID adapter or controller is not responding.
To enable or disable the alarm, click on the box for
Disable Alarm on the General Options screen. Placing a
check in the check box disables the alarm; removing the
check enables the alarm.
Resetting the Alarm:
STOP
Resetting the alarm turns off the alarm for the current failure
without disabling the feature.
STOP
To reset the alarm, you can either click on the
icon
or click on Reset Alarm on the General Options screen.
Polling Options: The ServeRAID adapter or controller
will poll, or check, your server at a specified time interval
for any changes that may have occurred in the server.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
103
You can choose how often the adapter or controller polls
the server by specifying a time interval on the options
menu, from five to 60 seconds. The default time interval
setting is five seconds.
The program will poll for the following events:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Rebuild started
Rebuild completed
Synchronization started
Synchronization completed
Migration started
Migration completed
PFA error detected
Dead drive detected
Adapter or controller is not responding to commands
Alert Options
: The Netfinity Manage alerts allow system
administrators who are using the IBM Netfinity Manager
Program to configure the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program to notify the Netfinity Alert Manager of
various activities occurring on the server.
To configure the settings for the Netfinity Manager alerts:
1. Open the Options pull-down menu.
2. Click on Alert Options.
3. Click on Netfinity Alerts. A screen similar to the
following appears.
Note
The default setting for the Netfinity Manager
alerts is disabled.
4. To enable all Netfinity Manager alerts, click on the
check box next to Enable Netfinity Alerts.
5. To disable any of the Netfinity Manager alerts:
a. Ensure there is a check in the check box next to
Enable Netfinity Alerts.
b. Click on the check box next to the specific alert
or alerts you want disabled.
104
Netfinity Server HMM
6. To test the Netfinity Manager integration, click on the
Send Test Alert button. This will send a Netfinity
Manager alert to the Alert Manager with a test
message.
When you enable Netfinity Manager Alerts, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will relay the
following three types of messages to the Netfinity
Alert Manager:
a. Information
Ÿ Rebuild started
Ÿ Rebuild completed
Ÿ Synchronization started
Ÿ Synchronization completed
Ÿ Migration started
Ÿ Migration completed
b. Warning
Ÿ PFA error detected
c. Critical
Ÿ Dead drive detected
Ÿ Adapter or controller is not responding to
commands
By knowing what these types of messages are, you
can configure the Netfinity Manager program with
instructions for monitoring the server configuration
and the appropriate action to take if an alert is given.
For example, you could set the Netfinity Manager
program to dial a specified phone number, should a
defunct drive be detected on any server across the
network. See the documentation provided with
Netfinity Manager for more information.
ServeRaid the Administration Functions
The following information is about using the following
ServeRAID administration functions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Array administration
Logical drive administration
Logical drive migration administration
Physical drive administration
Adapter administration
Array Administration
: Use the following information for creating and deleting
disk arrays.
Creating Disk Arrays:
You can use disk arrays to improve security, performance,
and reliability.
To create a disk array:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
105
1. Click on the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Manage Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Create Disk Array. A screen
similar to the following appears.
2. Select one or more Ready (RDY) drives for the new
disk array from the Main screen of the Administration
and Monitoring Program.
To select a RDY drive, click the desired RDY button
from the device area. A disk array identifier appears
beside each RDY drive added to the disk array.
If you change your mind about a selected drive,
select the button again to remove the selected drive
from the disk array.
3. Click on OK to define a logical drive for the new
array. A screen similar to the following appears.
4. Select the appropriate RAID level from the pull-down
list.
Note
The number of hard disk drives in the array
determines the RAID levels available for the
array.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the array contains one hard disk drive, you
can select only RAID level-0 for the logical
drive.
If the array contains two hard disk drives,
you can select RAID level-0 or RAID level-1
for the logical drive.
If the array contains three or more hard disk
drives, you can select RAID level-0, RAID
level-1, or RAID level-5 for the logical drive.
5. Enter the Requested Space in the entry field.
106
Netfinity Server HMM
The ServeRAID program uses the maximum available
space for the selected RAID level to calculate the
default value that it assigns.
Note
The actual logical drive size might be slightly
different from what you type in the Requested
Space field. The RAID level and the number of
hard disk drives determine the size of the logical
drive. For example, a disk array consisting of
three, 1 GB hard disk drives with a requested
RAID level-0 logical drive of 1000 MB will actually
contain only 999 MB because the data is striped
across all three drives, with 333 MB on each
drive.
6. Click on OK to create the disk array.
Deleting Disk Arrays:
Deleting a disk array deletes all logical drives that are defined
in that disk array. All data and programs on the logical drives
in the disk array will be lost during this procedure.
To delete a disk array:
on the Tool Bar or select Manage
1. Click on the
Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down menu;
then, select Delete Disk Array. A screen similar to
the following appears.
2. Select the desired disk array ID from the pull-down
list.
Attention
Before proceeding, ensure that you have backed
up any data and programs that you want to save.
3. Click on OK to delete the disk array.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
107
Note
For some operating systems, deleting a disk array and
its associated logical drives might change the
drive-letter assignments of the remaining drives when
you restart the system.
Logical Drive Administration
: Use the following information to create logical drives,
initialize and synchronizing logical drives, or access
blocked logical drives.
Creating Logical Drives:
Each ServeRAID adapter or controller supports a maximum
of 8 logical drives. Depending upon the stripe-unit size
being used, you can combine a maximum of 8 or 16
physical drives into each logical drive.
To create a logical drive:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Click on the
Manage Logical Drive from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Create Logical Drive. A screen
similar to the following appears.
2. Select the desired disk array ID from the pull-down
list.
3. Select the appropriate RAID level from the pull-down
list.
Note
The number of hard disk drives in the array
determines the RAID levels available for the
array.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the array contains one hard disk drive, you
can select only RAID level-0 for the logical
drive.
If the array contains two hard disk drives,
you can select RAID level-0 or RAID level-1
for the logical drive.
If the array contains three or more hard disk
drives, you can select RAID level-0, RAID
level-1, or RAID level-5 for the logical drive.
4. Enter the Requested Space in the entry field.
108
Netfinity Server HMM
The ServeRAID program uses the maximum available
space for the selected RAID level to calculate the
default value that it assigns.
Note
The actual logical drive size may be slightly
different from what you type in the Requested
Space field. The RAID level and the number of
hard disk drives determine the size of the logical
drive. For example, a disk array consisting of
three, 1 GB hard disk drives with a requested
RAID level-0 logical drive of 1000 MB will actually
contain only 999 MB because the data is striped
across all three drives, with 333 MB on each
drive.
5. Click on OK to create the logical drive.
Notes
1. If you plan to use the Logical Drive Migration
(LDM) feature, do not define more than seven
logical drives. The LDM feature requires one
free logical drive to perform the migration. Refer
to “Logical Drive Migration Administration” on
page 111 for more information.
2. If you plan to use the Change RAID Level
function of the LDM feature, you must assign the
same RAID level to all logical drives within a
single disk array. Refer to “Change RAID Levels”
on page 111 for more information.
Initializing Logical Drives: Initializing a logical drive
erases the first 1024 sectors on the drive and prevents
access to any data previously stored on the drive.
To initialize a logical drive:
1. Select the desired logical drive from the Main screen
of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Click on Initialize to initialize the drive.
3. If you have initialized a RAID level-5 drive, you must
synchronize to ensure data integrity. Go to
“Synchronizing Logical Drives.”
Synchronizing Logical Drives: The purpose of
synchronizing logical drives is to compute and write the
parity data on the selected drives.
If the type of ServeRAID adapter or controller you are
using does not support the auto-synchronization and
data-scrubbing features, manually synchronize your RAID
level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives weekly. This does
not alter data on the drive.
Synchronizing a logical drive verifies that the data
redundancy for the logical drive is correct.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
109
To synchronize a logical drive:
1. Select the desired logical drive from the Main screen
of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Click on Synchronize to synchronize the drive.
3. The synchronization begins automatically and reports
progress information on the screen.
Note
Only one synchronization command can be
active at a time.
Unblocking Logical Drives: When the ServeRAID
adapter or controller performs a Rebuild operation on an
array, it reconstructs the data that was stored in RAID
level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives. However, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller cannot reconstruct the
data that was stored in any RAID level-0 logical drives in
that array. The data in the RAID level-0 logical drives is
blocked when the ServeRAID adapter or controller detects
that the array is valid, but the data might be damaged.
After the Rebuild operation completes, you can unblock the
RAID level-0 logical drives and access them once again.
But remember, the logical drive might contain damaged
data. You must either re-create, install, or restore the data
from the most recent backup disk or tape.
To unblock a blocked drive:
1. Select the blocked logical drive from the Main screen
of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Click on Unblock to unblock the drive.
3. Initialize all unblocked logical drives before using
them. See “Initializing Logical Drives” on page 109.
4. Restore the data to the drive from your most recent
backup disk or tape.
110
Netfinity Server HMM
Logical Drive Migration Administration
: The logical drive migration (LDM) feature dynamically
changes the current logical drive structure. You can use
this procedure to change the RAID level, increase the free
space in a disk array, or change the size of a logical drive.
To use the LDM feature, you must have at least two logical
drives available: one free (FRE) logical drive and one
source logical drive that is in the okay (OKY) state. During
the LDM procedure, the ServeRAID adapter or controller
changes the state of the FRE logical drive to SYS; then,
temporarily uses the SYS drive to perform the migration.
When the migration procedure completes, the ServeRAID
adapter or controller changes the state of the SYS drive
back to FRE.
Change RAID Levels:
You can change (migrate) the RAID levels of currently defined
logical drives. To use the Change RAID Level feature, all of
the logical drives within the array must be the same RAID
level.
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers support changing
RAID levels as follows:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Change two-drive RAID level-0 to RAID level-5 by
adding one hard disk drive
Change two-drive RAID level-1 to RAID level-5 by
adding one hard disk drive
Change from RAID level-5 to RAID level-0 by
removing one hard disk drive
To change the RAID level of an existing disk array:
Note
If you are migrating to RAID level-0, the last drive
defined in the array becomes RDY.
1. Click on the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Manage Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Logical Drive Migration. A
screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Change RAID Level.
3. Click on OK.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
111
4. Select a migrating option from the pull-down list.
Note
The affected logical drives appear, based on the
migrating option you select.
5. Click on OK to proceed.
6. Click on OK to verify the operation.
7. Select a Ready (RDY) drive to add to the array, if you
are migrating to RAID level-5.
Adding a Physical Drive:
You can expand currently defined arrays by adding one to
three new hard disk drives.
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers support adding
new space to a disk array in the following scenarios:
Ÿ
You can increase the free space in a disk array
without changing the size of the logical drives. This is
useful when you need to add logical drives to your
existing disk arrays. Refer to the following illustration.
Logical Drive 0
500 MB
Logical Drive 0
500 MB
Logical Drive 1
1000 MB
Logical Drive 1
1000 MB
Free Space
2800 MB
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Before LDM
Ÿ
112
Free Space
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
4950 MB
Disk 4
After LDM
For example, an existing disk array uses three,
2150 MB hard disk drives that are configured as two
RAID level-5 logical drives (one 500 MB and
1000 MB) and 2800 MB of free space. If you use the
logical drive migration procedure and add a 2150 MB
hard disk drive to increase the amount of free space,
the end result will be two RAID level-5 logical drives
(one 500 MB and one 1000 MB) and with 4950 MB
of free space.
You can increase the size of all the logical drives
proportionally in a disk array. This is useful when you
Netfinity Server HMM
want to increase the size of the currently defined
logical drives. Refer to the following illustration.
Logical Drive 0
500 MB
Logical Drive 0
Logical Drive 1
1000 MB
Logical Drive 1
Free Space
2800 MB
Disk 1
Disk 2
4200 MB
Free Space
Disk 1
Disk 3
750 MB
1500 MB
Before LDM
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
After LDM
For example, an array uses three 2150 MB hard disk
drives that are configured as two RAID level-5 logical
drives (one 500 MB and 1000 MB) and 2800 MB of
free space. If you use the logical drive migration
procedure and add a 2150 MB hard disk drive to
proportionally increase the size of the disk array, the
end result will be two RAID level-5 logical drives (one
750 MB and 1500 MB) and 4200 MB of free space.
To add a physical device:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Click on the
Manage Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Logical Drive Migration. A
screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Add Physical Drive(s).
A prompt appears requesting that you select from 1 to
3 Ready (RDY) drives to add to the existing array.
3. Click on the appropriate RDY drives on the Main
screen. An X appears beside the selected drives.
4. When you are finished selecting drives, click on OK.
5. Select one of the available expansion options from
the pull-down list.
The screen will show a list of the affected logical
drives with their new sizes.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
113
6. Click on OK.
Physical Device Administration
: Use the following information to set device states and
rebuild devices.
Setting Physical Device States: The following table
shows the valid device states and valid alternative states.
Device
State
Alternative States
EMP
SBY
DHS
SHS
DDD
RDY
HSP
ONL
RBL
RDY SBY
RDY EMP HSP SHS
EMP HSP SHS
HSP DHS
ONL RBL
EMP HSP SHS SBY
RDY SHS DHS
DDD
DDD ONL
To set or change the physical device state:
1. Select the device from the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Click on the radio button that indicates the desired
state.
Note
If you set a DDD drive to ONL without performing
a Rebuild (RBL) operation and that drive is part
of a critical (CRT) logical drive, your system
might lose data.
3. Click on Set Device State.
Rebuilding a Device: When a hard disk drive goes
defunct (DDD), a Rebuild operation is required to
reconstruct the data for the device in its respective disk
array. The ServeRAID adapters and controllers can
reconstruct RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives,
but they cannot reconstruct data stored in RAID level-0
logical drives. To prevent data integrity problems, the
ServeRAID adapters and controllers set the RAID level-0
logical drives to Blocked during a Rebuild operation. After
the Rebuild operation completes, you can unblock the
RAID level-0 logical drives, and access them once again.
But remember, the logical drive might contain damaged
data. (Refer to “Unblocking Logical Drives” on page 110
for more information.)
To perform a Rebuild operation:
1. Click on the DDD device on the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Click on Rebuild Device.
3. Select a RDY drive to use to reconstruct the data, or
click on OK to use the same drive slot and SCSI ID if
you have physically replaced the defunct drive.
114
Netfinity Server HMM
4. The reconstruction begins automatically and reports
progress information on the screen.
Notes
1. The ServeRAID adapter or controller can perform
only one Rebuild operation at a time.
2. If the array contains a critical (CRT) logical drive,
the Rebuild operation changes the hard disk
drive state from DDD to RBL. After the Rebuild
operation completes, the hard disk drive state
changes from RBL to ONL. (If you rebuild to a
RDY drive, the DDD drive is removed from the
disk array and becomes a defunct hot-spare
(DHS).)
3. The hard disk drive being rebuilt must be the
same size or larger than the failed drive.
4. If a hot-spare (HSP) drive is available, a Rebuild
operation will start automatically.
5. If multiple hot-spare (HSP) drives are available,
the ServeRAID adapter or controller searches all
the drives on each channel for a hot-spare drive
of the appropriate size. The first appropriate
hot-spare drive found enters the Rebuild (RBL)
state.
Adapter Administration
: This section provides instructions for copying the drive
configuration to the ServeRAID adapter or controller,
copying the ServeRAID adapter or controller configuration
to the drives, initializing the adapter or controller
configuration, and scanning for new drives.
Copying the Drive Configuration to the Adapter:
You can copy the configuration stored on the hard disk
drives to the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
This operation is useful when drives are imported from
other systems.
To copy the configuration:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Click on the
Adapter Configuration from the Advanced pull-down
menu. A screen similar to the following appears.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
115
2. Select Copy Drive Configuration to Adapter.
3. Click on OK.
Copying the Adapter Configuration to the
Drives:
You can copy the configuration stored for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller to all configured hard disk drives.
To copy the configuration:
1. Click on the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Adapter Configuration from the Advanced pull-down
menu. A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Copy Adapter Configuration to Drives.
3. Click on OK.
Initializing the Adapter:
Initializing the adapter or controller configuration clears all
the logical drives and resets all the functional hard disk
drives to the Ready (RDY) state.
This operation is useful when you want to start over and
create a new configuration.
To initialize the adapter or controller:
1. Click on the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Adapter Configuration from the Advanced pull-down
menu. A screen similar to the following appears.
116
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Select Initialize Adapter Configuration.
Attention
After you initialize the configuration, you will not
have access to any data stored on the logical
drives attached to the selected ServeRAID
adapter or controller.
This choice deletes the existing configuration
information, sets all functional hard disk drives
attached to the controller to the Ready state, and
deletes all logical drives defined for the controller.
This choice does not change any of the ServeRAID
adapter or controller settings (such as the stripe-unit
size, rebuild rate, and so on) from their current or
customized values.
3. Click on OK.
Scanning for New Drives: You can scan for new
devices attached to the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
icon on the
To scan for new drives, click on the
Tool Bar or select Scan For New Drives from the
Advanced pull-down menu.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
117
ServeRAID Monitoring Functions
This section contains instructions for using the
Administration and Monitoring Program to monitor the
ServeRAID adapter and controller status information, event
logs, logical drive information, and physical device
information.
Monitoring the Adapter Status Information
: A green or red light on the screen indicates the
currently active adapter button. (Green indicates that the
ServeRAID adapter or controller is responding and red
indicates that it is not responding.) If there is more than
one ServeRAID adapter or controller in the system, click
once on the appropriate adapter or controller to make it
active.
You can then monitor the status by clicking on the active
adapter button on the Main screen of the Administration
and Monitoring Program.
Note
You might need to use the scroll bar and scroll down
to see all of the items that appear on this screen.
Descriptions of the information that appears on the screen
are as follows:
Adapter Number
The active adapter or controller (1
to 8).
Number of Logical Drives The number of defined logical
drives (0 to 8).
Unattended Mode
Off - The user chooses the
recovery method when there is a
ServeRAID startup error.
On - The adapter or controller
chooses the recovery method when
there is a ServeRAID startup error.
Code Block Version The current version number of the
firmware loaded on the adapter or
controller.
Boot Block Version
The current version number of the
bootable microcode loaded on the
adapter or controller.
Concurrent Commands The maximum number of
concurrent commands supported.
Maximum Devices Supported The maximum number of
devices supported.
Flash Program Count The current number of times the
flash EEPROM has been written.
Defunct Disk Count
118
The current number of defunct hard
disk drives.
Netfinity Server HMM
Rebuild Rate
The current setting (Low, Medium,
or High) of the rebuild rate.
Hot-Swap Rebuild
The current state (Enabled or
Disabled) of the hot-swap rebuild
feature.
Offline Logical Drive Count The current number of offline
logical drives.
Configuration Update Count The number of times that
the ServeRAID configuration has
been updated.
NVRAM Battery Backup Device The current state of the
battery-backup cache (installed, not
installed, or defective).
Monitoring the Device Event Logs
: The ServeRAID adapters and controllers store
information concerning various events in the event logs.
There are four types of event logs: a device event log, a
hard event log, a soft event log, and a configuration event
log. (See “ServeRAID Configuration Program” on page 71
and “ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program” on page 95
for information about the configuration event log.)
To view the hard, soft, or device event logs:
1. Click on the adapter on the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select an event log button from the bottom of the
screen.
The Device Event Log contains event counters for each
attached physical device, as follows:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Parity Event - The ServeRAID adapter or controller
detected a parity event while transferring data on the
SCSI bus. A large number of parity events might
indicate a problem with the SCSI cable, connectors,
or terminators on the SCSI channel.
Soft Event - These events are detected by the SCSI
device and reported to the ServeRAID adapter or
controller through the SCSI Check Condition status.
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) - The device has
signaled the adapter or controller that it might fail in
the near future.
Hard Event - These events are detected by the
ServeRAID adapter or controller. The most likely
cause of a hard event is a problem with the SCSI
cabling, termination, or adapter seating. If one of
these is not the problem, replace the
adapter/controller.
Misc Event - These miscellaneous events are
detected by the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
These events do not include parity, soft, PFA, or hard
events. The most likely cause of a miscellaneous
event is a cable, termination, or connector problem.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
119
Note
Under normal operating conditions, the event logs will
contain entries that are not errors.
Monitoring the Logical Drive Information
: You can monitor the logical drive information by
clicking on the desired logical drive button on the Main
screen of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
Descriptions of the information that appears on the Logical
Drive Information screen are as follows:
Logical Drive Number The number of the logical drive.
Blocked
No - The logical drive is accessible.
Yes - The logical drive is not
accessible.
Part of Array
The identifier of the logical drive
disk array (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H).
Part of Merge Group The identifier of the logical drive
merge group (1 through 254).
Date Created
The date the logical drive was
created.
State
The current state (see “Logical
Drive State Descriptions” on
page 82 for more information).
Size
The size in megabytes.
RAID Level
RAID level (0, 1, or 5).
Write Policy
WT - Write-through.
WB - Write-back.
NVRAM Battery Backup Enable - The battery-backup
cache is On.
Disable - The battery-backup
cache is Off.
Read Ahead
Off - Disk Read-Ahead is inactive.
Stripe-Unit Size
The size of each stripe unit per
hard disk (8, 16, 32, 64).
Number of Chunks
The number of hard disk drives that
make up the logical drive.
Stripe Order
The channel and SCSI ID of the
physical drives that make up the
logical drive.
On - Disk Read-Ahead is active.
Monitoring the Physical Device Information
: You can monitor the physical device information by
clicking on the desired device button on the Main screen of
the Administration and Monitoring Program.
120
Netfinity Server HMM
Descriptions of the fields that might appear on the Device
Management screen are as follows.
Note
The number of fields that appear on the Device
Management screen depend on the physical device
selected.
Channel
The channel to which the device is
connected (1, 2, or 3).
SCSI ID
The SCSI ID (0 to 15).
Vendor
The manufacturer of the physical
device.
Serial Number
The manufacturer identifier.
Size
The size in megabytes.
State
The current state (see “Physical Drive
State Descriptions” on page 83 and
“Logical Drive State Descriptions” on
page 82 more information).
Soft Event
The number of soft events reported
from the device event log.
Hard Event
The number of hard events reported
from the device event log.
Misc Event
The number of miscellaneous events
reported from the device event log.
Parity Event
The number of parity events reported
from the device event log.
PFA Event
Yes - device indicates predictive
failure analysis event.
No - device does not indicate
predictive failure analysis error.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
121
ServeRAID IPSSEND Program (Starting)
You can run the IPSSEND program from the operating
system command line.
To start the IPSSEND program:
Ÿ
If you are using OS/2 or Windows NT:
1. Type:
c:\ipsadm\ipssend
2. Press Enter.
Note
The c represents the drive where OS/2 or
Windows NT is installed.
Ÿ
If you are using NetWare:
1. From the console, type:
load ipssend
Ÿ
2. Press Enter.
If you are using DOS:
1. Insert the bootable IPSSEND diskette that you
created into diskette drive A; then, type:
a:\ipssend
Ÿ
2. Press Enter.
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare:
1. Type:
/usr/bin/ipssend
2. Press Enter.
122
Netfinity Server HMM
ServeRAID IPSSEND Program (Using)
When you run the IPSSEND program with no
command-line parameters, a list of available functions and
their specific parameters appears. All functions require a
minimum set of parameters to run the command. If you
run the IPSSEND program with a specific function but
without its required parameters, specific help for that
function will appear on the monitor.
There are four basic types of IPSSEND commands:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Server roll-out commands
Error-recovery commands
Problem-isolation and debug commands
RAID configuration commands
ServeRAID Server Roll-Out Commands
: The IPSSEND server roll-out commands include the
following:
BACKUP
Use the BACKUP command to save a
ServeRAID adapter or controller configuration
to a diskette or to a hard disk drive. The
ServeRAID adapter or controller configuration
must be valid.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, DOS, OpenServer, and
UnixWare.
Command:
IPSSEND BACKUP Controller Filename Oparm
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
COPYLD
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Filename with the path and file name
where the configuration is to be written
Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the COPYLD command to copy a source
logical drive to a target logical drive. The
size of the target logical drive must be
greater than or equal to the size of the
source logical drive.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND COPYLD Controller Source Target
Oparm
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Source with the source logical drive
number
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
123
Ÿ
Ÿ
RESTORE
Target with the target logical drive
number
Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the RESTORE command to load a
configuration from a file stored on a diskette
or a hard disk drive. The configuration must
be a valid configuration file from the BACKUP
option on the IBM ServeRAID DOS
Configuration Utility Program Diskette or
IPSSEND. This operation overwrites the
existing configuration information stored for
the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND RESTORE Controller Filename Oparm
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
INIT
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Filename with the path and file name
where the configuration is to be written
Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the INIT command to initialize the first
0.5 MB of a logical drive. This process will
erase the partition tables on the drive, and all
data on the logical drive will be lost.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND INIT Controller DriveNum Oparm
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
INITSYNC
124
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the INITSYNC command to initialize and
synchronize a logical drive at the same time.
This command works only on RAID level-1
and level-5 logical drives. The command will
erase the entire logical drive, and all data on
the logical drive will be lost.
Netfinity Server HMM
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND INITSYNC Controller DriveNum
Oparm
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
SYNCH
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the SYNCH command to synchronize the
parity information on redundant logical drives.
If the parity information is inconsistent, the
IPSSEND program will repair it automatically.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND SYNCH Controller Scope DriveNum
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Scope with Drive for a single logical
drive
DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
ServeRAID Error-Recovery Commands
: The IPSSEND error-recovery commands include the
following:
GETSTATUS Use the GETSTATUS command to display
the current logical-drive status for the most
recent rebuild, synchronization, or
logical-drive migration. The status includes
such information as the remaining size of the
logical drive, the percentage completed for
the function in process, or information about
the most recently completed logical-drive
function.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND GETSTATUS Controller
Replace:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
125
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
REBUILD
Use the REBUILD command to rebuild a
designated disk drive. This command is valid
for disk arrays that contain one or more
logical drives that are in the critical (CRT)
state. Progress is indicated during the
rebuild operation, but you can also use the
GETSTATUS command to obtain progress
information about the rebuild.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND REBUILD Controller DCh DSID NCh
NSID
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
DCh with the channel number for the
Defunct drive (1 to 3)
DSID with the SCSI ID for the Defunct
Drive
(0 to 15)
NCh with the channel number for the
New Drive (1 to 3)
NSID with the SCSI ID for the New
Drive
(0 to 15)
SETSTATE Use the SETSTATE command to change the
state of a physical device from its current
state to a new state.
Attention
You must be very careful when you use
this command. For example, you might
lose data if you reset a Defunct (DDD)
device to Online (ONL) without first
performing a Rebuild operation.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND SETSTATE Controller Channel SID
NState
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
126
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Channel with the channel number for the
drive (1 to 3)
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
UNBLOCK
SID with the SCSI ID for the drive (0 to
15)
NState with the new state for the drive.
Valid states are: EMP for Empty, RDY
for Ready, HSP for Hot Spare, SHS for
Standby Hot Spare, DDD for Defunct
Disk Drive, DHS for Defunct Hot Spare,
RBL for Rebuild, SBY for Standby, and
ONL for Online. (See “Setting Physical
Device States” on page 114 for more
information.)
Use the UNBLOCK command to gain access
to a blocked logical drive. RAID level-0
logical drives become blocked if they are in
an array that contains RAID level-1 or level-5
logical drives and the array is being rebuilt.
Because the RAID level-0 logical drives
cannot be rebuilt, the data stored on the
RAID level-0 logical drives is damaged and
should not be accessed. After you issue the
UNBLOCK command, you must re-create or
restore the data previously stored on the
RAID level-0 logical drives.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND UNBLOCK Controller DriveNum
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
ServeRAID Problem-Isolation and Debug
Commands
: The IPSSEND problem-isolation and debug
commands include the following:
CERTIFY
Use the CERTIFY command to verify the
media of a hard disk drive. If the program
finds a media error, it reassigns the sectors.
A summary of reassignments and PFA errors
appears upon completion of the verification.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND CERTIFY Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
127
Ÿ
SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
ERASEEVENT Use the ERASEEVENT command to clear
all logged entries in the designated event log.
See GETEVENT help for information about
the contents of the Device Event Log and the
Adapter Soft and Hard Event Logs.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
O/S2, Netware, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND ERASEEVENT Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Options with one of the following:
– DEVICE for the Device Event Log
– SOFT for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller Soft Event Log
– HARD for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller Hard Event Log
FMSTATUS Use the FMSTATUS command to display the
progress of a format operation currently
processing.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND FMSTATUS Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
FORMAT
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
Use the FORMAT command to perform a
low-level format of a hard disk drive.
Attention
When you issue this command, all data
on the drive will be lost.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND FORMAT Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
128
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
GETEVENT Use the GETEVENT command to display
information about various unexpected events.
IBM uses the Soft and Hard Event Logs for
development and debugging purposes only.
The Device Event Log contains event
counters for each attached physical device.
These counters include:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Parity: An unexpected event while
transferring data on the SCSI bus. This
usually indicates a problem with the
SCSI cable, connectors, or terminators.
Soft: A SCSI device detected a check
condition event.
Hard: The SCSI controller detected an
unexpected event. The controller is the
most likely cause.
Misc: The ServeRAID adapter or
controller detected an event that was
most likely caused by the device.
The Device Event Log also provides
predictive failure analysis (PFA) alerts, which
indicate that the device has signaled the
ServeRAID adapter or controller that it might
fail in the near future.
Supported Operating Systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND GETEVENT Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Options with one of the following:
DEVICE for Device Event Log, SOFT for
the ServeRAID adapter or controller Soft
Event Log, or HARD for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller Hard Event Log.
SELFTEST The SELFTEST command is used to direct
an adapter or a device to perform its self-test.
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND SELFTEST Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Options with AD for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller self-test or PD
Channel SID for the Device self-test.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
129
Note
Channel represents the drive
channel and SID represents the
SCSI ID for the device.
STARTDELY Use the STARTDELY command to set the
number of drives in a group to start up
simultaneously and to set the delay in
seconds between the startup of these groups
of drives.
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND STARTDELY Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Options with a question mark (?) to
display concurrent drive startup count:
Drive Count (1 to 16) and Delay Time (3
to 15 seconds).
RAID Configuration Commands
: The IPSSEND RAID configuration commands include
the following:
DRIVEVER Use the DRIVEVER command to display the
vendor ID, microcode version, and serial
number of a SCSI device. The IPSSEND
program retrieves this information directly
from the device.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND DRIVEVER Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
GETCONFIG Use the GETCONFIG command to display
the ServeRAID adapter or controller
configuration information. This includes
information about the firmware version;
initiator ID and rebuild rate; logical drive
status, RAID level, and size; and physical
device type, SCSI ID, and PFA error.
130
Netfinity Server HMM
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND GETCONFIG Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Options with one of the following: AD
for adapter or controller information, LD
for logical drive information, PD for
physical device information, AL (default)
for all information.
HSREBUILD Use the HSREBUILD command to set the
ServeRAID adapter or controller hot-swap
rebuild feature on. Use a question mark (?)
to display the current status of the hot-swap
rebuild feature.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND HSREBUILD Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Options with ON to enable the hot-swap
rebuild feature, or ? to display the status
of the hot-swap rebuild feature.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
131
ServeRAID IPSMON Program (Starting)
You can run the IPSMON program from the operating
system command line.
To start the IPSMON program:
Ÿ
If you are using OS/2 or Windows NT:
1. Type:
c:\ipsadm\ipsmon
2. Press Enter.
Note
The c represents the drive where OS/2 or
Windows NT is installed.
Ÿ
If you are using Novell NetWare:
1. From the console, type:
load ipsmon
Ÿ
2. Press Enter.
If you are using SCO OpenServer or UnixWare:
1. Type:
/usr/bin/ipsmon
2. Press Enter.
ServeRAID IPSMON Program (Using)
When you start this monitoring program, it immediately
begins polling all ServeRAID adapters and controllers for
specific conditions. If a condition being monitored is found,
this program logs a message to the monitor, to a file, or to
both the monitor and a file.
The IPSMON program uses command-line parameters to
determine where to log the messages. If you need help,
you can type the IPSMON -? command for a list of valid
parameters.
If you start this program without any command-line
parameters, the IPSMON program will log the messages to
the IPSMON.LOG file, and the messages will not appear
on the monitor.
The valid parameters for IPSMON are:
Ÿ
-f:filename
Ÿ
Use the -f parameter to specify the name of the file in
which to record messages. The default file name is
IPSMON.LOG.
-s
Ÿ
Use the -s parameter to display messages on the
standard output (usually the monitor).
-?
Use the -? parameter to obtain a current list of valid
parameters.
132
Netfinity Server HMM
After you start the IPSMON program, the program will
continuously poll the ServeRAID adapters and controllers
until you take one of the following actions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are using Windows NT or OS/2, press Ctrl+C.
If you are using NetWare, type: unload ipsmon at the
system console.
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare, press the
Del key to cancel the program.
During operation, the program will log various messages.
Each message will contain an alert code and a location
specifier.
Ÿ
Ÿ
The alert code begins with the message type and
number. For example, INF, WRN, or CRT, followed
by the message number.
After the alert code comes the location specifier:
A specifies the adapter or controller number
SID specifies the SCSI ID (if required)
C specifies the channel number (if required)
For example, a message of CRTxxx:A2C3SID04 signifies
that a Critical condition (CRTxxx) was found on Adapter 2
(A2), Channel 3 (C3), SCSI ID 4 (SID04).
The IPSMON program can log the following messages,
based on the required condition.
Information Messages:
<Date and Time> INF000:A1C-SID
-- no errors detected
<Date and Time> INF001:A1C-SID
-- rebuild started
<Date and Time> INF002:A1C-SID
-- rebuild completed
<Date and Time> INF003:A1C-SID
-- synchronization started
<Date and Time> INF004:A1C-SID
-- synchronization completed
<Date and Time> INF005:A1C-SID
-- migration started
<Date and Time> INF006:A1C-SID
-- migration completed
Warning Messages:
<Date and Time> WRN001:A2C3SID12
-- PFA Error detected
Critical Messages:
<Date and Time> CRT001:A3C2SID04
-- dead drive detected
<Date and Time> CRT002:A1C-SID
-- not responding to commands
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
133
ServeRAID Device Drivers and Utility
Programs (Installation)
This chapter provides information about the device drivers
and utility programs available for the IBM ServeRAID
adapters and controllers.
IBM ServeRAID Utility Programs
: This section contains information about the device
drivers and utility programs available for the ServeRAID
adapters and controllers.
Obtaining ServeRAID Updates: IBM periodically
makes updated versions of the ServeRAID device drivers
and utility programs available from the IBM Support page
on the World Wide Web. In addition to the updated device
drivers and utility programs, there are also two ServeRAID
command-line programs, IPSSEND and IPSMON,
available from the World Wide Web. These programs are
both on the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette.
You can download the most current versions of the
ServeRAID device drivers and utility programs or a copy of
the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs Diskette
from the following address on the World Wide Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
From the IBM Support page:
1. Select IBM Server Support; then, select Server
Options from the Family menu.
2. Select Downloadable Files; then, select ServeRAID.
Administration and Monitoring Program
The IBM ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program monitors your ServeRAID adapters and
controllers while your network operating system is up and
running.
This section provides information about the IBM
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program files for
the ServeRAID adapters and controllers. You can use
these files with the Windows NT, Windows 95, OS/2,
Novell NetWare, SCO OpenServer, and SCO UnixWare
operating systems.
ServeRAID Programs for Windows NT
and Windows 95
The ServeRAID program files available for Windows NT
consist of the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program, device drivers, background-server components,
and the IPSSEND and IPSMON command-line programs.
(See “IPSSEND and IPSMON Programs” on page 158 for
more information.)
134
Netfinity Server HMM
The IBM ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program for Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95 is
called the WIN32-Based program. This program provides
a graphical interface that enables you to monitor
ServeRAID configuration changes being performed on your
server while your server is fully operational. You can
create an array, delete an array, create a logical drive,
change the RAID level, dynamically increase the logical
drive size, rebuild an array, and perform other basic
ServeRAID configuration functions.
You can run the WIN32-Based program in the stand-alone
mode only on a Windows NT server. Or, you can run the
WIN32-Based program remotely on a Windows NT or
Windows 95 client and access the client from a server that
has TCP/IP, a background-server component (see
“ServeRAID Background-Server Components”), and one of
the following operating systems installed:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Microsoft Windows NT
IBM OS/2 Warp Server and OS/2 LAN Server
Novell NetWare 3.12 and 4.1X
SCO UnixWare 7.0
SCO OpenServer 5.0.X
ServeRAID Background-Server
Components
The background-server components are operating-system
specific program files that enable servers running Windows
NT, OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, or UnixWare to act as
the TCP/IP interface for a remote client that has the
WIN32-Based program installed. These files install
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID operating-system specific device
drivers.
Notes
1. Only one remote session at a time can access
ServeRAID adapters and controllers using the
background-server component.
2. It is possible to run multiple background-server
components with each component using a
different TCP/IP port; however, to avoid damage
to your data, you must restrict your administration
activities to one remote client and use the other
remote clients for monitoring purposes only.
ServeRAID Programs for OS/2 and
NetWare
The ServeRAID program files available for the OS/2 and
NetWare operating systems consist of the Administration
and Monitoring program, device drivers, background-server
components, and the IPSSEND and IPSMON
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
135
command-line programs. (See “IPSSEND and IPSMON
Programs” on page 158 for more information.)
The Administration and Monitoring Program files for OS/2
and NetWare run only on the system containing a
ServeRAID adapter or controller (stand-alone mode).
These ServeRAID programs provide a limited subset of the
functions provided in the WIN32-Based program, and they
install automatically when you use the instructions in this
chapter to install the ServeRAID device driver for OS/2 or
NetWare.
A good way to use these operating-system specific
programs is to run the OS/2 or NetWare versions of the
Administration and Monitoring Program files locally on the
server, while using the WIN32-Based program on a remote
Windows NT or Windows 95 client. This method enables
you to take advantage of the more advanced
administration and monitoring functions provided in the
WIN32-Based program.
ServerRAID Programs for OpenServer
and UnixWare
The ServeRAID program files available for OpenServer
and UnixWare consist of device drivers, background-server
components, and the IPSSEND and IPSMON
command-line programs. (See “IPSSEND and IPSMON
Programs” on page 158 for more information.)
The background-server components for SCO operating
systems install automatically when you use the instructions
in this chapter to install the ServeRAID OpenServer or
UnixWare device drivers.
To use the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program with a SCO operating system, you must first
install the WIN32-Based program on a Windows NT or
Windows 95 client. Then, attach the Windows NT or
Windows 95 client to the same network as the OpenServer
or UnixWare system that contains the ServeRAID adapter
or controller. You must perform all administration functions
from the remote WIN32-Based client.
Installing the ServeRAID WIN32-Based
Program
This section provides instructions for installing the
ServeRAID WIN32-Based program.
Before you begin the installation.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
136
Be sure that your ServeRAID adapter or controller is
physically installed, properly cabled, and configured.
Be sure that your network operating system is
installed and functional.
If your network operating system is Windows NT, you
can use the ServeRAID WIN32-Based program
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
remotely in the client/server mode or locally in
stand-alone mode.
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers do not
support Windows 95. However, you can run the
WIN32-Based program remotely on a Windows 95
client attached to a remote server running the OS/2,
NetWare, Windows NT, UnixWare, or OpenServer
operating system. Use the instructions in this section
to install the WIN32-Based program on the Windows
95 client.
If your network operating system is OS/2, NetWare,
OpenServer, or UnixWare, you must run the
ServeRAID WIN32-Based program remotely, in the
client/server mode.
Other requirements for this environment include:
– A Windows NT or Windows 95 client running the
IBM ServeRAID WIN32-Based program
–
–
–
Use the instructions in this section to install the
WIN32-Based program.
A network adapter with proper cabling for access
to the remote systems
The TCP/IP networking protocol installed on both
the local and remote systems
The ServeRAID device driver and
background-server component installed on the
remote system
Refer to “Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers”
on page 138 for more information.
If you are using Windows NT, use the installation
instructions and ServerGuide CDs provided with your
server to install the Administration and Monitoring program.
If you want to install the program on a remote Windows 95
client, use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Diskette;
then, use the instructions in this section to install the
Administration and Monitoring program.
To install the ServeRAID WIN32-Based program:
1. Turn on the system and allow Windows NT or
Windows 95 to start.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Click on Start, click on Run; then, type the following:
a:\setup
Note
The a represents the letter assignment for the
diskette drive.
4. Press Enter; then, follow the instructions that appear
on the screen to complete the installation.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
137
Refer to “Starting the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program” on page 100 for more information
about the WIN32-Based program.
Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers
This section provides the instructions for installing the
device drivers for Windows NT, NetWare, OS/2,
OpenServer, and UnixWare. The OS/2 and NetWare
Administration and Monitoring Program files and
background-server components install automatically when
you use the instructions in this section to install the
ServeRAID device drivers for OS/2 and NetWare. The
Windows NT, UnixWare, and OpenServer
background-server components install automatically when
you use the instructions in this chapter to install the
ServeRAID device drivers for Windows NT, UnixWare, and
OpenServer.
When using:
Windows NT
NetWare
OS/2
OpenServer
UnixWare
Go to:
“Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
Windows NT”
“Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers for
NetWare” on page 139
“Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
OS/2” on page 143
“Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
OpenServer” on page 147
“Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers for
UnixWare” on page 150
Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
Windows NT
: This section provides two sets of instructions for
installing the ServeRAID device driver: one that you can
use during the initial Windows NT installation and one that
you can use if Windows NT already is installed.
The background-server components for Windows NT 3.5X
and Windows NT 4.0 install automatically when you use
the instructions in this chapter to install the ServeRAID
device drivers.
Installing the Files while Installing Windows NT:
To install the ServeRAID files while installing Windows NT:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Insert the Windows NT boot diskette into the diskette
drive or insert the bootable Windows NT CD into the
CD-ROM drive; then, restart the server.
3. When the message Setup is inspecting your
computer's hardware configuration... appears,
press the F6 key.
4. After loading some files, Windows NT displays a
screen that allows you to manually specify an
adapter. When this screen appears, press S to
specify additional devices.
138
Netfinity Server HMM
5. When prompted in the next window, select Other
from the list.
6. When prompted to insert the
Manufacturer-supplied-hardware support disk,
insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive; then, press Enter.
7. Select IBM ServeRAID Adapter; then, press Enter.
A message similar to the following will appear. Setup
is loading files (IBM ServeRAID Adapter)....
8. When prompted, press Enter to continue.
9. Use the instructions provided in the Windows NT
manual to complete the normal installation process.
10. After you complete the installation, be sure to apply
the latest Service Pack.
Installing the Files after Installing Windows NT:
To install the ServeRAID files after Installing Windows NT:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive.
3. From the Windows NT Start Menu, select Settings;
then, select Control Panel.
4. Select SCSI Adapter; then, click on the Drivers tab.
5. Click on Add; then, click on Have Disk.
6. In the Copy manufacturer's files from field, type:
a:\nt
7. Click on OK; then in the next dialog box, click on OK
again.
8. When a message appears asking if you want to use
the currently installed device driver or if you want to
install a new one, click on New.
9. When prompted to enter the full path to the IBM
ServeRAID files, type:
a:\nt
10. Click on Continue; then after the device driver
installs, restart the system.
Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers for
NetWare
: This section provides instructions for installing the
ServeRAID device drivers while installing NetWare 3.12 or
4.1X, and instructions for installing the ServeRAID device
drivers if NetWare 3.12 or 4.1X already is installed.
The Administration and Monitoring Program files and the
background-server components for NetWare install
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID device drivers for NetWare.
Installing the Files while Installing NetWare
3.12: The ServeRAID device driver for NetWare,
IPSRAID.HAM, is in the NetWare directory on the IBM
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
139
ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette. You can use the
INSTALL.BAT file, which is also in the NetWare directory
on the diskette, to copy all required files to your server
directory. The INSTALL.BAT file will modify the
STARTUP.NCF file so that it will load the required
NetWare modules.
Use the instructions provided in the NetWare 3.12 manual
along with the following instructions to install the
ServeRAID device driver, background-server component,
and Administration and Monitoring Program files while
installing NetWare, Version 3.12.
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. After you create the diskette, type the following at the
command prompt to manually create the directory for
NetWare:
md server.312
Note
The SERVER.312 is the default NetWare 3.12
directory. If you are using a different path, be
sure to specify the same path throughout the
entire NetWare installation process.
3. Press Enter.
4. Change to the SERVER.312 directory on your hard
disk; then, insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver
Diskette into the diskette drive.
5. At the operating-system prompt, type:
a:
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
6. Press Enter. Then, type:
cd netware
7. Press Enter. Then, type:
install
8. Press Enter. Then, follow the instructions that
appear on the screen to complete the ServeRAID
device driver and program installation.
Installing the Files after Installing NetWare 3.12:
The ServeRAID device driver for NetWare, IPSRAID.HAM,
is in the NetWare directory on the IBM ServeRAID Device
Driver Diskette. You can use the INSTALL.BAT file, which
is also in the NetWare directory on the diskette, to copy all
of the required files to your server directory. The
INSTALL.BAT file will modify the STARTUP.NCF file so
that it will load the required NetWare modules.
140
Netfinity Server HMM
Use the instructions provided in the NetWare 3.12 manual
along with the following instructions to install the
ServeRAID device driver, background-server component,
and Administration and Monitoring Program files after
installing NetWare, Version 3.12.
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive.
3. Go to the default NetWare 3.12 directory. To do this,
type:
cd\server.312
Note
The SERVER.312 is the default NetWare 3.12
directory. If you are using a different path, be
sure to specify the same path throughout the
installation process.
4. Press Enter; then, from the operating-system prompt
in the SERVER.312 directory, type:
a:
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
5. Press Enter. Then, type:
cd netware
6. Press Enter. Then, type:
install
7. Press Enter. Then, follow the instructions that
appear on the screen to complete the ServeRAID
device driver and program installation.
Installing the Files while Installing NetWare
4.1X: Use the instructions provided in the NetWare 4.1X
manual along with the following instructions to install the
ServeRAID device driver, background-server component,
and Administration and Monitoring Program files while
installing NetWare, Version 4.1X.
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Use the instructions provided in the NetWare manual
to begin the installation.
3. When the Choose the Server Drivers - Disk Driver
prompt appears during the install process, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into the
diskette drive.
4. Select Select additional or modify selected
Disk/LAN drivers.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
141
5. If IPSRAID appears, select Deselect a selected
driver.
6. Select Select an additional driver; then, press the
Ins (Insert) key to add an unlisted new device driver.
7. Press F3 to specify a path; then, type:
a:\netware
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
8. Select IPSRAID.HAM from the list of device drivers
that appears in the window; then, press Enter.
Note
The IPSRAID.HAM and support files will be
copied to the system volume.
9. Select OK to overwrite the existing files.
10. Follow the instructions in the NetWare manual to
complete the installation.
Installing the Files after Installing NetWare 4.1X
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. From the system console, start the NetWare
installation utility program by typing:
load install
3. Press Enter.
4. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive.
5. Select Driver options from the Installation Options
list.
6. Select Configure disk and storage from the Driver
Options pop-up window.
7. Select Select an additional driver from the
Additional Drivers Actions pop-up window.
8. When the next screen appears, press the Ins key to
install an unlisted driver.
9. When the next screen appears, press the F3 key to
specify a different path.
10. In the Specify a directory path field, type:
a:\netware
11. When prompted to select a driver to install, select
IPSRAID.HAM.
12. Select Yes when prompted to copy the IPSRAID.HAM
driver.
13. When the prompt appears to specify the server boot
path, type:
c:\nwserver
142
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. This instruction assumes that you installed
NetWare in its default directory. If you did
not install NetWare in the NWSERVER
directory on drive C, modify step 13
accordingly.
2. If any of the files you are installing already
exist on the server, NetWare will prompt you
to save the older files. Although it is not
necessary to save the older files, it usually
is a good idea.
14. After the installation program copies all files, you can
edit parameters (such as the ServeRAID slot number)
from the Driver IPSRAID Parameter Actions screen.
15. After you edit the parameters, select Save
Parameters and load driver to load the ServeRAID
device driver.
16. Press Esc to exit the installation screens.
Note
If you want NetWare to load the ServeRAID device
driver automatically during startup, you must add the
appropriate LOAD command (for example, load
ipsraid.ham slot=1) to the NetWare startup command
file (usually C:\NWSERVER\STARTUP.NCF).
Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
OS/2
: This section provides two sets of instructions for
installing the ServeRAID device driver: one that you can
use during the initial OS/2 installation and one that you can
use if OS/2 already is installed.
The ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program
files and background-server component for OS/2 install
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID device driver for OS/2.
Installing the Files while Installing OS/2: You can
use the following instructions to install the ServeRAID
device driver and Administration and Monitoring Program
files while installing OS/2 Warp Server.
Note
If you install these files on a logical drive that has its
write policy set to the write-back mode, wait at least
10 seconds after being prompted to press
Ctrl+Alt+Del before you actually press the keys.
Waiting 10 seconds or longer gives the ServeRAID
adapter or controller the time needed to flush all
dirty-cache pages out to the hard disk.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
143
To install the ServeRAID files while installing OS/2:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Make a copy of the OS/2 Warp Diskette 1 and label it
Copy of OS/2 Diskette 1.
3. Copy the IPSRAID.ADD file from the OS2 directory
on the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette to the
Copy of OS/2 Diskette 1.
If there is not enough space, delete files not needed
in your installation (such as proprietary CD-ROM or
SCSI device drivers). Make sure you remove all
entries referring to any device drivers you delete from
the CONFIG.SYS file.
4. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the Copy of OS/2
Diskette 1 to add the following lines:
BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD
SET COPYFROMFLOPPY=1
5. Install OS/2, but when prompted to insert diskette 1,
use the updated Copy of OS/2 Diskette 1.
6. After you complete the OS/2 installation, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
7. From an OS/2 window, type:
a:
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
8. Press Enter. Then, type:
ddinstal
9. Press Enter.
The OS/2 Device Driver Installation window will
appear and prompt you for the source and destination
drives. The source directory shows where to insert
the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette. The
destination directory shows where the program will
copy the device driver files.
10. Click on Install.
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
device driver and program files to the OS/2
subdirectory on your hard disk: IPSRAID.ADD,
IPSADM.EXE, and IPSRADM.EXE.
Ÿ The program copies the ServeRAID
IPSRADM.HLP Help file to the \OS2\HELP
directory.
11. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file and verify that there is only
one copy of the line BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD.
144
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. If you have more than one ServeRAID or
SCSI adapter in your system, make sure
that the BASEDEV statement for the adapter
controlling the startup (boot) device appears
before the BASEDEV statements for other
ServeRAID or SCSI adapters in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
2. After you install any service packs, check
the path for the IPSRAID.ADD device driver
and verify that the correct device driver is
installed.
12. Restart the server.
Installing the Files after Installing OS/2: You can
use the following instructions to install the ServeRAID
device driver and Administration and Monitoring Program
files after installing OS/2 Warp Server.
To install the ServeRAID files after installing OS/2:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. After you complete the OS/2 installation, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
3. From an OS/2 window, type:
a:
Notes
1. The a represents the drive assignment for
the diskette drive that contains the
ServeRAID diskette.
2. If you install these files on a logical drive
that has its write policy set to the write-back
mode, wait at least 10 seconds after being
prompted to press Ctrl+Alt+Del before you
actually press the keys. Waiting 10 seconds
or longer gives the ServeRAID adapter or
controller the time needed to flush all
dirty-cache pages out to the hard disk.
4. Press Enter. Then, type:
ddinstal
5. Press Enter.
The OS/2 Device Driver Installation window will
appear and prompt you for the source and destination
drives. The source directory shows where to insert
the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette. The
destination directory shows where the program will
copy the device driver files.
6. Click on Install.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
145
The program copies the following ServeRAID
device driver statement to your CONFIG.SYS
file: BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
device driver and program files to the OS/2
subdirectory on your hard disk: IPSRAID.ADD,
IPSADM.EXE, and IPSRADM.EXE
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
Help file to the \OS2\HELP directory:
IPSRADM.HLP
7. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file and verify that there is only
one copy of the line BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD.
Ÿ
Notes
1. If you have more than one ServeRAID or
SCSI adapter in your system, make sure
that the BASEDEV statement for the adapter
controlling the startup (boot) device appears
before the BASEDEV statements for other
ServeRAID or SCSI adapters in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
2. After you install any service packs, check
the path for the IPSRAID.ADD device driver
and verify that the correct device driver is
installed.
8. Restart the server.
Starting the Administration and Monitoring
Program: To start the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program for OS/2:
1. Go to the OS/2 subdirectory on the hard disk drive;
then, type:
ipsradm /lf=d:\path\logfile
Notes
1. Make sure that the path you type exists.
The program will not create a path.
2. Logfile is where the program will log
messages.
3. If you omit the /lf parameter, the program
will create the IPSRADM.LOG default file in
the OS2 subdirectory to log the program
messages.
2. Press Enter.
3. Use the following steps if you want to define
IPSRADM to OS/2:
a. Open the Templates Folder on the OS/2
Desktop.
b. Drag a program template onto the Desktop. A
Program Settings window will appear.
c. At the Program page in the Path and File Name
field, type:
146
Netfinity Server HMM
c:\os2\ipsradm.exe
d. In the Parameters field, type:
/lf=d:\path\logfile
e. At the General Tab in the Title field, type:
ServeRAID
Installing ServerRAID Device Drivers for
OpenServer
: To use the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program with SCO, you must first install the WIN32-Based
version of the Administration and Monitoring Program on a
Windows NT or Windows 95 client. Then, attach the
Windows NT or Windows 95 client to the same network as
the OpenServer systems that contain the ServeRAID
adapters or controllers. Finally, you must install the
ServeRAID device driver and background-server
component for OpenServer.
The background-server component for OpenServer installs
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID OpenServer device driver. This
component enables the OpenServer system to act as the
TCP/IP interface for the remote WIN32-Based Program.
(See “ServeRAID Programs for Windows NT and Windows
95” on page 134 for more information.)
Installing the Files for OpenServer: Before you
begin the installation, review the following information:
Ÿ
Ÿ
You must install logical drives as Bus Number 0 when
using the MKDEV program, regardless of the channel
that the physical drives are on.
You must install nondisk devices, such as CD-ROM
and tape drives, as Bus Numbers 1, 2, or 3 relative to
the channel to which they are attached. External
Channel 1 connector is Bus Number 1, external
Channel 2 connector is Bus Number 2, and internal
Channel 3 connector is Bus Number 3.
To configure the default nondisk devices during the initial
installation:
1. Redefine the default tape drive in the initial bootstring.
For example, to install the IPSRAID BTLD and
redefine the tape drive, go to the BOOT prompt and
type:
link Stp=ips(ð, 1, 2, ð)
The numbers in parentheses represent the Host
Adapter Number, the Bus Number, the SCSI ID, and
the LUN respectively.
2. When prompted for the location of the installation CD,
change the Bus Number and SCSI ID, as required.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
147
Adding BTLD at Boot Time: To install the
ServeRAID device driver for OpenServer, Version 5.0.X:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. At the BOOT prompt, type:
link
3. Press Enter; then, when asked for the name of the
package to load, type:
ipsraid
4. Press Enter.
5. After the kernel loads but before it runs, link prompts
you to insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for
SCO Operating Systems Diskette.
While the installation program copies the files, one or
both of the following messages might appear:
Messages
1. Extracting BTLD distribution for
ipsraid... /etc/uadmin getdev b ips: No
such device (error 19)
2. dynamic linker: dlvr_audit: Cannot open
/dev/zero for file /lib/libprot.so.1
You can ignore Message A, no action is required.
But if Message B appears, you must press Enter
when prompted to continue the installation.
6. Keep the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette readily available. You
will need it to configure the device driver into the link
kit.
For additional information about adding a BTLD at boot
time, refer to “Using Boot-Time Loadable Drivers” in the
SCO OpenServer Handbook.
Adding BTLD after the Initial Installation
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Start the server in system maintenance mode, and
log in as root.
3. Type:
installpkg
4. Press Enter; then, select the diskette drive in which
you will insert your installation diskette.
5. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette, when prompted.
6. When prompted for the name of the package, type:
ipsraid
148
Netfinity Server HMM
7. Press Enter; then, relink the kernel (as described in
“Relinking the kernel” in the SCO OpenServer
Handbook) by entering the following commands:
cd /etc/conf/cf.d
./link_unix
8. After the kernel rebuilds, the following message
appears:
The UNIX kernel has been rebuilt.
this kernel to boot by default?
Do you want
To continue, enter: y
The system backs up the old kernel by moving /UNIX
to /UNIX.OLD.
9. When the system asks for the kernel environment to
be rebuilt, enter: y
The system will respond with a successful message.
10. Use shutdown to bring down the system; then, restart
the system.
Using an IDE CD-ROM Drive to Install
OpenServer Files: This section contains instructions
for installing files for OpenServer 5.0.0, OpenServer 5.0.2,
and OpenServer 5.0.4 when using an IDE CD-ROM Drive.
Installing the Files for OpenServer 5.0.0
: To install files for OpenServer 5.0.0 using an IDE
CD-ROM drive:
1. Type the following at the BOOT prompt:
restart ahslink="ATAPI ipsraid" Srom=wd(ð,ð,ð,ð)
2. Insert the ATAPI BTLD diskette when prompted; then,
press r to replace the wd driver.
The fields for the ATAPI CDROM are:
Srom=wd(c,d,l,b) where:
c = primary (0) or secondary (1) IDE/EIDE
controller
d = master (0) or slave (1) device
l = LUN of device (always 0 with ATAPI or wd
driver)
b = BUS of device (always 0 with ATAPI or wd
driver)
Installing the Files for OpenServer 5.0.2 and
5.0.4: To install files for OpenServer Versions 5.0.2 or
5.0.4 using an IDE CD-ROM drive:
1. Type the following at the BOOT prompt:
restart link=ipsraid Srom=wd(ð,ð,ð,ð)
Note
The ATAPI BTLD (which includes the wd driver)
is included in OpenServer 5.0.2 and 5.0.4.
The fields for the ATAPI CDROM are:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
149
2.
3.
4.
5.
Srom=wd(c,d,l,b) where:
c = primary (0) or secondary (1) IDE/EIDE
controller
d = master (0) or slave (1) device
l = LUN of device (always 0 with ATAPI or "wd"
driver)
b = BUS of device (always 0 with ATAPI or "wd"
driver)
Let the system start normally until it comes to the
select Media options.
Ÿ If you are using OpenServer 5.0.2, go to step 3.
Ÿ If you are using OpenServer 5.0.4, go to step 4.
To install with OpenServer 5.0.2:
a. Select Adapter type as WD.
b. Select Media Type as SCSI CDROM.
c. Select ID, BUS and LUN as 0.
d. Go to step 5.
To install with OpenServer 5.0.4:
a. Select Media Type as IDE CDROM Drive.
b. Select Primary Adapter and Master Device.
c. Go to step 5.
You have completed the installation.
Installing ServeRAID Device Drivers for
UnixWare
: The instructions for installing the ServeRAID files
when using UnixWare depend on the number of IDE and
SCSI disk-storage adapters and controllers installed in the
system. If all of the direct-access-storage devices (DASD)
in the system are attached to a single disk-storage adapter
or controller (such as the ServeRAID adapter or controller),
you can skip the instructions in this section and go directly
to “Installing the Files while Installing UnixWare” on
page 154 or “Installing the Files after Installing UnixWare”
on page 154.
If you are attaching devices to multiple disk-storage
adapters or controllers (including IDE and SCSI controllers
integrated on the system board), use the following
instructions.
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are installing UnixWare on a drive attached to a
ServeRAID adapter or controller, follow the
instructions in “Installing UnixWare on a ServeRAID
Drive.”
If you are installing UnixWare on a drive attached to a
non-ServeRAID adapter or controller and you intend
to store only data on the drives attached to your
ServeRAID adapters and controllers, follow the
instructions in “Installing UnixWare on a
Non-ServeRAID Drive” on page 152.
Installing UnixWare on a ServeRAID Drive: Use
the following instructions if you are using multiple
disk-storage adapters or controllers and you are installing
150
Netfinity Server HMM
UnixWare on a drive attached to a ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
Note
If you are not using multiple disk-storage adapters and
controllers, go to “Installing the Files while Installing
UnixWare” on page 154.
1. Install all ServeRAID adapters that you intend to use
in your system.
2. Using the ServeRAID Configuration Program, create
all of your arrays and define all of your logical drives.
3. Make a list of all of the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers, including the order and slot number,
installed in the system. To do this:
a. Turn on the server.
b. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt
appears, press Ctrl+i. When a system contains
more than one ServeRAID adapter or controller,
a selection screen appears.
c. The menu lists the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers in order. Select the first ServeRAID
adapter or controller from the menu.
d. Select Advanced Functions from the Main
Menu.
e. Select View Controller and PCI Information
from the Advanced Functions menu.
f. Record the slot number for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller; then, press Esc three times
to return to the controller selection screen.
g. Repeat step 3c through step 3f until you record
the slot number for each ServeRAID adapter or
controller that appears on the selection screen.
4. Turn off the system; then, remove all ServeRAID
adapters and controllers except the first one on your
list.
Note
If one of the ServeRAID controllers that you need
to remove is on the system board, you must do
one of the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the CD-ROM drive that you are using to
install your operating system is attached to
the integrated ServeRAID controller,
disconnect or remove all disk drives
attached to the integrated controller.
If only disk drives are attached to the
integrated controller, disconnect the SCSI
cable from the ServeRAID connector on the
system board. See the label inside the
server cover for the location of the
ServeRAID connector.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
151
5. Remove all other non-ServeRAID IDE and SCSI
disk-storage adapters and controllers.
Note
If one of the disk-storage controllers that you
need to remove is on the system board, you
must do one of the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the CD-ROM drive that you are using to
install your operating system is attached to
the integrated disk-storage controller,
disconnect or remove all disk drives
attached to the integrated controller.
If only disk drives are attached to the
integrated controller, disconnect the cable
for the integrated controller from the IDE or
SCSI connector on the system board. See
the label inside the server cover for the
location of the IDE or SCSI controller
connector.
6. Follow the instructions in “Installing the Files while
Installing UnixWare” on page 154; then, return here
and continue with
step 7.
7. Power down the system.
8. Install any non-ServeRAID disk-storage adapters or
controllers in the server; then, attach the drives to the
disk-storage adapters and controllers.
9. Install the second ServeRAID adapter or controller
from the list you created in step 3f on page 151;
then, attach the drives to the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
10. Turn on the system and allow UnixWare to discover
the new disk-storage adapters and controllers.
11. Power down the system.
12. Repeat steps 9, 10, and 11 until all ServeRAID
adapters, ServeRAID controllers, and drives are
installed.
13. You can now partition and format the logical drives
attached to the additional ServeRAID adapters and
controllers. See the information provided with
UnixWare for more instructions.
Installing UnixWare on a Non-ServeRAID Drive:
Use the instructions in this section if you are using multiple
disk-storage adapters or controllers, you are installing
UnixWare on a drive attached to a non-ServeRAID adapter
or controller, and you intend to store only data on the
drives attached to your ServeRAID adapters and
controllers.
1. Install all ServeRAID adapters that you intend to use
in your system.
2. Using the ServeRAID Configuration Program, create
all of your arrays and define all of your logical drives.
152
Netfinity Server HMM
3. Make a list of all of the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers, including the order and slot number,
installed in the system. To do this:
a. Turn on the server.
b. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt
appears, press Ctrl+i. When a system contains
more than one ServeRAID adapter or controller,
a selection screen appears.
c. The menu lists the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers in order. Select the first ServeRAID
adapter or controller from the menu.
d. Select Advanced Functions from the Main
Menu.
e. Select View Controller and PCI Information
from the Advanced Functions menu.
f. Record the slot number for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller; then, press Esc three times
to return to the controller selection screen.
g. Repeat step 3c through step 3f until you record
the slot number for each ServeRAID adapter or
controller that appears on the selection screen.
4. Turn off the system; then, remove all ServeRAID,
IDE, and SCSI disk-storage adapters and controllers
except the one attached to the drive where you intend
to install UnixWare.
Note
If one of the disk-storage or ServeRAID
controllers that you need to remove is on the
system board, do one of the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the CD-ROM drive that you are using to
install your operating system is attached to
the integrated controller, disconnect or
remove all disk drives attached to the
integrated controller.
If only disk drives are attached to the
integrated controller, disconnect the SCSI or
IDE cable for the integrated controller from
the connector on the system board. See the
label inside the server cover for the location
of the SCSI and IDE cable connectors.
5. Follow the instructions in “Installing the Files while
Installing UnixWare” on page 154; then, return here
and continue with
step 6.
6. Power down the system.
7. Install any non-ServeRAID disk-storage adapters or
controllers in the server; then, attach the drives to the
disk-storage adapters and controllers.
8. Install the first ServeRAID adapter or controller from
the list you created in step 3f; then, attach the drives
to the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
153
9. Turn on the system and allow UnixWare to discover
the new disk-storage adapters and controllers.
10. Power down the system.
11. Repeat steps 8, 9, and 10 until all ServeRAID
adapters, ServeRAID controllers, and drives are
installed.
12. You can now partition and format the logical drives
attached to the ServeRAID adapters and controllers.
See the information provided with UnixWare for more
instructions.
Installing the Files while Installing UnixWare: To
install the ServeRAID files while installing UnixWare 7.0:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Use the instructions provided with UnixWare to begin
the installation.
3. When a message appears asking if you want to install
any HBA diskettes, insert the IBM ServeRAID Device
Drivers for SCO Operating Systems Diskette; then,
select Install HBA diskette.
4. Use the instructions provided in the UnixWare manual
to complete the normal installation process.
Installing the Files after Installing UnixWare:
Use the following instructions to install the ServeRAID files
after you install UnixWare, or use these instructions to
update a previously installed ServeRAID file with a newer
version. You can use the UnixWare Pkgadd or the
UnixWare SCOAdmin utility program to install the files.
Installing an HBA Diskette File Using Pkgadd
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Type:
pkgadd –d/ dev/dsk/fðt
4. Press Enter
5. When the message Insert diskette into Floppy
Drive 1 appears, press Enter.
6. When the message Installation of IBM ServeRAID
SCSI IHV HBA (ips) was successful appears, type:
q
7. Press Enter; then after the device driver installs,
restart the system.
Installing an HBA Diskette File Using SCOAdmin
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
154
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Start the SCOAdmin utility program.
4. Select Software_Management.
5. Select Application Installer.
6. Select Disk_A from the Install From tab.
7. Click on the Update View button.
8. When the icon labeled ips appears in the window,
click on Install.
9. After the device driver installs, restart the system.
Starting the ServeRAID
Background-Server Components
To start the background-server components:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are using OS/2 or Windows, double-click on the
IPSRAID ADMIN-MONITOR icon on the desktop.
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare:
1. Make sure you are logged on as root.
a. If you are not, type:
su
b. When prompted, enter the root password.
2. Start the background-server component
(daemon) running in the background. To do this,
type:
ipsadm &
Ÿ
3. Press Enter.
If you are using Novell NetWare:
1. Load the remote component. To do this, type:
load ipsadm.nlm
2. Press Enter
Notes
1. To load the NetWare Administration
program with NetWare SFT III installed,
load IPSADM.NLM in the mirrored
server engine. The ServeRAID
adapters and controllers in the primary
and backup servers will appear to the
Administration and Monitoring Program
as if they were in one server.
2. When a rebuild, synchronization, or
logical-drive migration is in process,
you cannot stop the IPSADM.NLM
module by pressing the Esc key. To
stop the module during one of these
operations, you must unload the
IPSADM.NLM module.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
155
ServerRAID Background-Server
Components
This section provides information about background-server
component command-line parameters and logging
messages.
Command-Line Parameters
: To use the command-line parameters provided in the
background-server components, issue the IPSADM
command in the following format:
IPSADM parameter 1 parameter 2 and so on...
Valid command-line parameters for the background-server
components are as follows:
–?
The –? command displays the help for the
valid parameters.
–p:number The –p:number command specifies the port
number that the server will check for client
connections.
The port number is a parameter used in
TCP/IP to distinguish among different
services on a single server. The default for
the server utility programs is port number
1087. You can use this parameter to change
the port number if another service on the
system is using 1087.
–s:filename The –s:filename command specifies the name
of the file that contains security information.
For more about security information, see
“Background-Server Component Security” on
page 157.
–f
The –f command specifies to log messages
to the default file, IPSADM.LOG.
–f:filename The -f:filename command lets you specify the
name of a file in which to log messages.
–d
The –d command disables the logging of
messages to the standard output, which is
usually the screen.
Logging Messages
: Messages generated by the ServeRAID adapter or
controller consist of startup information, connecting and
disconnecting clients, and error messages.
When using the –f, –f:filename and –d parameters, you
can specify how you want the ServeRAID messages
handled. The default is to log messages to the standard
output, which is usually the screen. However, you can
have these messages logged to other output devices, such
as a printer or a text file.
156
Netfinity Server HMM
The following information provides examples of different
formats for using the IPSADM command and the results.
Command
Results
IPSADM
Logs messages to the
standard output and not to a
file.
IPSADM -f
Logs messages to the
standard output and to the
IPSADM.LOG file.
IPSADM -f:NEWFILE.LOG
Logs messages to the
standard output and to the
file that you defined:
NEWFILE.LOG.
IPSADM -d
Disables the logging of
messages.
IPSADM -f -d
Logs messages to the
IPSADM.LOG file; however,
messages are not logged to
the standard output.
Background-Server Component Security
: Security information is maintained in an optional text
file on the server. The file stores unencrypted user names
and unencrypted passwords; therefore, the file must be
kept in a secure directory.
When user names and passwords are entered into the
Administration and Monitoring Program (the client), they
are encrypted for delivery to the server. The server
decrypts the user names and passwords to verify proper
access to the ServeRAID adapter or controller. If the
verification is successful, the adapter or controller accepts
commands from the client. If no security file is present in
the default directory, or the directory specified by the -s
parameter, security is disabled. The server component
then accepts commands from any client connection.
The security file contains one user name and password
combination per line. The strings are separated by a colon
(:) and each string has a maximum of eight characters.
Background-Server Component Name
Resolution
: The server component relies on name resolution to
determine the host name from the client that is trying to
connect. When a client is trying to access a remote
server, the server tries to look up the name of the client
connecting. The method used to look up the name is
determined by the configuration of the server. Some
possible methods for this are Domain Name Servers
(DNS) or HOSTS files. With certain configurations, some
timing delays might occur due to misconfiguration or
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
157
inability to access the DNS. If problems persist, check
your network configuration.
IPSSEND and IPSMON Programs
IPSSEND and IPSMON are advanced command-line
programs that you can use to manage your ServeRAID
adapters and controllers. These utility programs are
provided on the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette. This ServeRAID diskette is available from the
ServerGuide Diskette Factory or from the following address
on the World Wide Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
See page 134 for the instructions needed to access the
IBM support page.
You can use the IPSSEND program to view the
configuration of a ServeRAID adapter or controller, rebuild
a defunct drive, initialize logical drives, synchronize logical
drives, and perform other functions.
You can use the IPSMON program to monitor a
ServeRAID adapter or controller for defunct drives,
predictive failure analysis (PFA) warnings, rebuild
operations, synchronizations, and logical-drive migrations.
This program can log a message to the monitor, to a file,
or to both the monitor and a file whenever activities occur.
You can use the IPSSEND and IPSMON programs with
the following operating systems:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
IBM OS/2 Warp Server and OS/2 LAN Server
Novell NetWare 3.12 and 4.1X
Microsoft Windows NT
SCO OpenServer 5.0.X
SCO UnixWare 7.0
You also can use the IPSSEND program with DOS, but
DOS requires the ASPI Manager.
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare
: To install these programs for OS/2, Windows NT, or
NetWare:
1. After you create an IBM ServeRAID Command Line
Programs Diskette using Diskette Factory or by
downloading the image from the IBM Support Page
on the World Wide Web, start the server.
2. After the operating system loads, insert the IBM
ServeRAID Command Line Programs Diskette into
the diskette drive.
3. If you are using NetWare, go to step 5 on page 159.
If you are using Windows NT or OS/2, create an
IPSADM directory on your hard disk drive. To do
this, go to the operating system command prompt and
type:
158
Netfinity Server HMM
md c:\ipsadm
Notes
1. The c represents the drive where OS/2 or
Windows NT is installed.
2. If you installed the Administration and
Monitoring Program files, you already
created this directory.
4. Press Enter.
5. Copy the IPSSEND.EXE file to your hard disk drive
by typing one of the following at the command
prompt:
Ÿ For OS/2, type:
copy a:\os2\ipssend.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For Windows NT, type:
copy a:\nt\ipssend.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For NetWare, type:
copy a:\netware\ipssend.nlm c:\nwserver
Notes
1. The a represents the drive assignment
for the diskette drive that contains the
ServeRAID diskette.
2. The c represents the drive where OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare is installed.
3. These instructions assume that you
installed NetWare in the NWSERVER
directory.
6. Press Enter; then, copy the IPSMON.EXE file to your
hard disk drive by typing one of the following at the
command prompt:
Ÿ For OS/2, type:
copy a:\os2\ipsmon.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For Windows NT, type:
copy a:\nt\ipsmon.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For NetWare, type:
copy a:\netware\ipsmon.nlm c:\nwserver
Notes
1. The a represents the drive assignment
for the diskette drive that contains the
ServeRAID diskette.
2. The c represents the drive where OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare is installed.
3. These instructions assume that you
installed NetWare in the NWSERVER
directory.
7. Press Enter; then, refer to “Starting the ServeRAID
Administration and Monitoring Program” on page 100
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
159
for information to start and use the IPSSEND and
IPSMON programs.
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for
OpenServer
: To install these programs for OpenServer 5.0.X:
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette into the diskette drive.
2. Copy the program files from the IBM ServeRAID
Command Line Programs Diskette by typing the
following:
doscp –r a:/openserv/ipssend /usr/bin/ipssend
3. Press Enter; then, type:
doscp –r a:/openserv/ipsmon /usr/bin/ipsmon
4. Press Enter; then, change the access permissions by
typing the following:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipssend
5. Press Enter; then, type:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipsmon
6. Press Enter; then, refer to “Starting the ServeRAID
Administration and Monitoring Program” on page 100
for information to start and use the IPSSEND and
IPSMON programs.
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for
UnixWare
: To install these programs for UnixWare 7.0:
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette into the diskette drive.
2. Copy the program files from the IBM ServeRAID
Command Line Programs Diskette by typing the
following:
doscp –r a:/unixware/ipssend /usr/bin/ipssend
3. Press Enter; then, type:
doscp –r a:/unixware/ipsmon /usr/bin/ipsmon
4. Press Enter; then, change the access permissions by
typing the following:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipssend
5. Press Enter; then, type:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipsmon
6. Press Enter; then, refer to “Starting the ServeRAID
Administration and Monitoring Program” on page 100
for information to start and use the IPSSEND and
IPSMON programs.
160
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing IPSSEND for DOS
: To install IPSSEND for DOS:
1. Create a startable diskette. To do this, insert a blank
diskette in diskette drive A; then, type:
format a: /s
2. Press Enter.
3. Copy the ASPI device driver from the DOS directory
on the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette to the
startable diskette.
4. Copy the IPSSEND.EXE file from the DOS directory
on the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette to the startable diskette.
5. Leaving the startable diskette in the diskette drive,
restart the system; then, refer to “Starting the
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program”
on page 100 for information to start and use the
IPSSEND and IPSMON programs.
Rebuilding a Defunct Drive
When a hard disk drive goes defunct (DDD), a Rebuild
operation is required to reconstruct the data for the device
in its respective disk array. The ServeRAID adapters and
controllers can reconstruct RAID level-1 and RAID level-5
logical drives, but they cannot reconstruct data stored in
RAID level-0 logical drives.
To prevent data integrity problems, the ServeRAID
adapters and controllers set the RAID level-0 logical drives
to Blocked during a Rebuild operation. After the Rebuild
operation completes, you can unblock the RAID level-0
logical drives, and access them once again. But
remember, the logical drive might contain damaged data.
(Refer to “Unblocking Logical Drives” on page 110 for
more information.)
Before you rebuild a drive, review the following guidelines
and general information.
Guidelines for the Rebuild Operation
Ÿ
Ÿ
The replacement hard disk drive must have a
capacity equal to or greater than the failed drive.
If the hard disk drive being rebuilt is part of a RAID
level-0 logical drive, the RAID level-0 drive is blocked.
– You must unblock any RAID level-0 logical
drives at the end of the rebuild operation.
– If you use the Administration and Monitoring
program to initiate the rebuild operation, you can
unblock the blocked RAID level-0 drive when the
rebuild operation completes. (See “Unblocking
Logical Drives” on page 110 for more
information.)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
161
Ÿ
Data in a logical drive with RAID level-0 is lost during
the rebuild operation. If you backed up your data
before the drive failed, you can restore the data to the
new drive.
General Information about the Rebuild
Operation
: A physical hard disk drive can enter the rebuild state
if:
Ÿ
Ÿ
You physically replace a defunct drive that is part of
the critical logical drive.
When you physically replace a defunct drive in a
critical logical drive, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller rebuilds the data on the new physical drive
before it changes the logical drive state back to Okay.
The ServeRAID adapter or controller adds a
hot-spare or a standby hot-spare drive to the array
and changes its state from Hot-Spare or Standby
Hot-Spare to Rebuilding.
Automatically Rebuilding the Defunct Drive
: The ServeRAID adapter or controller will rebuild a
defunct drive automatically when all of the following
conditions exist:
Ÿ
Ÿ
The physical drive that failed is part of a RAID level-1
or RAID level-5 logical drive.
A hot-spare or standby hot-spare drive with a capacity
equal to or greater than the capacity of the defunct
drive is available the moment the drive fails.
– When multiple hot-spare drives are available, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller searches for a
hot-spare drive of the appropriate size. The
smallest drive that meets this requirement enters
the Rebuild state.
– If no hot-spare or standby hot-spare drives are
available, the rebuild operation will start the
moment you replace the defective drive.
Note
If you physically replace the drive and the
new drive does not appear in the Physical
Drives branch of the Main Tree, you must
scan for new or removed Ready drives.
Ÿ
162
No rebuild, synchronization, or logical-drive migration
operation is in process.
Netfinity Server HMM
Locations
The following information supports the Netfinity 5500-M10 Type 8661 server.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
“Adapters” on page 165.
“Battery Replacement” on page 170.
“Before You Begin” on page 173.
“Changing Jumper Positions” on page 174.
“Completing the Installation” on page 176
“Controls and Indicators” on page 180.
“CD-ROM Drive” on page 183.
“DASD Backplane Removal” on page 185.
“Diagnostics Panel LEDs” on page 186.
“External Options” on page 187.
“Front Bezel Removal” on page 194.
“Hot-Plug PCI Adapter Installation” on page 195.
“Hot-Swap Power Supply Installation” on page 202.
“Hot-Swap Power Supply Removal” on page 206.
“Hot-Swap Fan Assembly Replacement” on
page 208.
“Information LED Panel” on page 210.
“Information Panel Cover Removal” on page 212.
“Information Panel LED Assembly Removal” on
page 213.
“Input/Output Connectors and Expansion Slots” on
page 215.
“Interior LED and Speaker Assembly” on page 218.
“Internal Drives Installation” on page 219.
“Installing Devices in the NetBAY3” on page 232.
“Memory-Module Kits” on page 237.
“Microprocessor Kit Installation” on page 241.
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246.
“Power Backplane Removal” on page 248.
“Power Supplies” on page 250.
“Power Supply LEDs” on page 252.
“Power Supply Filler Plate” on page 253.
“NetBAY3 Bezel Installation” on page 254.
“Processor Board Component Locations” on
page 255.
“Processor Board Jumpers” on page 257.
“Processor Board Removal” on page 258.
“Rack Installation” on page 259.
“SCSI Backplane Component Locations” on
page 274.
“SCSI Backplane Option Jumpers” on page 275.
“Server Cabling” on page 276.
“Server Door and Trim Bezels Removal on the Tower
Model” on page 277
“Shuttle Removal” on page 278
“Side Cover(s) Removal” on page 279.
“System Board Component Locations” on page 280.
“System Board Jumpers” on page 282.
“System Board Removal” on page 283.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
163
Ÿ
Ÿ
164
“Top Cover Removal” on page 286
“Voltage Regulator Card Removal” on page 287
Netfinity Server HMM
Adapters
You can add adapters to extend the capabilities and power
of your server. Many adapters provide bus-master
capabilities, which enable the adapters to perform
operations without interrupting the server's microprocessor.
You can install up to seven adapters in the expansion
connectors, called slots, on the system board of your
server. Six of the slots are peripheral component
interconnect (PCI) expansion slots and one is an industry
standard architecture (ISA) expansion slot.
In four of the PCI slots, you can install a new PCI adapter
or replace an existing PCI adapter with the same type of
adapter without turning off the server power and restarting
the system, if these features are supported by your
operating system. These slots are called hot-pluggable
PCI slots. They are also referred to as hot-plug PCI slots.
The expansion slots have Plug and Play capabilities. See
“Plug and Play Technology” on page 168 for additional
information.
Your server comes with a video controller. This video
controller is an integrated component on the system board.
It is not in an expansion slot. The integrated video
controller has super video graphics array (SVGA)
technology.
The integrated video controller is not removable. If you
want to disable this controller and use a video adapter
instead, you can install a video adapter in an expansion
slot. When you install a PCI video adapter, the server
BIOS automatically disables the integrated video controller.
When you install an ISA video adapter, you must move a
jumper to disable the integrated video controller. See
“System Board Jumpers” on page 282 for more
information.
Note
Video adapters are not supported in PCI slots on the
secondary PCI bus (PCI slots 1–4).
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI and
ISA expansion slots on the system board.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
165
.1/ 16-bit ISA slot
.2/ Power LEDs for hot-swap slots
.3/ Attention LEDs for hot-swap slots
.4/ Hot-plug 32-bit PCI slots 1–4 (on secondary PCI
bus)
.5/ Non-hot-plug 32-bit PCI slots 5 and 6 (on
primary PCI bus)
LEDs for Hot-Plug PCI Slots:
Each hot-plug PCI
slot has three LEDs associated with it — two Attention
LEDs and one Power LED.
Ÿ
Ÿ
166
Power LED: This LED is on when the hot-plug PCI
slot is active and has power. An adapter must not
be added to or removed from the PCI slot when the
Power LED is on. When this LED is off, the PCI slot
is inactive and has no power applied. An adapter can
be installed when the Power LED for the PCI slot is
off. Refer to your operating system documentation to
determine if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters, and, if
so, how to disable the hot-plug PCI slot.
Attention LEDs: Each hot-plug PCI slot has an
Attention LED that is visible from the rear of the
server and one that can be seen from inside the
server. (The LEDs have the same meaning; they are
duplicated to be visible from outside or inside the
server.) An Attention LED flashes approximately
once per second when it is on. The meaning of the
Attention LEDs is defined by your operating system.
Refer to your operating system documentation to
Netfinity Server HMM
determine if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if
so, what the Attention LEDs indicate.
The following table describes the LEDs:
Power LED
Attention
LED
Description
On
Flashing
The adapter requires attention.
Slot still has power applied.
Do not remove or install an
adapter in the slot. Refer to
your operating system
documentation for instructions.
On
Off
Normal operation; no
intervention is required.
Off
Flashing
The adapter requires
intervention. Power is removed
from the slot. An adapter can
be removed or installed in the
slot.
Off
Off
Power is removed from the
slot. An adapter can be
removed or installed in the slot.
Adapter Considerations: Before you continue
with the adapter-installation procedure:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Review the documentation that comes with the
adapter and follow those instructions in addition to
these instructions. If you need to change the switch
or jumper settings on your adapter, follow the
instructions that come with the adapter
documentation.
You can install a full-length ISA adapter in the ISA
expansion slot.
You can install full-length adapters in all PCI
expansion slots.
You can install hot-plug PCI adapters in PCI slots
1–4, if your operating system supports this feature.
Non-hot-plug PCI adapters can also be installed in
these slots.
Your server supports 5.0 V and universal PCI
adapters; it does not support 3.3 V adapters.
Note
A universal PCI adapter supports both 3.3 V and
5.0 V operation.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Your server uses a rotational interrupt technique to
configure PCI adapters. Because of this technique,
you can install a variety of PCI adapters that currently
do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
PCI slots 5 and 6 are on the primary PCI bus and
PCI slots 1–4 are on the secondary PCI bus. The
performance of the PCI adapters depends on the
configuration of adapters in your system.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
167
Plug and Play Technology: Plug and Play is an
ISA technology designed to make expanding your server
easier. Plug and Play adapter support is built into the
system board in your server. If your operating system
supports Plug and Play technology, your server will
automatically configure itself when you install an ISA Plug
and Play device.
Note
PCI adapters are also often referred to as plug and
play because they configure automatically.
Plug and Play Adapters: Plug and Play adapters are
easier to install and set up because they are
auto-configuring. This means that there are no jumpers or
switches to set.
A Plug and Play adapter comes with built-in identification
and configuration specifications (set in memory on the
adapter) that provide installation information to the server
during startup. This information is read by the input/output
(I/O) bus and interpreted by the server BIOS. The BIOS
routines automatically configure the adapter around the
resources already in use by other devices.
Legacy Adapters: If an adapter that you install is not
Plug and Play compatible, the Configuration/Setup utility
program can help you to manually configure the adapter.
Adapters that are not Plug and Play compatible are known
as legacy devices.
Configuration/Setup Utility Program: Within the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, the Plug and Play
screen displays server resources that are typically required
by adapters:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
I/O port address
Memory address
IRQ line
DMA channel
From the Configuration/Setup Utility program screens, you
can select available resources for the adapter that you are
installing. Resources that are not currently being used by
adapters that are already installed in your server are listed
as [ISA Legacy]. The system resources that are in use by
other devices are listed as [Not Applicable].
168
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. Refer to the documentation that comes with the
adapter for information about required system
resources. Then, make the appropriate jumper
or switch settings on the adapter.
2. If you have a resource conflict, set the resources
that are used by the ISA legacy adapter to [ISA
Legacy]. This will manually configure the ISA
legacy adapter to that specific server resource.
Once Plug and Play detects that a resource is
not available, it will skip that resource, and
reconfigure to other available system resources.
(See “Plug and Play” on page 64.)
Enabling Hot-Plug PCI Support:
Your Netfinity
5500-M10 has hot-plug PCI capability. In order to enable
this feature, you must install the operating system services
for hot-plug PCI support code. To obtain the operating
system hot-plug PCI support code, access the IBM Web
site at:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
Click on Intel Processor Based Servers Support. Click
on Netfinity 5500-M10 from the select family field. Click
on Downloadable files.
Attention
All hot-plug operations must be done through the
operating system console (or supported user
interface). Failure to do this can result in a system
hang or serious damage to the adapter card or system
unit.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
169
Battery Replacement
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind.
The lithium battery must be handled correctly to avoid
possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must
adhere to the following instructions.
Caution
When replacing the battery, use only IBM FRU
Number 33F8354 or an equivalent type battery
recommended by the manufacturer. If your system
has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it
only with the same module type made by the same
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Throw or immerse into water
Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances
or regulations.
Note
In the U.S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about
battery disposal.
If you replace the original lithium battery with a
heavy-metal battery or a battery with heavy-metal
components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain
heavy metals must not be disposed of with normal
domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by
the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be
recycled or disposed of in a proper manner.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288.
Follow any special handling and installation
instructions supplied with the replacement
battery.
Note
After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure
your server and reset the system date and time.
To replace the battery:
170
Netfinity Server HMM
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System
Board Component Locations” on page 280).
3. Remove any adapters that are installed in PCI slots 1
and 2, so you can access the battery. (See “Hot-Plug
PCI Adapter Installation” on page 195 for information
about installing and removing adapters from the
hot-plug PCI slots.)
4. Lift and remove the plastic dividers between PCI slot
1 and the ISA slot and between PCI slot 1 and PCI
slot 2 by pressing the latches on the top ends of the
dividers toward the dividers and lifting the dividers
from the server.
5. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the
battery.
b. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward
the rear of the server. The spring mechanism
behind the battery will push it out toward you as
you slide it forward.
c. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the
battery from under the battery clip.
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base
of the battery socket by pressing gently on the
clip.
6. Insert the new battery:
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the
front of the socket, under the battery clip.
b. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the
battery down into the socket.
7. Reinstall any adapters you removed. (See “Hot-Plug
PCI Adapter Installation” on page 195 for information
about installing and removing adapters from the
hot-plug PCI slots.)
8. Insert the plastic dividers into the divider guides
beside PCI slots 1 and 2.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
171
9. Reinstall the top cover and complete the installation
(see “Completing the Installation” on page 176).
Note
You will have to wait approximately 20 seconds
after you plug the power cord of your server into
an electrical outlet for the Power Control button
to become active.
10. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
reset configuration parameters as needed.
Ÿ To reset the system date and time, go to “Date
and Time” on page 58.
Ÿ To reset the power-on password, go to “Using
the Power-On Password Menu” on page 60.
Ÿ To reconfigure your server, follow the
instructions given in “Configuration/Setup Utility
Program” on page 25 (all models).
172
Netfinity Server HMM
Before You Begin
Notes:
1. You do not need to turn the server off to install or
replace hot-swap power supplies, hot-swap drives,
hot-swap fans, or hot-plug PCI adapters.
2. The color orange on components or labels in your
Netfinity 5500-M10 indicates hot-plug components.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Become familiar with the safety procedures, see
“Safety Information” on page 332.
Make sure that you have an adequate number of
properly grounded electrical outlets for your server,
monitor, and any other options that you intend to
install.
Place your server in a location that is dry. Rain or
spilled liquids might damage your server.
Leave about 50 mm (2 inches) of ventilated space on
the right and left sides of the server to allow the
server cooling system to work properly. Leave 100
mm (4 inches) of clearance at the rear of the server
for cables.
Have a supply of 1 MB and 2 MB, 3.5-inch diskettes
available.
Back up all important data before you make changes
to disk drives.
Have a small, flat-blade screwdriver available.
For a list of supported options for the Netfinity
5500-M10, refer to http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat
on the World Wide Web.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
173
Changing Jumper Positions
Jumpers located on the system board and the processor
board help you to customize the way your server operates.
Your system board, processor board, and SCSI backplane
contain two-pin and three-pin jumper blocks.
In some cases, groups of jumpers might combine to define
a function.
Two-Pin Jumper Blocks:
Covering both pins with
a jumper defines one function of the jumper block. To
change the function of the jumper block, cover one pin
only or remove the jumper entirely.
The following illustration identifies pins 1 and 2 on a
two-pin jumper block.
2
1
To change a jumper's position for a two-pin jumper
block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power
cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to Install
Options” on page 246).
3. Do one of the following:
Ÿ Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
Ÿ Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with
the two pins on the pin block, and then slide the
jumper onto these pins.
Ÿ
174
Align one of the holes in the bottom of the
jumper with one of the pins on the pin block, and
then slide the jumper onto that pin only.
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables
(see “Completing the Installation” on page 176).
Three-Pin Jumper Blocks: With the three-pin
jumper blocks, each jumper covers two of the three pins
on a pin block. You can position the jumper to fit over the
center pin and either of the other two pins.
The following illustration identifies pins 1, 2, and 3 on a
three-pin jumper block.
3
2
1
To change a jumper's position for a three-pin jumper
block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power
cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to Install
Options” on page 246).
3. Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
4. Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the
center pin and the pin that was not covered
previously.
5. Slide the jumper fully onto these pins.
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables
(see “Completing the Installation” on page 176).
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
175
Completing the Installation
To complete your installation, you must reinstall the side
and top covers, reconnect all the cables that you
disconnected in “Preparing to Install Options” on
page 246, and, for certain options, run the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Attention
For correct cooling and airflow, install the top cover
before turning on the server. Operating the server for
extended periods of time (over 30 minutes) with the
top cover removed might damage server components.
Installing the Top Cover:
Refer to the following
illustration while you perform the steps in this procedure.
.1/ Thumbscrews
.2/ Top cover
To install the server top cover:
1. Before installing a cover, check that all cables,
adapters, and other components are installed and
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools
or parts inside the server.
2. Lower the cover .2/ with the rear edge of the cover
about 25 mm (1 inch) back from the rear edge of the
server.
3. Slide the cover forward.
4. Tighten the two thumbscrews .1/ on the back edge of
the cover.
176
Netfinity Server HMM
5. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the
server, reconnect the cables; then, plug the power
cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Notes
1. If you are in the United Kingdom and have a
modem or fax machine attached to your
server, reconnect the telephone line after
you plug in the power cords.
2. If necessary, see “Input/Output Connectors
and Expansion Slots” on page 215 for
connector locations.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
177
Installing the Trim Bezels and Server Door:
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Server door
.2/ NetBAY3 bezel
.3/ Media-bay trim bezel
To install the media-bay trim bezel:
1. Insert the two tabs on the top of the media-bay trim
bezel .3/ in the matching holes on the server
chassis.
2. Push the bottom of the bezel toward the server until
the two tabs at the bottom of the bezel snap into
place.
To install the NetBAY3 bezel:
1. Hook the tabs on the left side of the NetBAY3 bezel
.2/ around the posts on the NetBAY3.
2. Gently push the right side of the bezel toward the
server until the bezel snaps into place.
3. Lock the NetBAY3 bezel.
To install the server front door:
1. Align the pins on the server door .1/ with the hinges
on the server and slide the door down.
2. Close and lock the door.
178
Netfinity Server HMM
Reconfiguring the Server: When you start your
server for the first time after you add or remove an internal
option or an external SCSI device, you might see a
message telling you that the configuration has changed.
Some options have device drivers that you need to install.
Refer to the documentation that comes with your option for
information about installing any required device drivers.
If you have installed a new microprocessor, you might
want to upgrade your operating system. If you have
installed or removed hard disk drives, refer to the
“ServeRAID Information” section of this Server Library for
information about reconfiguring your disk arrays.
Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to save the
new configuration information.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
179
Controls and Indicators
The most commonly used controls and indicators on the
front of the server appear in the following illustration.
.1/
Door Lock (On Side Cover, Tower Model Only):
You can lock the door on your server to deter
tampering with the internal components. This same
lock also locks the top cover in place.
.2/
Hard Disk Status Light: Each of the hot-swap
drive bays has a Hard Disk Status light. When this
amber light is on continuously, the drive has failed.
When the light flashes slowly (one flash per
second), the drive is being rebuilt. When the light
flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the
controller is identifying the drive.
.3/
Hard Disk Activity Light: Each of the hot-swap
drive bays has a Hard Disk Activity light. When this
green light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
.4/
CD-ROM Eject/Load Button: Press this button to
eject or retract the CD-ROM tray so that you can
insert or remove a CD.
.5/
CD-ROM Drive In-Use Light: When this light is
on, the CD-ROM drive is being accessed.
.6/
Diskette-Eject Button: Press this button to eject a
diskette from the drive.
.7/
Diskette Drive In-Use Light: When this light is on,
the diskette drive is being accessed.
.8/
Reset Button: Press this button to reset the server
and run the power-on self-test (POST).
180
Netfinity Server HMM
.9/
Power Control Button: Press this button to
manually turn the server on or off.
Caution
The Power Control button on the front of the
server does not turn off the electrical current
supplied to the server. The server also might
have more than one power cord. To remove
all electrical current from the server, ensure
that all power cords are disconnected from the
power source.
The server can be activated in several ways:
Ÿ
You can turn on the server by pressing the
Power Control button on the front of the
server.
Note
If you have just plugged the power cord of
your server into an electrical outlet, you
will have to wait approximately 20 seconds
before pressing the Power Control button.
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the server is activated and a power failure
occurs, the server will start automatically when
power is restored.
The server can also be powered on by the
Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
The server can be deactivated as follows:
Ÿ
You can turn off the server by pressing the
Power Control button on the front of the
server. Pressing the Power Control button
starts an orderly shutdown of the operating
system, if this feature is supported by your
operating system, and places the server in
standby mode.
Note
After turning off the server, wait at least 5
seconds before pressing the Power
Control button to power the server on
again.
Ÿ
You can press and hold the Power Control
button for more than 4 seconds to cause an
immediate shutdown of the server and place
the server in standby mode. This feature can
be used if the operating system hangs.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
181
Ÿ
You can disconnect the server power cords
from the electrical outlets to shut off all power
to the server.
Note
Wait about 15 seconds after disconnecting
the power cord for your system to stop
running. Watch for the System Power
light on the information LED panel to stop
blinking.
.1ð/
Information LED Panel: The lights on this panel
give status information for your server. See
“Information LED Panel” on page 210 for more
information.
182
Netfinity Server HMM
CD-ROM Drive
An IDE CD-ROM drive is a standard feature on your
server. CD-ROM drives can play back or read from a CD,
but cannot write information to it. CD-ROM drives use
industry standard, 12 cm (4.75-inch) CDs.
Follow these guidelines when using a CD-ROM drive:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Do not place the server where the following
conditions exist:
– High temperature
– High humidity
– Excessive dust
– Excessive vibration or sudden shock
– An inclined surface
– Direct sunlight
Do not insert any object other than a CD into the
drive.
Before moving the server, remove the CD from the
drive.
The following illustration shows the front of the CD-ROM
drive.
Emergency-Eject
Hole
CD-ROM Drive
In-Use Light
Handling a CD:
Eject/Load
Button
When handling a CD, follow these
guidelines:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Hold the CD by its edges. Do not touch the surface.
To remove dust or fingerprints, wipe the CD from the
center to the outside with a soft, nonabrasive cloth.
Wiping the CD in a circular direction might cause loss
of data.
Do not write or stick paper on the CD.
Do not scratch or mark the CD.
Do not place or store the CD in direct sunlight.
Do not use benzene, thinners, or other cleaners to
clean the CD.
Do not drop or bend the CD.
Loading a CD:
To load a CD into a CD-ROM drive:
1. Press the Eject/Load button. The tray slides out of
the drive. (Do not manually force the tray open.)
2. Place the CD in the tray with the label facing up.
3. Close the tray by pressing the Eject/Load button, or
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
183
by gently pushing the tray forward. When the tray is
closed, the CD-ROM drive In-Use light on the front of
the drive will activate to indicate that the drive is in
use.
4. To eject the CD, press the Eject/Load button. When
the tray slides out, carefully remove the CD.
5. Close the tray by pressing the Eject/Load button, or
by gently pushing the tray forward.
Note
1. If the tray does not slide out of the drive when
you press the Eject/Load button, insert the
pointed end of a large paper clip into the
emergency-eject hole located on the front of the
CD-ROM drive.
2. In some models, you might have to remove the
front bezel that houses the CD-ROM drive so that
you can access the emergency-eject hole.
184
Netfinity Server HMM
DASD Backplane Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the DASD backplane, do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. To access the cable(s) attached to the DASD
backplane, slide the shuttle to the rear of the system,
see “Shuttle Removal” on page 278.
3. Disconnect the DASD backplane cables.
4. Remove the DASD backplane.
a. Remove the DASD backplane screws .1/, then;
remove the DASD backplane.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
185
Diagnostics Panel LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the
diagnostics panel inside the server. See
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 288 and “Light Path
Diagnostics” on page 30 for information on identifying
problems using these LEDs.
SMI
NMI
PCI1
PCI2
PCI3
MEM
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4
TEMP
VRM
CPU
DASD1
DASD2
PS1
PS2
Speaker
To replace the diagnostics panel LEDs, you must replace
the interior LED and speaker assembly, see “Interior LED
and Speaker Assembly” on page 218.
186
Netfinity Server HMM
External Options
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
options.
Connecting External SCSI Devices:
You can
attach a SCSI storage expansion enclosure to your server.
Cabling Requirements: The ServeRAID controller in
your server has one channel that can be used to attach
external devices.
If you plan to install external SCSI devices, you must order
additional SCSI cables. The cables must have the proper
connectors for the ServeRAID controller and the external
devices.
Refer to the information provided with your adapter to
determine the number of internal and external connectors,
channels, and SCSI devices that the adapter supports.
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable
between the terminated ends of the cable, see ANSI SCSI
Standards:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
X3.131-1986 (SCSI)
X3.131-1994 (SCSI-2)
X3T10/1071D
Adhering to these standards ensures that your server
operates properly.
Setting SCSI IDs for External Devices: Each SCSI
device that is connected to a SCSI controller must have a
unique SCSI ID, so that the SCSI controller can identify
the devices and ensure that different devices do not
attempt to transfer data at the same time. SCSI devices
that are connected to different SCSI controllers can have
duplicate SCSI IDs. See “SCSI IDs” on page 221 and
refer to the instructions that come with the SCSI devices
for more information about setting a SCSI ID.
Installation Procedure: To attach an external
device:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Follow the instructions that come with the option to
prepare it for installation and to connect it to the
server.
Input/Output Ports and Connectors: The
input/output (I/O) connectors are for attaching external
devices, such as printers, keyboards, and displays, to your
server. The I/O connectors on your server include:
Ÿ
Two serial-port connectors
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
187
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
systems management connector
parallel-port connector
video-port connector
keyboard-port connector
auxiliary-device-port connector
Ethernet-port connector
USB-port connectors
See the illustration in “Input/Output Connectors and
Expansion Slots” on page 215 for the locations of the
connectors.
Serial Ports: Your server comes with two serial ports.
(See “Input/Output Connectors and Expansion Slots” on
page 215 for the locations of the connectors.) These ports
are used to communicate with printers, plotters, external
modems, scanners, and auxiliary terminals. These ports
also enable you to transfer data between computers.
Serial ports can transfer data asynchronously, which
means that they can transmit any number of characters at
any time, with no restriction on the duration of the pauses
between characters.
The serial ports can transmit and receive data and
commands at rates of from 300 bits per second up to
115 000 bits per second.
Serial port A is shared by the operating system and the
integrated Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. Serial port B can be used only by the
operating system.
Each serial port has a 9-pin, male D-shell connector on the
back of the server. The pin-number assignments of this
connector conform to the industry standard.
5
1
6
9
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the serial-port connectors.
Table 1. Serial Port Pin-Number Assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Data carrier detect
Receive data
Transmit data
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
6
7
8
9
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
When you turn on your server, the POST routine assigns
the serial ports to specific communication port addresses.
Some application programs use only certain ports, and
some modems are designed for use only at certain
188
Netfinity Server HMM
communication port addresses. You might need to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change
communication port address assignments to resolve
conflicts.
Management Port C: Your server has a dedicated
system-management I/O port. This port can be used to
attach a modem that is dedicated to communication with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor.
The connector on the back of the server and the
pin-number assignments are the same as for the serial
ports.
Parallel Port: The parallel port usually is used to
communicate with printers, and transfers data one byte at
a time. The parallel port has a 25-pin, female D-shell
connector on the back of your server. It support three
standard IEEE 1284 modes of operation: Standard
Parallel Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and
Extended Capability Port (ECP). (See “Input/Output
Connectors and Expansion Slots” on page 215 for the
location of the connector.)
1
13
25
14
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the parallel-port connector.
Table 2. Parallel Port Pin-Number Assignments
Pin
I/O
SPP/ECP Signal
EPP Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
-
−STROBE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
BUSY
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−AUTO FD (feed)
−ERROR
−INIT
−SLCT IN
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
−WRITE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
−WAIT
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−DSTRB
−ERROR
−INIT
−ASTRB
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
189
When you turn on your server, the POST routine assigns
the parallel port a specific port address. You can change
the parallel-port assignment by using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Video Port: The system board in your server has one
SVGA video port. This port is used to attach a video
monitor. The video port has a 15-pin analog connector on
the back of the server. (See “Input/Output Connectors and
Expansion Slots” on page 215 for the location of the
connector.)
5
1
15
11
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the video connector.
Table 3. Video Port Pin-Number Assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Red
Green or monochrome
Blue
Monitor ID bit 2
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
+5 V
Ground
Monitor ID bit 0
DDC SDA
Horizontal synchronization (Hsync)
Vertical synchronization (Vsync)
DDC SDL
Keyboard and Auxiliary-Device Ports: The system
board has one keyboard port and one auxiliary-device port
that supports a mouse or other pointing device. (See
“Input/Output Connectors and Expansion Slots” on
page 215 for the locations of the connectors.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the connectors used by the keyboard and auxiliary-device
ports.
190
Netfinity Server HMM
Table 4. Keyboard and Auxiliary-Device Port
Pin-Number Assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data
Not connected
Ground
+5 V dc
Clock
Not connected
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
191
Ethernet Port: The system board in your Netfinity
5500-M10 contains an Ethernet controller. The controller
has an external RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server
that is used with a category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) cable. The connector enables an
Ethernet network to attach to the internal transceiver in
your server.
Note
The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that
the cabling in the network be Category 5 or higher.
See “Configuring the Ethernet Controller” on page 20 for
additional information about the Ethernet controller.
Table 5 shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45
connector. These assignments apply to both 10BASE-T
and 100BASE-TX devices.
10BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX
UTP Cable
1
2
Pins
RJ-45 Modular Plug Connector
3
6
Table 5. Ethernet Connector Pin-Number
Assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
Transmit data+
Transmit data−
Receive data+
Reserved
5
6
7
8
Reserved
Receive data−
Reserved
Reserved
Universal Serial Bus Ports: The system board in
your Netfinity 5500-M10 contains two universal serial bus
(USB) ports. Each USB port has an external connector on
the rear on the server for attaching devices that previously
used serial, parallel, keyboard, mouse, and game ports.
USB is an emerging serial interface standard for telephony
and multimedia devices. USB technology uses Plug and
Play to determine what device is attached to the
connector. Each USB device is accessed by a unique
USB address. A device called a hub is used to convert the
USB port into multiple attachment points. A hub has
multiple ports where peripherals can be attached. USB
provides 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) bandwidth with a
maximum of 63 peripherals and a maximum signal
distance of five meters (16 ft.) per segment.
192
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
If more than one USB device is to be attached, then
the device must be connected to a hub.
Table 6 shows the pin-number assignments for the USB
connectors.
Table 6. USB Connector Pin-Number Assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
VCC
−Data
+Data
Ground
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
193
Front Bezel Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the front bezel, do the following:
1. Remove the top cover, see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286.
2. Remove the information panel cover, see “Information
Panel Cover Removal” on page 212.
3. Remove the door and trim bezel, see “Server Door
and Trim Bezels Removal on the Tower Model” on
page 277.
4. Remove the side covers, see “Side Cover(s)
Removal” on page 279.
5. Remove the front bezel.
a. While releasing the top and side bezel tabs,
rotate the left side of the bezel away from the
system.
194
Netfinity Server HMM
Hot-Plug PCI Adapter Installation
Use the following information for installing a hot-plug PCI
adapter. If you want to remove a hot-plug adapter, reverse
the steps. If your operating system supports hot-replace
PCI adapters, you can replace a failing hot-plug PCI
adapter with a new adapter of the same type without
turning off power to the server. If your operating system
and adapter also support the hot-add feature, you can
install a new adapter without turning off the power to the
server.
Note
You do not need to turn the server off to install or
remove a hot-plug PCI adapter.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
adapter for any special requirements or
restrictions.
Read the documentation that comes with your
operating system.
Attention
Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing
the operating-system-defined procedure for disabling
the hot-plug PCI slot that contains the adapter.
Failure to do so might cause your system to lock up.
Refer to your operating system documentation.
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
195
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
196
Tab
Adapter retention latch
Expansion-slot cover
Attention light
Power light
Plastic divider
Netfinity Server HMM
.1/
.2/
.7/
.8/
Tab
Adapter retention latch
Adapter
Adapter retention latch
To install a hot-plug PCI adapter:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the
adapter.
Note
Only PCI slots 1–4 can be used for hot-plug PCI
adapters.
3. Disable the selected PCI slot from your operating
system. (Refer to the documentation that comes with
your operating system for information about disabling
a hot-plug PCI slot.) Disabling the PCI slot turns off
the Power light for that PCI slot.
Attention
Make sure the Power light .5/ for the hot-plug
PCI slot is off before you continue to the next
step.
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover .3/:
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch .2/
counterclockwise.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
197
b. Lift the tab .1/ covering the top of the
expansion-slot cover .3/ and remove
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in
a safe place for future use.
Attention
Expansion-slot covers must be installed on
all vacant slots. This maintains the
electromagnetic emissions characteristics of
the system and ensures proper cooling of
system components.
5. Refer to the documentation that comes with your
adapter for any cabling instructions. It might be
easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective
package.
Note
Avoid touching the components and gold-edge
connectors on the adapter.
7. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat,
static-protective surface.
8. Install the adapter .7/:
a. Carefully grasp the adapter .7/ by its top edge
or upper corners, and align it with the expansion
slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention
When you install an adapter in the server,
be sure that it is completely and correctly
seated in the system-board connector.
Incomplete insertion might cause damage to
the system board or the adapter.
c. Lower the tab .1/ over the tab on the top corner
of adapter. Rotate the adapter retention latch
.2/ clockwise until it snaps into place.
Note
The expansion slot also has an adapter
retention latch .8/ at the end of the slot
toward the middle of the server. To remove
the adapter, you need to push this adapter
retention latch .8/ away from the adapter
until the top edge of the adapter is past the
latch.
9. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
10. Enable the PCI slot from your operating system.
(Refer to the documentation that comes with your
operating system for information about enabling a
198
Netfinity Server HMM
hot-plug PCI slot.) Make sure that the Power light
.5/ for the hot-plug PCI slot is on.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the Installation” on
page 176.
Installing a Non-Hot-Plug Adapter Use the
following procedures for installing a non-hot-plug adapter.
If you want to remove a non-hot-plug adapter, reverse the
steps.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
option.
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
Expansion-slot cover screw
Expansion-slot cover
Adapter
Adapter retention latch
To install a non-hot-plug adapter:
.
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
199
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the
adapter.
Note
Check the instructions that come with the adapter
for any requirements or restrictions.
3. Remove the expansion-slot cover .2/:
Ÿ If you are installing an adapter in PCI slot 1, 2,
3, or 4:
a. See the illustration in “Hot-Plug PCI Adapter
Installation” on page 195 for operation of
the adapter retention latch on the end of the
slot near the rear of the server.
b. Rotate the adapter retention latch
counterclockwise.
c. Lift the tab covering the top of the
expansion-slot cover and remove
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store
it in a safe place for future use.
Ÿ If you are installing an adapter in PCI slot 5 or 6
or in the ISA slot:
a. Remove the screw .1/ on the top of the
expansion-slot cover .2/.
b. Slide the expansion-slot cover out of the
server.
c. Store these items in a safe place for future
use.
Attention
Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all
vacant slots. This maintains the electromagnetic
emissions characteristics of the system and
ensures proper cooling of system components.
4. Refer to the documentation that comes with your
adapter for any cabling instructions. It might be
easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
5. Remove the adapter from the static-protective
package.
Note
Avoid touching the components and gold-edge
connectors on the adapter.
6. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat,
static-protective surface.
7. Set any jumpers or switches as described by the
adapter manufacturer.
8. Install the adapter:
200
Netfinity Server HMM
a. Carefully grasp the adapter .3/ by its top edge
or upper corners, and align it with the expansion
slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention
When you install an adapter in the server,
be sure that it is completely and correctly
seated in the system-board connector before
you apply power. Incomplete insertion might
cause damage to the system board or the
adapter.
9. If you are installing an adapter in PCI slots 1, 2, 3, or
4:
a. Refer to the illustration in “Hot-Plug PCI Adapter
Installation” on page 195 for operation of the
adapter retention latch on the end of the slot
near the rear of the server.
b. Lower the tab on the adapter guide over the tab
on the top corner of the adapter. Rotate the
adapter retention latch clockwise until it snaps
into place.
If you are installing an adapter in PCI slots 5 or 6 or
in the ISA slot:
a. Align the rounded notch in the retaining bracket
with the threaded hole in the expansion-slot
frame. The retaining bracket on the adapter fits
into the space that was occupied by the
expansion-slot cover.
b. Insert the expansion-slot screw .3/ that you
removed earlier into the threaded hole, and push
the rounded notch up against the screw.
c. Tighten the expansion-slot screw firmly.
Note
The expansion slot also has an adapter
retention latch .4/ at the end of the slot
toward the middle of the server. To remove
the adapter, you need to push this adapter
retention latch .4/ away from the adapter
until the top edge of the adapter is past the
latch.
.
10. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the Installation” on
page 176.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
201
Verifying Compatibility between Network
Adapters and Device Drivers: Your server
supports several types of network adapters. If you are
having trouble with the installation or operation of a
network adapter or network operating system, ensure that
the network-adapter device driver supports dual
processors. Refer to your network-adapter documentation
for additional information about adapter compatibility
requirements.
Hot-Swap Power Supply Installation
Your server comes with one power supply. You can add a
second power supply to provide redundant power. After
you install a power supply, check the power-supply status
indicators to verify that the power supply is operating
properly. See “Power Supplies” on page 250 for details.
Caution
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any
part (power backplane and AC box) that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are
present inside the power supplies, power backplane,
and AC box. There are no serviceable parts inside the
power supplies, power backplane, or AC box.
202
Netfinity Server HMM
Refer to the following illustration while performing the steps
in this procedure.
Note
You do not need to turn off the power to the server to
install hot-swap power supplies.
9
9
.1/ Power cord connector for power supply 2
.2/ Screws
.3/ Filler panel
.4/ Power supply
.5/ Handle
.6/ Power switch on power supply
.7/ AC Power light
.8/ DC Power light
.9/ Holes for shipping screws
.1ð/ Power-cord strain-relief bracket
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
203
To add a power supply:
Caution
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any
part (power backplane and AC box) that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are
present inside the power supplies, power backplane,
and AC box. There are no serviceable parts inside the
power supplies, power backplane, or AC box.
Note
It is not necessary to turn the Power switch on the
power supply off when you are installing a power
supply.
1. Remove the filler panel .3/:
a. Remove the four screws .2/ from the filler panel.
b. Remove the filler panel .3/ from the
power-supply bay and save it and the four
screws you removed for future use.
Note
During normal operation, each power-supply
bay should have either a power supply or
filler panel installed for proper cooling.
2. Place the handle .5/ on the power supply in the open
position, and slide the power supply into the chassis.
3. Gently close the handle .5/ on the power supply to
seat the power supply in the bay.
4. Plug the power cord for the added power supply into
power cord connector .1/.
Caution
When the power-cord strain-relief bracket option
is installed on the power cord, the server must be
plugged to a power source that is easily
accessible.
5. Install a power-cord strain-relief bracket .1ð/, if
desired.
6. Plug the power cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
204
Netfinity Server HMM
7. Make sure the Power switch .6/ on the power supply
is in the On position.
8. Verify that the DC Power light .8/ and AC Power light
.7/ on the power supply are lit, indicating that the
power supply is operating correctly.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
205
Hot-Swap Power Supply Removal
Your server comes with one power supply. You can add a
second power supply to provide redundant power. Each
power supply has two status indicators; see “Power
Supplies” on page 250 for information about the status
indicators.
Attention
You cannot hot swap a power supply if your server
has only one power supply installed.
Refer to the illustration in “Hot-Swap Power Supply
Installation” on page 202 while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
To remove a hot-swap power supply:
Caution
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any
part (power backplane and AC box) that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are
present inside the power supplies, power backplane,
and AC box. There are no serviceable parts inside the
power supplies, power backplane, or AC box.
1. If your server has only one power supply installed,
turn off the server and peripheral devices (see
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246);
otherwise, go to the next step.
Attention
Before removing a functional power supply, set
the Power switch on the power supply to the Off
position.
2. Set the Power switch on the power supply that you
are removing to the Off position.
3. Remove the power supply .4/:
a. Remove the shipping screws .9/ from the power
supply, if they have not already been removed.
206
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. You do not need to replace the
shipping screws.
2. Your server might use a different
handle and a blue thumbscrew instead
of the handle and shipping screws
shown in the illustration.
b. Remove the power-cord strain-relief bracket
.1ð/, if one is installed.
c. Grasp the handle .5/ on the power supply and
pull the handle toward the center of the server;
then, slide the power supply out of the chassis.
Note
During normal operation, each power-supply
bay should have either a power supply or
filler panel installed for proper cooling.
4. If you are not installing a replacement power supply:
a. Disconnect the power cord for the power supply
that you replaced.
b. Install a power-supply filler panel; then go to step
5.
If you are replacing the power supply:
a. Place the handle .5/ on the power supply in the
open position, and slide the power supply into
the chassis.
b. Gently close the handle .5/ on the power supply
to seat the power supply in the bay.
c. Make sure the Power switch .6/on the power
supply is in the On position.
d. Verify that the AC Power light .7/ and DC Power
light .8/ are lit, indicating that the power supply
is operating correctly.
Caution
When the power-cord strain-relief bracket
option is installed on the power cord, the
server must be plugged to a power source
that is easily accessible.
e. Install a power-cord strain-relief bracket .1ð/, if
desired.
5. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the Installation” on
page 176.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
207
Hot-Swap Fan Assembly Replacement
Your server comes with three hot-swap fan assemblies.
Attention
Replace a fan that has failed within 48 hours to help
ensure proper cooling.
Note
You do not need to turn off the power to the server to
replace a hot-swap fan assembly.
The following illustration shows the replacement of a
hot-swap fan assembly. Refer to this illustration while
performing the steps in this procedure.
3
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
208
Fan power cables
Hot-swap fan assembly 2
Hot-swap fan assembly 1
Tabs
Hot-swap fan assembly 3
Quarter-turn fasteners
Netfinity Server HMM
To replace a hot-swap fan assembly:
Caution
The power cable to the fan should be disconnected
whenever the fan assembly is not installed in the
server; otherwise, the fan might start turning while you
are holding it and the fan blades could injure your
fingers.
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
Attention
To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove
the top cover for more than 30 minutes during
this procedure.
2. Determine which fan assembly (.2/, .3/, or .5/)
needs to be replaced by checking the fan LEDs on
the diagnostic panel (see “Diagnostics Panel LEDs”
on page 186).
3. Disconnect the fan power cable .1/ from the fan
assembly that you are replacing.
4. Turn the quarter-turn fastener .6/ for the fan
assembly one quarter turn and remove the fan
assembly from the server.
5. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server.
(If you are replacing fan assembly 1 .3/, make sure
the tabs .4/ fit into the slots at the bottom of the fan
opening in the server.)
6. When you have the fan assembly correctly seated,
turn the quarter-turn fastener .6/ one quarter turn to
secure the fan in the server.
7. Connect the fan power cable .1/ to the power
connector.
8. Replace the top cover (see “Installing the Top Cover”
on page 176).
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
209
Information LED Panel
The information LED panel on the front of the server
contains status lights.
OK
1
2
100 LINK TX
MB OK
RX
.1/
System Error Light: This amber light is on when a
system error occurs. A light on the diagnostics LED
panel will also be on to further isolate the error.
(For more information, see “Status LEDs” on
page 52.)
.2/
Processor 2 Activity Light: This green light is on
when there is activity on microprocessor 2 (the
secondary microprocessor).
.3/
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity Light: When
this green light is on, there is transmit or receive
activity to or from the server.
.4/
Ethernet Link Status Light: When this green light
is on, there is an active connection on the Ethernet
port.
.5/
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps: When this green light
is on, the Ethernet speed is 100 Mbps.
.6/
Processor 1 Activity Light: This green light is on
when there is activity on microprocessor 1 (the
primary microprocessor).
.7/
System Power Light: When this green light is on,
system power is present in the server. When this
light flashes, the server is in standby mode (the
system power supply is turned off and AC current is
present). When this light is off, either a power
supply, AC power, or a light has failed.
210
Netfinity Server HMM
Attention
If this light is off, it does not mean there is no
electrical current present in the server. The
light might be burned out. To remove all
electrical current from the server, you must
unplug the server power cords from the
electrical outlets.
.8/
System POST Complete Light: This green light is
on when the power-on self-test (POST) completes
without any errors.
.9/
SCSI Hard Disk Drive Activity Light: This green
light is on when there is activity on a hard disk
drive.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
211
Information Panel Cover Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the information-panel cover, do the following:
1. Remove the door, see “Server Door and Trim Bezels
Removal on the Tower Model” on page 277.
2. Remove the information-panel cover.
a. Place your fingers inside the right side of the
cover
b. Move the end of the cover away from the right
side of server until the latch tab .1/ on the cover
is released from the slot on the side of the
server.
c. Lift up on the cover and pivot the right side of
the cover away from the front of the server.
d. Move the cover to the left to release the left latch
tab .2/ and remove the cover from the server.
212
Netfinity Server HMM
Information Panel LED Assembly
Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the information panel LED assembly, do the
following:
1. Remove the server door and trim bezels, see “Server
Door and Trim Bezels Removal on the Tower Model”
on page 277.
2. Remove the top cover, see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286.
3. Remove the side covers, see “Side Cover(s)
Removal” on page 279.
4. Remove the door assembly, see “Server Door and
Trim Bezels Removal on the Tower Model” on
page 277.
5. Remove the information panel cover, see “Information
Panel Cover Removal” on page 212.
6. Disconnect the information panel LED assembly
cables.
7. Remove the information panel LED assembly.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
213
a. Remove the information panel LED assembly
screws, then; remove the assembly.
214
Netfinity Server HMM
Input/Output Connectors and
Expansion Slots
The following illustration shows the expansion slots and
the input/output connectors (ports) on the rear of the
server.
.1/
PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has six
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) expansion
slots. Four of the PCI slots support hot-plug PCI
adapters.
Many adapters provide bus-master capabilities,
which enable the adapters to perform operations
without interrupting the system microprocessors.
.2/
ISA Expansion Slot: Your server has one industry
standard architecture (ISA) expansion slot.
Many adapters provide bus-master capabilities,
which enable the adapters to perform operations
without interrupting the system microprocessors.
.3/
Parallel Connector: A signal cable for a parallel
device, such as a printer, connects here.
.4/
Serial A Connector: A serial signal cable for a
modem or other serial device connects to this 9-pin
serial connector. Serial port A can be shared by
the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor and the operating system. See “Devices
and I/O Ports” on page 57 for port assignment
information. If you are using a 25-pin signal cable,
you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter cable.
.5/
Attention Lights for Hot-Plug PCI Slots: Each
hot-plug PCI slot has an Attention light that is
visible from the rear of the server. An Attention
light flashes approximately once per second when it
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
215
is on. The meaning of the Attention lights is
defined by your operating system. Refer to your
operating system documentation to determine if it
supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if so, what the
Attention lights indicate.
.6/
Serial B Connector: A serial signal cable for a
modem or other serial device connects to this 9-pin
serial connector. Serial port B is used by the
operating system and cannot be shared by the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor.
See “Devices and I/O Ports” on page 57 for port
assignment information. If you are using a 25-pin
signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter
cable.
.7/
Video Connector: The monitor signal cable
connects here.
.8/
Power Supply 1 Power Connector: The power
cord for power supply 1 connects here. (The power
connector for an additional optional power supply is
covered by the filler panel.
.9/
NetBAY3: The tower model of the Netfinity
5500-M10 comes with a NetBAY3 attached. You
can install devices, such as the IBM EXP10 or a
power distribution unit, in the NetBAY3. Refer to
“Installing Devices in the NetBAY3” for more
information.
.1ð/
Management C Connector: This connector is
used to attach a modem that is dedicated to
communication with the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor.
.11/
Universal Serial Bus 2 Connector: You can
attach an I/O device to this universal serial bus
(USB) connector. You need a 4-pin cable to
connect devices to USB 1 or 2.
Note
If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached
to the keyboard port, the USB ports are
disabled while the power-on self-test (POST) is
running and no USB devices will work during
POST.
.12/
Universal Serial Bus 1 Connector: You can
attach an I/O device to this universal serial bus
(USB) connector. You need a 4-pin cable to
connect devices to USB 1 or 2.
216
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached
to the keyboard port, the USB ports are
disabled while the power-on self-test (POST) is
running and no USB devices will work during
POST.
.13/
Power Supply 1: Your server comes with one
hot-swap power supply installed. See “Power
Supplies” on page 250 for more information about
power supplies.
.14/
Keyboard Connector: The keyboard cable
connects here.
.15/
Ethernet Connector: Your server has one RJ-45
Ethernet connector. This connector is for attaching
the network cable to the integrated 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, twisted-pair transceiver.
.16/
Mouse Connector: The mouse cable connects
here. This port sometimes is called an
auxiliary-device or pointing-device port.
.17/
External Connector Knockouts: Your server has
three external connector knockouts that can be
used when you install options, such as the external
SCSI cable option.
Note
For pin assignments and other details about these
connectors, see “External Options” on page 187.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
217
Interior LED and Speaker Assembly
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the interior LED and speaker assembly
(diagnostic LEDs), do the following:
1. Remove the top cover, see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286
2. Disconnect the cables attached to interior LED and
speaker assembly.
3. Remove the interior LED and speaker assembly.
a. Remove the interior LED and speaker assembly
mounting screws. then; remove the interior LED
and speaker assembly.
218
Netfinity Server HMM
Internal Drives Installation
Different types of drives allow your system to read multiple
types of media and store more data. Several types of
drives are available, such as:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Diskette
Hard disk
CD-ROM
Tape
Internal Drive Bays:
Internal drives are installed in
bays. Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
diskette drive and one CD-ROM drive.
.1/ Bay 1
.2/ Bay 2
.3/ Bay 3
.4/ Bay 4
.5/ Bay 5
.6/ Bay 6
.7/ Hot-swap bays
.8/ Removable-media bays
.9/ Bay B
.1ð/ Bay A
.11/ CD-ROM drive bay
.12/ Diskette drive bay
Your server contains hardware that lets you replace a
failed hard disk drive without turning off the server.
Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to
operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or
installed. These drives are known as hot-swappable
drives. They are also referred to as hot-swap drives.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
219
Each hot-swap drive bay has two indicator lights on the
front of the server (see “Information LED Panel” on
page 210). If the amber Hard Disk Status light for a drive
is lit continuously, that individual drive is faulty and needs
to be replaced. When the Hard Disk Status light indicates
a drive fault, you can replace a hot-swap drive without
turning off the server.
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must have a
hot-swap-drive tray attached. The drive must have a
single connector attachment (SCA) connector.
Hot-swap-drive trays come with the hot-swap drives.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Your server comes with a preinstalled 3.5-inch,
1.44 MB diskette drive and a preinstalled IDE
CD-ROM drive.
Bays A and B come without a device installed. These
bays are for 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media
drives, such as tape backup drives. Bays A and B
can be combined into a single full-high bay.
The Netfinity 5500-M10 supports only one diskette
drive.
Your server does not support hard disk drives in bays
A and B because of cooling considerations.
Note
The server's EMI integrity and cooling are both
protected by having the left front bays
(removable-media bays) covered or occupied.
When you install a drive, save the filler panel
from the bay, in case you later remove the drive
and do not replace it with another.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are installing a device with a 50-pin connector
in one of the removable-media bays (bays A–B), you
need a 68-pin to 50-pin converter.
Your server supports six slim (1-inch) or three
half-high (1.6-inch), 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk
drives in the hot-swap bays.
The hot-swap bays connect to a SCSI backplane.
This backplane is the printed circuit board behind the
bay. The backplane supports up to six hard disk
drives.
The diskette drive uses 1 MB and 2 MB diskettes.
For optimum use, format 1 MB diskettes to 720 KB
and format 2 MB diskettes to 1.44 MB.
SCSI Drives: Some drives have a special design
called small computer system interface, or SCSI. This
design allows you to attach multiple drives to a single
SCSI channel.
220
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. Any information about SCSI drives also applies to
other SCSI devices, such as tape drives.
2. If you plan to install both internal and external
SCSI devices, you must follow the instructions in
“External Options” on page 187, in addition to
these instructions.
A 16-bit (wide) SCSI cable connects the hot-swap
backplane to one channel of the integrated RAID SCSI
controller on the system board. An additional 16-bit SCSI
cable with connectors for optional devices in bays A and B
connects to the second channel of the RAID controller.
This cable has a terminator at the other end and is folded
and restrained with a cable clamp to the bottom of your
server between the open bays and the power supply area.
SCSI IDs: Each SCSI device that is connected to an
individual channel of the RAID controller needs a unique
identification (ID) so that the controller can identify the
devices and ensure that different devices do not attempt to
transfer data at the same time. (The two channels of the
integrated RAID controller operate independently.) If you
need to set IDs for SCSI devices, refer to the instructions
that come with those devices.
Your server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard
disk drives, according to the jumper settings on the SCSI
backplanes. The server uses the hard disk drive SCSI IDs
to send status information to the indicator lights above
each hot-swap bay.
The SCSI backplane in the server supports up to six
hot-swap bays. Table 7 shows the default SCSI IDs that
the backplane assigns for hot-swap hard disk drives.
Table 7. Automatically Assigned SCSI IDs
Bay
1
2
3
4
5
6
ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
Note: The default SCSI ID for the SCSI backplane is 15. The default
SCSI ID for each channel of the RAID controller is 7.
You can change the default ID addresses of the drives by
changing the jumper settings on the SCSI backplane. See
“SCSI Backplane Option Jumpers” on page 275. A
simplified layout of the SCSI backplane is shown in “SCSI
Backplane Component Locations” on page 274.
The processing sequence for SCSI devices is set through
the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. The
sequence proceeds from the lowest SCSI ID to the highest
(0 to 6, then 8 to 15).
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
221
Termination (Internal SCSI Devices): SCSI buses
must be terminated at each end. The ends of the SCSI
buses in your server are already terminated.
All the hot-swap drives in your server have automatic
termination and the RAID controller provides termination at
the other end of the SCSI bus.
If you install SCSI devices in the removable-media bays
(bays A and B), you must disable the termination on the
devices; the RAID controller is already terminated and the
SCSI cable for devices in the removable-media drive bays
has a terminator at the other end. For example, when you
install a SCSI device in a removable-media drive bay (bay
A or B), set its termination to Disable, because the SCSI
cable is already terminated at the end.
Refer to the information that come with the SCSI device for
instructions about setting device jumpers or switches that
control termination.
Preinstallation Steps (All Bays):
Before you
install drives in your server, verify that you have all the
cables and any other equipment specified in the
documentation that comes with the internal drive. You
might also need to perform certain preinstallation activities.
Some of the steps are required only during the initial
installation of an option.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with the
internal drive.
1. Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive.
2. Check the instructions that come with the drive to see
if you need to set any switches or jumpers on the
drive.
3. To install the drive, go to “Installing a 5.25-inch
Removable-Media Drive” or “Installing a Drive in a
Hot-Swap Bay” on page 226.
Installing a 5.25-inch Removable-Media
Drive
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
222
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
drive.
Prepare the drive for installation (see
“Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)”).
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
The server's EMI integrity and cooling are both
protected by having the left front bays covered or
occupied. When you install a drive, save the filler
panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive
and do not replace it with another.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
223
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
224
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
Screws for filler panel
Filler panel with EMI shield
Slide rails
Screws for slide rails
Drive
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
Drive
SCSI cable for the removable-media drive bays
Shuttle
Thumbscrews
Netfinity Server HMM
To install a removable-media drive in one of the left
front bays:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices (see
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246) and
remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Remove the NetBAY3 bezel and the media-bay trim
bezel. (See “Server Door and Trim Bezels Removal
on the Tower Model” on page 277.)
3. Remove the screws .1/ and filler panel .2/ from the
bay opening. Save screws for later use in this
procedure. You do not need the filler panel when you
have a drive installed in the bay.
4. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then,
remove the drive from the bag and place it on a
static-protective surface.
5. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to
the documentation that comes with the drive.
6. Use screws .4/ of the appropriate size and length to
attach a slide rail .3/ to each side of the drive .5/.
Note
The slide rails and screws are included in the
drive accessory kit that comes with your server.
7. Place the drive so that the slide rails engage in the
bay guide rails. Push the drive into the bay and
attach it with the two screws .1/ from the filler panel.
8. Loosen the four thumbscrews .8/ on the shuttle at
the back of the server.
9. Pull the shuttle .7/ toward the back of the server.
10. Connect one of the connectors on the SCSI cable for
the removable-media drive bays .6/ to the back of
the drive .5/.
11. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive.
Power cables for removable-media drives come
installed in your server. The connectors are keyed
and can be inserted only one way.
12. If you are installing another 5.25-inch drive, do so at
this time. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
13. Push the shuttle .7/ toward the front of the server
and tighten the four thumbscrews .8/ at the back of
the shuttle.
14. Install the media-bay trim bezel and the NetBAY3
bezel that you removed earlier. (See “Installing the
Trim Bezels and Server Door” on page 178.)
15. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the Installation” on
page 176.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
225
Installing a Drive in a Hot-Swap Bay:
The
bays on the right front of the server support hot-swap
drives only.
Note
You do not have to turn off the server to install
hot-swap drives in these bays. However, you must
turn off the server when performing any steps that
involve installing or removing cables.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
drive.
Reviewed the “ServeRAID Information” section of
this Server Library for information about the RAID
controller and disk-array configuration.
Prepare the drive for installation (see
“Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)” on page 222).
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Filler panel
.2/ Hot-swap hard disk drive
.3/ Drive tray handle (open position)
226
Netfinity Server HMM
To install a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1. Unlock and open the server door (see “Preparing to
Install Options” on page 246).
Attention
To maintain proper system cooling, do not
operate the server for more than two minutes
without either a drive or a filler panel installed for
each bay.
2. Remove the filler panel .1/ from one of the empty
hot-swap bays by inserting your finger into the
depression at the left side of the filler panel and
pulling it away from the server.
3. Install the hard disk drive .2/ in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle .3/ is open (that is,
perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages
the guide rails in the bay.
c. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until
the drive connects to the backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
4. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify
that the hard disk drives are operating properly. See
“Status LEDs” on page 52 for details.
5. Close and lock the server door.
Note
Because your server has a RAID controller, you
must reconfigure your disk arrays after installing
hard disk drives.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
227
Replacing a Drive in a Hot-Swap Bay: You
do not have to turn off the server to remove a drive from
the hot-swap bays.
Attention
1. Before you remove from a hot-swap bay a hard
disk drive that is not defective, back up all
important data.
2. To avoid damage to a hard disk drive, DO NOT
remove the drive from the hot-swap bay until it
has had time to spin down (approximately 30
seconds). Handle the drive carefully.
Before you attempt to remove a defective drive, thoroughly
review the information that appears on your server screen
to determine the location of the failed drive. The
“ServeRAID Information” section of this Server Library
explains the status codes that your server uses to indicate
a defective drive. Also, if the amber Hard Disk Status light
for a drive is lit continuously, that individual drive is faulty
and needs to be replaced. If you remove a hard disk drive
that is not defective from an array that already has a
defective hard disk drive, all data in the array will be lost.
This situation is especially relevant if you assigned RAID
level 1 or 5 to the logical drives in your disk array.
However, the RAID controller can rebuild the data that you
need, provided that certain conditions are met. Refer to
the “ServeRAID Information” section of this Server Library
for further details.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
228
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
drive.
Review the “ServeRAID Information” section of
this Server Library for information about the
ServeRAID controller and disk-array
configuration.
Prepare the drive for installation (see
“Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)” on page 222).
Netfinity Server HMM
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Hard disk drive
.2/ Drive tray handle (open position)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
229
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
230
Screws for half-high drive
Screw holes for slim-high drive
Drive tray
Drive
Connector for half-high drive
Screws for half-high drive connector
Netfinity Server HMM
To replace a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1. Unlock and open the server door (see “Preparing to
Install Options” on page 246).
Attention
To maintain proper system cooling, do not
operate the server for more than two minutes
without either a drive or a filler panel installed for
each bay.
2. Remove the defective hard disk drive .1/ by placing
the handle .2/ on the drive to the open position
(perpendicular to the drive) and pulling the hot-swap
tray from the bay.
3. Remove the hard disk drive from the tray:
a. If the drive is a half-high drive, remove the two
screws .8/ that hold the connector .7/ to the
hot-swap tray.5/; then, remove the connector
from the back of the drive.
b. Remove the four screws .3/ (for a half-high
drive) or .4/ (for a slim-high drive) that attach
the drive .6/ to the hot-swap tray, and remove
the drive from the tray.
4. Place the new hard disk drive on the hot-swap tray
and attach the drive to the tray using four screws, as
follows:
a. If the drive is a half-high drive, use screws .3/ to
attach the drive to the tray. If the drive is a
slim-high drive, use screws in holes .4/ to attach
the drive to the tray.
b. As you tighten each screw, press on the metal
spring nearest the screw at the point indicated
by the arrow on the illustration of the drive tray.
c. If the drive is a half-high drive, plug the
connector .7/ to the back of the drive and
secure the connector to the drive with screws
.8/. (Slim-high drives do not need the
connector.)
5. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle is open (that is,
perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages
the guide rails in the bay.
c. Push the drive assembly into the bay until the
drive connects to the backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify
that the hard disk drive is installed properly. See
“Status LEDs” on page 52 for details.
7. Close and lock the server door.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
231
Installing Devices in the NetBAY3
Use the following information for installing devices in the
NetBAY3.
Note
The illustrations in this appendix do not show the
server on top of the NetBAY3, however, you do not
need to remove the NetBAY3 to install devices.
General Considerations:
You can install three
types of devices in the NetBAY3:
Devices, such as the IBM EXP10, that sit on side rails
Cantilevered devices, such as a power distribution
unit (PDU), that are screwed to the front or rear of the
NetBAY3
Devices that sit on the NetBAY3 base plate
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Notes
1. To allow the NetBAY3 front bezel to close,
devices with handles must not protrude out more
than 56 cm (2.2 in.). The following illustration of
the front bezel top-view cross section shows the
clearances.
2. All device cables must exit from the rear of the
NetBAY3.
56 mm (2.2 in.)
30 mm (1.2 in.)
232
Netfinity Server HMM
Removing the Rear Panel
Note
Do not remove the rear panel if you are not installing
a device in the NetBAY3.
1. Remove the NetBAY3 rear panel.
a. Remove the four screws.
b. Lift the rear panel off.
2. After you remove the rear panel, do one of the
following:
Ÿ Install a device on rails in the NetBAY3. (Go to
“Installing Devices on Side Rails.”)
Ÿ Install a cantilevered device in the NetBAY3.
(Go to “Installing Cantilevered Devices” on
page 235.)
Ÿ Install a device on the NetBAY3 base plate. (Go
to “Installing Devices on the NetBAY3 Base
Plate” on page 236.)
Installing Devices on Side Rails: Installing
devices that sit on side rails in a NetBAY3 is similar to
installing these devices in a rack enclosure. The device
side rails must be screwed to the NetBAY3 vertical
mounting rails. Follow the instructions in the
documentation that comes with the device and use the
following illustrations as a guide.
If you need to remove or move the cage nuts at the rear of
the NetBAY3 to hold the rails, go to “Removing Cage Nuts”
on page 234.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
233
Removing Cage Nuts: Device installation might
require the removal or moving of the rear-pane cage nuts.
If you need to move the cage nuts, follow this procedure to
move them and then go to “Installing Cage Nuts” on
page 235 to install them in the correct position.
1. Hold the cage nut in place and compress the
cage-nut clip with a flat screwdriver blade.
234
Netfinity Server HMM
2. With the cage nut-clip compressed, push the cage
nut-clip out of the square hole.
3. Release the screwdriver pressure on the clip. The
cage nut is now loose and can be removed from the
square hole.
Installing Cage Nuts:
The nuts go toward the
inside of the NetBAY3. Make sure you install all the cage
nuts at the same level on the mounting rails.
1. Hook one side of the cage-nut clip into the
rack-mounting-rail square hole.
2. Hold the cage nut in place and compress the
cage-nut clip with a flat screwdriver blade.
3. With the cage-nut clip compressed, push the cage-nut
clip into the square hole.
4. Release the screwdriver pressure on the clip. The
cage nut is now locked in the square hole.
5i topmar=1p.
Installing Cantilevered Devices:
Installing
cantilevered devices in a NetBAY3 is similar to installing
these devices in a rack enclosure. Cantilevered devices
can be installed in the front or rear of the NetBAY3. The
devices must be screwed to the NetBAY3 vertical
mounting rails. Follow the instructions in the
documentation that comes with the device and use the
following figure as a guide.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
235
Installing Devices on the NetBAY3 Base
Plate: Some devices rest on the NetBAY3 base plate.
These devices must be screwed to the NetBAY3 vertical
mounting rails.
236
Netfinity Server HMM
Memory-Module Kits
Adding memory to your server is an easy way to make
programs run faster. You can increase the amount of
memory in your server by installing options called
memory-module kits. Each kit contains one
industry-standard, dual-inline memory module (DIMM).
Your server uses a noninterleaved memory configuration.
Your server comes with a memory-module installed on the
processor board in connector J1, the connector nearest the
rear of the server. Install additional memory modules in
connectors J2, J3, and J4, in that order. (See the
illustration on the next page for memory connector
locations.) If you mix DIMM sizes, install the largest sized
DIMM in connector J1, the next largest sized DIMM in
connector J2, and so forth.
Notes
1. The memory-module kit sizes available for your
server are 128 MB, 256 MB, and 512 MB. Your
server supports a minimum of 128 MB and a
maximum of 2 GB of system memory.
2. Install only 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered
DIMMs. Only 100 MHz, 72-bit, registered,
synchronous, error correcting code (ECC), x4
configuration DIMM memory is supported for the
128 MB, 256 MB, and 512 MB DIMMs.
3. Installing or removing memory modules changes
the configuration information in the server.
Therefore, after installing or removing a DIMM,
you must save the new configuration information
in the Configuration/Setup program. When you
restart the server, the system displays a
message indicating that the memory configuration
has changed. Start the Configuration/Setup
program and select Save Settings. See “Using
the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu” on
page 56 for more information.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
237
Refer to the following illustrations of the processor housing
and the processor board while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
Note
The illustrations show only the processor housing and
processor board for simplicity; you do not need to
remove the processor housing and processor board to
install a memory module.
.1/ Processor housing cover
.2/ Quarter-turn fastener
238
Netfinity Server HMM
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
DIMM
Memory socket
Memory socket
Memory socket
Memory socket
Retaining clips
1
2
3
4
(J4)
(J3)
(J2)
(J1)
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Read the documentation that comes with your
option.
To install a memory module:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Turn the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ on the
processor housing cover .1/ one quarter turn and
remove the cover from the processor housing.
3. Locate the memory-module connectors on the
memory board. Determine the memory-module
connector into which you will install the memory
module. (See the notes at the beginning of this
procedure.)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
239
4. Touch the static-protective package containing the
memory-module kit to any unpainted metal surface on
the server. Then, remove the memory module from
the package.
Note
To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging
the memory-module connectors, handle the clips
gently.
5. Install the memory module:
a. Turn the memory module (DIMM) .3/ so that the
pins align correctly with the connector .6/.
b. Insert the DIMM into the connector by pressing
on one edge of the DIMM and then on the other
edge of the DIMM. Be sure to press straight into
the connector. The retaining clips .8/ should
snap into the closed positions.
c. Make sure the retaining clips .8/ are in the
closed position. If a gap exists between the
DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not
been properly installed. In this case, open the
retaining clips and remove the DIMM; then,
reinsert the DIMM.
d. Repeat these steps for each memory module
that you install.
6. Install the processor housing cover .1/ and turn the
two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter turn to
secure the cover.
7. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the Installation” on
page 176.
240
Netfinity Server HMM
Microprocessor Kit Installation
Your server comes with one microprocessor installed on
the processor board. When you install an additional
microprocessor kit, your server can operate as a
symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP,
certain operating systems and application programs can
distribute the processing load between the
microprocessors. This enhances performance for
database and point-of-sale applications, integrated
manufacturing solutions, and other applications.
Before you begin:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Thoroughly review the documentation that comes
with the microprocessor, so that you can
determine whether you need to update the server
basic input/output system (BIOS). The latest
level of BIOS for your server is available through
the World Wide Web and the IBM Bulletin Board
System (BBS). Refer to “Online Support” on
page iv for the appropriate World Wide Web
addresses and bulletin-board telephone numbers.
Obtain an SMP-capable operating system
(optional). For a list of supported operating
systems, see http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat/
on the World Wide Web.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
241
Notes
1. The illustrations might differ slightly from your
hardware.
2. To avoid damage and ensure proper server
operation when you install a new or an additional
microprocessor, use microprocessors that have
the same cache size and type, and the same
clock speed. Microprocessor internal and
external clock frequencies must be identical.
3. If you replace the microprocessor in your server
with a microprocessor with a different speed, be
sure to set the Microprocessor Core Frequency
Selection switch correctly. See “Processor Board
Jumpers” on page 257 for more information.
4. The microprocessor that is installed in the
primary microprocessor connector is CPU or
processor 1. If a microprocessor is installed in
the secondary microprocessor connector, it is
CPU or processor 2. If the server has only one
microprocessor installed, that microprocessor is
installed in the primary microprocessor connector
and is the boot processor. If the server has two
microprocessors installed, the microprocessor in
the secondary microprocessor connector is the
boot processor and the microprocessor in the
primary microprocessor connector is the
application processor.
Refer to the following illustrations of the processor housing
and processor board. while you perform this procedure.
Note
The illustrations show only the processor housing and
processor board for simplicity; you do not need to
remove the processor housing and processor board to
install a microprocessor kit.
242
Netfinity Server HMM
.1/ Processor housing cover
.2/ Quarter-turn fastener
.3/ Latches
.4/ Secondary microprocessor (CPU or processor 2)
.5/ Terminator card
.6/ Secondary microprocessor connector
.7/ Voltage regulator modules (VRMs) for secondary
microprocessor
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
243
.8/ VRM connectors for secondary microprocessor
.9/ VRMs for primary microprocessor
.1ð/ Primary microprocessor (CPU or processor 1)
To install an additional microprocessor kit:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Turn the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ on the
processor housing cover .1/ one quarter turn and
remove the cover from the processor housing.
3. Remove the terminator card .5/ from the secondary
microprocessor connector .6/. You do not need the
terminator card when you have a second
microprocessor installed. You can store it in a safe
place in the static-protective package that your new
microprocessor is shipped in.
4. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package containing
the new microprocessor to any unpainted metal
surface on the server; then, remove the
microprocessor from the package.
b. Hold the microprocessor .4/ by the open latches
.3/, and center the microprocessor over the
secondary processor connector .6/.
Attention
Make sure the microprocessor is oriented
and aligned correctly before you try to close
the latches.
c. Carefully close the latches .3/ to seat the
microprocessor in the connector.
5. Install the two voltage regulator modules (VRMs) .7/
included in the microprocessor kit secondary
microprocessor:
a. Center the first VRM over the connector .8/.
Make sure that the VRM is oriented and aligned
correctly; then, press the VRM into the
connector. The latches should snap into the
locked positions.
b. Repeat the preceding step for the second VRM.
Note
If you remove the secondary microprocessor at
some time in the future, remember to install the
terminator card in the secondary microprocessor
connector and to remove the VRMs for the
secondary microprocessor.
6. Install the processor housing cover .1/ and turn the
two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter turn to
secure the cover.
244
Netfinity Server HMM
7. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the Installation” on
page 176.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
245
Preparing to Install Options
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Note
You do not need to turn the server off to work with
hot-plug or hot-swap devices, such as hot-plug PCI
adapters, and hot-swap hard disk drives.
If you are:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Installing or removing a hot-plug PCI adapter, go to
“Adapters” on page 165.
Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive, go
to “Internal Drives Installation” on page 219.
Installing or replacing a hot-swap power supply, go to
“Hot-Swap Power Supply Installation” on page 202.
Removing a hot-swap power supply, go to “Hot-Swap
Power Supply Removal” on page 206.
Replacing a hot-swap fan, go to “Hot-Swap Fan
Assembly Replacement” on page 208.
Installing or removing an option not listed in the
preceding list, continue with the following steps.
1. Unlock and open the server door.
Caution
When unlocked, the server door will not support
the weight of the server. To avoid personal
injury, be sure to remove or lock the server door
before moving or lifting the server.
2. Remove all media (diskettes, CDs, optical discs, or
tapes) from the drives; then, turn off the server and all
attached options.
Caution
The Power Control button on the front of the
server does not turn off the electrical current
supplied to the server. The server also might
have more than one power cord. To remove all
electrical current from the server, ensure that all
power cords are disconnected from the power
source.
3. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the
server, disconnect the telephone line from the
electrical outlet.
246
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical
outlets.
5. Note the location of the remaining cables and cords;
then disconnect them from the back of the server.
Caution
Electrical current from power, telephone, and
communication cables can be hazardous. To avoid
personal injury or equipment damage, disconnect the
attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the server
covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation
and configuration procedures.
Go to “Top Cover Removal” on page 286.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
247
Power Backplane Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the power backplane, to the following
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. To access the power backplane cables, slide the
shuttle to the rear of the system, see “Shuttle
Removal” on page 278.
3. Disconnect the power backplane cables.
4. Remove the power backplane cover.
a. Remove the power backplane cover screws .1/.
b. Remove the power backplane cover screws .1/,
then; remove the power backplane cover.
c.
5. Remove the power backplane.
248
Netfinity Server HMM
a. Remove the power backplane screws .1/, then;
remove the power backplane.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
249
Power Supplies
The following illustration shows the power supplies,
Power-supply power switch, and power lights on your
server.
.1/
Filler Panel: You can remove this filler panel and
install a second hot-swap power supply in power
supply bay 2. The second power supply provides
redundant power.
.2/
Power Supply 1 Power Connector: The power
cord for power supply 1 connects here. (The power
connector for the additional optional power supply is
covered by the filler panel.)
.3/
DC Power Light: This light provides status
information about the power supply. For normal
operation, both the AC and DC lights should be on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power
Supply LEDs” on page 252 for more information.
.5/
Power-Supply Power Switch: This switch turns
the power supply on and off.
.5/
Power Supply 1: Your server comes with one
hot-swap power supply installed. You can install a
second hot-swap power supply to provide
redundant power. You cannot hot swap a power
supply if your server has only one power supply
installed. (See “Hot-Swap Power Supply
Installation” on page 202 for instructions.)
250
Netfinity Server HMM
.6/
AC Power Light: This light provides status
information about the power supply. For normal
operation, both the AC and DC Power lights should
be on. For any other combination of lights, see
“Power Supply LEDs” on page 252 for more
information.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
251
Power Supply LEDs
The AC and DC Power LEDs on the power supply provide
status information about the power supply. See “Power
Supplies” on page 250 for the location of these LEDs.
The following table describes the AC and DC Power LEDs.
AC Power
LED
DC Power
LED
Description and Action
On
On
The power supply is on and
operating correctly.
On
Off
There is a DC power problem.
Possible causes:
1. The Power Control button
on the front of the server is
in the Off position.
Action: Press the Power
Control button to start the
server.
2. The Power switch on the
power supply is in the Off
position.
Action: Turn the Power
switch to the On position.
3. The power supply has
failed.
Action: Replace the
power supply.
Off
Off
There is an AC power problem.
Possible causes:
1. There is no AC power to
the power supply.
Actions: Verify that:
Ÿ The power cord is
properly connected to
the server.
Ÿ The power outlet
functions properly.
2. The power supply has
failed.
Action: Replace the
power supply.
252
Netfinity Server HMM
Power Supply Filler Plate
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the power supply filler plate, do the following:
1. Remove the power supply filler plate screws .1/,
then; remove the power supply filler plate.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
253
NetBAY3 Bezel Installation
The NetBAY3 bezel is shipped, unattached, inside the
NetBAY3.
To install the NetBAY3 bezel:
1. Remove the package containing the NetBAY3 bezel
and unpack the bezel.
2. Hook the tabs on the left side of the NetBAY3 bezel
around the posts on the NetBAY3.
3. Gently push the right side of the bezel toward the
server until the bezel snaps into place.
4. Lock the NetBAY3 bezel.
254
Netfinity Server HMM
Processor Board Component Locations
A layout of the processor board is shown in the following
illustration.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
.1ð/
Secondary microprocessor cache VRM
connector (U15)
Secondary microprocessor cache VRM error
LED (CR36)
Secondary microprocessor core VRM
connector (U7)
Secondary microprocessor core VRM error
LED (CR37)
Power control connector (J17)
Primary microprocessor cache VRM error
LED (CR19)
Primary microprocessor core VRM error LED
(CR17)
Power supply connector (J10)
Primary microprocessor cache VRM
connector (U17)
Primary microprocessor core VRM connector
(U22)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
255
.11/
.12/
.13/
.14/
.15/
.16/
.17/
.18/
.19/
.2ð/
.21/
.22/
.23/
.24/
.25/
.26/
.27/
256
Microprocessor core-frequency-selection
switch block (SW1)
Reserved (J22)
Reserved (J20)
Reserved (J18)
System board connector (J9) (on reverse
side of processor board)
Primary microprocessor connector (U5)
Primary microprocessor error LED (CR12)
DIMM 1 error LED (CR8)
DIMM 2 error LED (CR9)
DIMM 3 error LED (CR10)
DIMM 4 error LED (CR11)
DIMM socket 4 (J1)
DIMM socket 3 (J2)
DIMM socket 2 (J3)
DIMM socket 1 (J4)
Secondary microprocessor error LED (CR13)
Secondary microprocessor connector (U6)
Netfinity Server HMM
Processor Board Jumpers
Table 8 contains the names and descriptions of the jumper
blocks located on the processor board. Table 9 gives the
microprocessor core-frequency-selection switch settings.
The highlighted numbers in the table refer to the
highlighted numbers in the illustration in “Processor Board
Component Locations” on page 255.
Notes
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect the power
cords before moving any jumpers.
2. Be sure the microprocessor bus-to-core ratio is
set correctly. For example, if you have a 400
MHz2 microprocessor installed and the system
bus speed is 100 MHz (the default), be sure that
the microprocessor core frequency selection
switch block is set to a bus-to-core ratio of 4
(400/100). See Table 9.
Attention
If the microprocessor bus-to-core ratio is incorrect,
system-board components will overheat and
component damage might occur. Be sure that the
microprocessor core-frequency selection is properly
set.
Table 8. Processor Board Jumpers
Jumper Name
Description
.12/ J22 Reserved
The default position is no jumper on J22.
Table 9. Microprocessor Core Frequency Selection
Switch (SW1) Settings
Core/Bus
Ratio
Position
1
Position
2
Position
3
Position
4
4
On
On
On
Off
4.5
On
Off
On
Off
5
On
On
Off
Off
Note: All other setting combinations are reserved.
2
400 MHz denotes internal clock speed of the microprocessor
only; other factors also affect application performance.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
257
Processor Board Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the processor board, do the following.
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Disconnect all processor board cables.
3. Remove the processor board.
4. Remove the processor board screws .1/, then; lift the
processor board out of the tray.
258
Netfinity Server HMM
Rack Installation
The following information provides instructions for installing
a server in a rack and for removing a server from a rack.
Your server comes with all the rack installation hardware
(rack model only). Review the preinstallation information in
“Before You Begin”; then, continue with “Installing and
Removing the Server.”
>50 kg (110 lbs)
Caution
Do not place any object weighing more than 50 kg
(110 lbs) on top of the rack model of the server.
Before You Begin
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
You will need the following items:
– An assortment of small screwdrivers
– 8-inch adjustable wrench or pliers
Some of the installation procedures require three
people.
To ensure rack stability, plan the installation of
servers in the rack starting from the bottom. For
more information, refer to the IBM Netfinity Rack
Configurator program provided with ServerGuide.
Review the documentation that comes with your rack
enclosure for safety or cabling considerations.
Ensure that your planned installation is within the
rack's guidelines for heat generation, electrical
requirements, air flow, and mechanical loading.
Verify that the rack can meet the operating
parameters, as detailed in “Specifications” on
page 50.
Installing and Removing the Server: During
the installation procedure, you must install parts on the
rack and the server. This process can be divided into two
parts:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Preparing the rack
Installing the server in the rack
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
259
Preparing the Rack
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)
Caution
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your machine.
You will use the following parts:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
IBM Installation Template
Two slide-bracket assemblies
One cable-management arm
Two bezel brackets
Six screws (for attaching the bezel brackets)
Sixteen long screws (M6 by 16 mm)
Eight short screws (M4 by 8 mm)
Six cage nuts
Two hex nuts (M6)
Four lift handles (shipped with some servers)
Cable ties
One server bracket (for attaching the cable
management arm to the server)
Attention
To ensure rack stability, plan the installation of servers
in the rack starting from the bottom.
To attach the mounting hardware to the rack:
1. Remove the rack front door. Refer to the rack
documentation for instructions.
2. Mark the positions of the slide-bracket assemblies,
bezel brackets, and the cable-management arm on
the rack:
a. Position the installation template on the front
mounting rails on the rack, aligning the holes.
b. Mark the holes for the slide-bracket assemblies
and bezel brackets.
c. Move the template to the same U level at the
rear of the server and mark the locations for the
slide-bracket assemblies and cable-management
arm.
d. Install the six cage nuts at the locations marked
on the mounting rails.
260
Netfinity Server HMM
3. Attach a slide-bracket assembly to the front of the
rack:
Notes:
Ÿ Get another person to help you attach the
slide-bracket assemblies to the rack.
Ÿ The slide-bracket assemblies can be installed on
either the left or right side of the rack.
Ÿ Refer to the illustrations for examples of the
proper alignment of the slide-bracket assemblies.
a. Position the slide-bracket assembly behind the
mounting rail so that the slides will extend out
from the front of the rack.
b. If necessary, loosen the screws at the rear of the
slide bracket assembly and adjust the length of
the slide-bracket to fit the mounting rail. Tighten
the screws.
Screws
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
261
c. Insert screws (6M by 16 mm) through the
mounting rail to the slide-bracket assembly. Do
not tighten the screws.
4. Attach the slide bracket assembly to the rear of the
rack:
a. Position the slide-bracket assembly inside the
mounting rail.
b. Insert screws (6M by 16 mm) through the
mounting rail to the slide-bracket assembly. Do
not tighten the screws.
5. Attach the other slide-bracket assembly to the front
and rear of the rack.
6. Push the slide-bracket assemblies to the outermost
positions on the rack.
262
Netfinity Server HMM
7. Tighten all screws to secure both slide-bracket
assemblies. If you are using a torque screwdriver,
use the following torque setting: 8–11 Nm (70.8–97.0
in/lbs).
8. Attach the cable-management arm to the rear of the
rack:
a. Position the cable-management arm bracket on
the outside of the mounting rail.
b. Insert screws (M6 by 16 mm) through the
cable-management arm bracket, mounting rail,
and cage nuts. Tighten the screws.
c. Position the server bracket on the
cable-management arm.
d. Insert screws through the cable-management
arm and the server bracket. Attach M6 hex nuts
to the screws and tighten the hex nuts.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
263
264
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing the Server in the Rack: You will use
eight screws (M4 by 8).
To install the server in the rack:
1. Fully extend the slide-bracket assemblies until they
lock.
2. Install the four lift handles on the sides of the server:
a. Press in on the sides of the lift handle near the
tabs and insert the handle tabs into the slots on
the side of the server.
b. Move the handle up in the slots so that the
hooked part of each tab is inside the server.
Release the pressure on the sides of the handle.
c. Install the remaining three lift handles.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
265
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)
Caution
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your
machine.
3. Lift and position the server so that the bayonet slots
on the server are above the bayonets on the
slide-bracket assemblies.
4. Lower the server and slip the bayonets into the
bayonet slots.
5. Insert screws through one slide-bracket assembly and
server side. Tighten the screws. Repeat this step for
the other slide-bracket assembly on the opposite side
of the server. This secures the server.
266
Netfinity Server HMM
6. Remove the four lift handles from the sides of the
server:
a. Grasp the lift handle and press in on the sides of
the lift handle near the tabs until the tabs touch
the inside edges of the slots.
b. Move the handle down in the slots so that the
hooked parts of the tabs clear the top edges of
the slots; then, pull the handle away from the
server.
c. Remove the remaining three handles. Store the
handles in a safe place.
Note
When the drawer is fully extended, safety latches
on the slide-brackets lock into place. To release
the safety latch, press the latch on each side of
the rack.
7. Press the safety latches and slide the drawer about
halfway into the rack.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
267
8. Attach the cable-management arm to the server using
the captive screws.
9. Attach the monitor, keyboard, and power cables to
the corresponding connectors on the server. Refer to
the rack documentation for instructions.
10. Attach the cables to the cable-management arm using
cable ties.
268
Netfinity Server HMM
11. Attach the two bezel brackets (one for each side) to
the front sides of the server with the six screws
provided.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
269
12. Secure the server in the rack:
a. Slide the server into the rack.
b. Secure the server to both sides of the rack by
inserting screws (M6 by 16 mm) through the
bezel brackets, mounting rails, and cage nuts.
13. Install the rack front door.
14. To complete the installation, refer to the
documentation that came with the rack.
270
Netfinity Server HMM
Removing the Server from a Rack
Before you begin
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Turn off the server.
Follow any additional installation and safety
instructions that come with the rack.
To remove the server from a rack:
1. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the
server, disconnect the telephone line from the
electrical outlet and the server.
Note
If you are in the United Kingdom, you must
perform this step before disconnecting the power
cords.
2. Disconnect all cables and power cords from the rear
of the server.
3. Disconnect all power cords from the rack.
4. Remove the screws from the bezel brackets on each
side of the front bezel. Set them aside for later use.
5. Slide the server about halfway out of the rack.
6. Loosen the captive screws that secure the
cable-management arm.
7. Fully extend the slide-bracket assemblies until they
lock.
8. Remove the screws that attach the server to each
slide-bracket assembly.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
271
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)
Caution
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your
machine.
9. Install the four lift handles on the sides of the server:
a. Press in on the sides of the lift handle near the
tabs and insert the handle tabs into the slots on
the side of the server.
b. Move the handle up in the slots so that the
hooked part of each tab is inside the server.
Release the pressure on the sides of the handle.
c. Install the remaining three lift handles.
272
Netfinity Server HMM
10. Lift the server from the slide bracket assemblies and
place the server on a flat, nonconductive surface.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
273
SCSI Backplane Component Locations
The following simplified layout of the SCSI backplane
identifies the components. Refer to this figure when you
set the jumpers on the backplane.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
274
Wide (16-bit) SCSI connector
Option jumper block (J10)
SCSI hot-swap drive connectors (on reverse
side of backplane)
Repeater card connector
Power connector
Netfinity Server HMM
SCSI Backplane Option Jumpers
The option jumper block on the SCSI backplane defines
the SCSI IDs for hot-swap drives. See the illustration in
“SCSI Backplane Component Locations” on page 274 for
the location of the option jumper block.
Table 10 summarizes the settings for the SCSI backplane
option jumper block (J10).
Table 10. Backplane Option Jumper Block
Pins
Description
1–2
Reserved.
3–4
Reserved
5–6
Placing a jumper on these two pins enables
SCSI IDs 8–13
7–8
Reserved.
9–10
Reserved.
11–12
Placing a jumper on these two pins reverses
the SCSI IDs on the backplane.
Note: The default is no jumpers installed on the J10 jumper
block.
Table 11 shows the SCSI IDs that you can use for
hot-swap drives.
Table 11. SCSI IDs for Hot-Swap Drives
J10
Pins
5–6
J10
Pins
11–12
Bay
1
Bay
2
Bay
3
Bay
4
Bay
5
Bay
6
No
jumper
No
jumper
0
1
2
3
4
5
No
jumper
Jumper
5
4
3
2
1
0
Jumper
No
jumper
13
12
11
10
9
8
Notes:
1. No jumper on pins 5-6 and 11-12 is the default.
2. Jumpers on pins 5-6 and 11-12 is not supported.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
275
Server Cabling
Make sure you have an adequate number of properly
grounded electrical outlets for your server, monitor, and
any other options that you installed. Place your server in a
location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage
your server. Leave about 50 mm (2 inches) of space at
the right and left sides of your server to allow the server's
cooling system to work properly. Leave about 100 mm (4
inches) clearance at the rear for cables.
1. Use the illustration in “Input/Output Connectors and
Expansion Slots” on page 215 to cable your server.
2. Remove any shipping screws .2/ from the power
supply.
3. Connect the power cord .1/ to the server.
Caution.
When the power-cord strain-relief bracket option
is installed on the power cord, the server must be
plugged to a power source that is easily
accessible.
4. Install the power-cord strain-relief bracket .3/ (if
desired).
5. Plug the power cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
276
Netfinity Server HMM
Server Door and Trim Bezels Removal
on the Tower Model
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Server door
.2/ NetBAY3 bezel
.3/ Media-bay trim bezel
To remove the server door:
1. Unlock and open the server door .1/.
2. Lift the server door up and off its hinges. Store the
door in a safe place.
To remove the NetBAY3 bezel (tower model only):
1. Unlock the NetBAY3 bezel .2/.
2. With your fingers on the ribbed area on the right side
of the NetBAY3 bezel .2/, grasp the right side of the
NetBAY3 bezel and pull it away from the pedestal.
3. Unhook the left side of the bezel from the server.
Store the bezel in a safe place.
To remove the media-bay trim bezel:
1. Release the two tabs at the bottom edge of the bezel
.3/ and pull the bottom of the bezel slightly away
from the server.
2. Pull the bezel down to release the two tabs at the top
edge of the bezel. Store the bezel in a safe place.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
277
Shuttle Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the shuttle, do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Remove the shuttle.
a. Remove the screws 2.
b. Loosen the screws 1, then: slide the shuttle to
the rear of the system.
278
Netfinity Server HMM
Side Cover(s) Removal
To remove the side cover(s), do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Remove the side cover.
a. Release the three tabs .1/ on the top edge of
one side cover and tilt the cover away from the
server.
b. Lift the cover off the server and set it aside.
c. Repeat the previous steps to remove the other
side cover.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
279
System Board Component Locations
The following illustration shows a layout of the system
board and identifies system-board components. You might
need to refer to this figure before you install hardware in
your server. You might also need to refer to this figure
when you set configuration jumpers on the system board.
44
45
46 47
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
.1ð/
.11/
.12/
.13/
.14/
.15/
.16/
.17/
.18/
.19/
280
32
31
Processor board connector (J19)
Advanced System Management Processor
error LED (CR24)
RAID channel 1 connector (J7)
RAID channel 1 error LED (CR30)
RAID channel 2 error LED (CR31)
Reserved (J54)
Reserved (J64)
Disable RAID controller jumper block (J11)
Reserved (J45)
Power on control jumper block (J32)
RAID download jumper block (J15)
Reserved (J25)
Reserved (J9)
Power backplane cable connector (J8)
RAID channel 2 connector (to backplane)
(J3)
RAID system error LED (CR32)
Reserved (J27)
Reserved (J35)
SCSI activity LED connector (J52)
Netfinity Server HMM
.2ð/
.21/
.22/
.23/
.24/
.25/
.26/
.27/
.28/
.29/
.3ð/
.31/
.32/
.33/
.34/
.35/
.36/
.37/
.38/
.39/
.4ð/
.41/
.42/
.43/
.44/
.45/
.46/
.47/
Reserved (J34)
Reserved (J29)
Reserved (J26)
IDE connector (J33)
Disable Advanced System Management
Processor jumper block (J51)
Fan connector (J36)
Diskette drive connector (J22)
Power on password override jumper block
(J24)
Flash ROM page swap jumper block (J30)
Control panel connector (J20)
Battery
Reserved (J46)
Hot-plug PCI controller programmer interface
connector (J53)
ISA expansion slot
Hot-plug switch connector (J16)
PCI slot LEDs (four are on the side of the
board)
PCI (hot-plug) slots 1–4 (on secondary PCI
bus)
PCI slots 5 and 6 (on primary PCI bus)
Parallel port connector (J56) (Serial port A
and B connectors are below the parallel port
connector.)
Video port connector (J2)
Management port C connector (J42)
USB 1 and USB 2 port connectors (USB 2 is
below USB 1.) (J31)
Mouse and keyboard connectors (J1) (The
mouse connector is above the keyboard
connector.)
Ethernet port connector (J4)
Reserved (J17)
Reserved (J18)
Disable Ethernet controller jumper block (J5)
Disable video controller jumper block (J14)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
281
System Board Jumpers
Table 12 describes the jumpers on the system board. The
numbers in the table correspond to the highlighted
numbers on the illustration in “System Board Component
Locations” on page 280.
Note
Turn off the server, and disconnect the power cords
before moving any jumpers.
Table 12. System Board Jumpers
Jumper Name
Description
.8/ J11 Disable
RAID controller
The default position is Enabled (jumper on
pins 1 and 2). Move the jumper to pins 2 and
3 to disable the RAID controller.
.9/ J45 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
.1ð/ J32 Power on
control
The default position is normal operation
(jumper on pins 1 and 2). Moving the jumper
to pins 2 and 3 allows the power supply to be
turned on without a control panel or Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor.
.11/ J15 RAID
download
The default position is no jumpers on the
pins. This jumper block is used when the
RAID adapter EEPROM is being updated.
.12/ J25 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.13/ J9 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.2ð/ J34 Reserved
The default position is a jumper installed on
pins 1 and 2.
.21/ J29 Reserved
The default position is a jumper installed on
pins 1 and 2.
.22/ J26 Reserved
The default is no jumper installed on J26.
.24/ J51 Disable
Advanced System
Management
Processor
In normal operation, there is no jumper on
J51. Installing a jumper on J51 disables the
Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
.27/ J24 Power on
password override
Changing the position of this jumper bypasses
the power-on password check if the jumper
has been moved since the server was last
powered on. You do not need to move the
jumper back to the default position after the
password is overridden.
Changing the position of this jumper does not
affect the administrator password check if an
administrator password is set.
.28/ J30 Flash
ROM page swap
The default position is a jumper installed on
pins 2 and 3. Changing the position of this
jumper will change which of the two pages of
Flash ROM is used when the system is
started.
.46/ J5 Disable
Ethernet controller
The default position is Enabled (jumper on
pins 1 and 2). Move the the jumper to pins 2
and 3 to disable the Ethernet controller.
.47/ J14 Disable
video controller
The default position is Enabled (jumper on
pins 1 and 2). Move the the jumper to pins 2
and 3 to disable the video controller.
282
Netfinity Server HMM
System Board Removal
Notes
1. Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
2. If possible, record the configuration settings
before removing the system board. (see
“Configuration/Setup Utility Program” on
page 25.)
To remove the system board, do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top Cover Removal” on
page 286).
2. Disconnect all adapter cables and remove the
adapters (see “Adapters” on page 165).
3. Remove the adapter dividers.
a. Press on the adapter divider release tab .1/ and
lift the divider out of the system.
b. Repeat the procedure for each adapter divider.
4. Remove the processor board (see “Processor Board
Removal” on page 258).
5. Disconnect all system board cables.
6. Remove the processor card support tray housing.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
283
a. Remove the processor card support tray
housing screws .1/.
b. Lift the support tray housing latches .2/ to
release the housing from the shuttle, then; lift the
housing out of the system.
7. Remove the system board dust cover .1/..
8. Remove the system board.
284
Netfinity Server HMM
a. Remove the system board mounting screws,
then; remove the system board.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
285
Top Cover Removal
Before you begin:
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
Note
The illustrations in this book are similar to your server;
details might vary. For example, the processor
housing cover is not shown in the following illustration.
.1/ Thumbscrews
.2/ Top cover
To remove the server top cover:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 246).
2. Loosen the two thumbscrews .1/ on the back edge of
the top cover.
3. Slide the top cover .2/ slightly toward the rear of the
server; the cover will stop after about 25 mm (1 inch).
Lift the cover off the server and set the cover aside.
Attention
For proper cooling and airflow, replace the top
cover before turning on the server. Operating the
server for extended periods of time (over 30
minutes) with the top cover removed might
damage server components.
286
Netfinity Server HMM
Voltage Regulator Card Removal
Note
Read “Safety Information” on page 332.
To remove the voltage regulator card, do the following:
1. Turn off the server and all eternal devices.
2. Disconnect the server and all external devices from
the power source.
3. Remove the voltage regulator card mounting screws
.1/, then; slid the voltage regulator card out of the
server.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
287
Symptom-to-FRU Index
This index supports Netfinity Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type
8661 servers.
Notes
1. Check the configuration before you replace a
FRU. Configuration problems can cause false
errors and symptoms.
2. For IBM devices not supported by index, refer to
the manual for that device.
3. Always start with “General Checkout” on page 8.
The Symptom-to-FRU lists symptoms, errors, and the
possible causes. The most likely cause is listed first. Use
this Symptom-to-FRU Index to help you decide which
FRUs to have available when servicing the computer. The
POST BIOS displaying POST error codes and messages
on the screen.
Beep Symptoms
Beep symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones
separated by pauses (intervals without sound). See the
following examples.
Note
One beeps after successfully completing POST
indicated the system is functioning properly.
Beeps
1-2-3
Description
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
One beep
A pause (or break)
Two beeps
A pause (or break)
Three beeps
4
Four continuous beeps
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
1-1-2
(Processor register test
failed)
1. Optional Processor
(if installed)
2. Processor
1-1-3
(CMOS write/read test
failed)
1. Battery/CMOS chip
2. System Board
1-1-4
(BIOS ROM checksum
failed)
1. System Board
1-2-1
(Programmable Interval
Timer failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-2-2
(DMA initialization failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
288
Netfinity Server HMM
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
1-2-3
(DMA page register
write/read failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-2-4
RAM refresh verification
failed
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-3-1
(1st 64K RAM test failed)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
1-3-2
(1st 64K RAM parity test
failed)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
2-1-1
(Secondary DMA register
failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-1-2
(Primary DMA register
failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-1-3
(Primary interrupt mask
register failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-1-4
(Secondary interrupt mask
register failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-2-1
(Interrupt vector loading
failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-2-2
(Keyboard controller failed)
1. System Board
2-2-3
(CMOS power failure and
checksum checks failed)
1. Battery/CMOS chip
2. System Board
2-2-4
(CMOS configuration info
validation failed)
1. Battery/CMOS chip
2. System Board
2-3-1
(Screen initialization failed)
1. Jumper on J14
2. System Board
2-3-2
(Screen memory failed)
1. System Board
2-3-3
(Screen retrace failed)
1. System Board
2-3-4
(Search for video ROM
failed)
1. System Board
2-4-1
(Video failed, screen
believed operable)
1. System Board
3-1-1
(Timer tick interrupt failed)
1. System Board
3-1-2
(Interval timer channel 2
failed)
1. System Board
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
289
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
3-1-3
(RAM test failed above
address 0FFFFH)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
3-1-4
(Time-Of-Day clock failed)
1. Battery/CMOS chip
2. System Board
3-2-1
(Serial port failed)
1. System Board
3-2-2
(Parallel port failed)
1. System Board
3-2-3
(Math coprocessor failed)
1. Optional Processor
(if installed)
2. Processor
3. Processor Board
3-2-4
(Failure comparing CMOS
memory size against actual)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. Battery/CMOS chip
3-3-1
(Memory size mismatch
occurred, see“Memory
Settings” on page 63 )
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. Battery/CMOS chip
3-3-2
(Critical SMBUS error
occurred)
1. Disconnect the
server power cord
from outlet, wait 30
seconds and retry.
2. Processor Board
3. Memory DIMMs
Three Short Beeps
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
One Continuous Beep
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
(if installed)
3. Processor Board
4. System Board
Repeating Short Beeps
1. Keyboard
2. System Board
One Long and One Short
Beep
1. Video adapter
(if present)
2. System Board
3.
One Long and Two Short
Beeps
1. Video adapter
(if present)
2. System Board
Two Long and Two Short
Beeps
1. Video adapter
290
Netfinity Server HMM
No Beep Symptoms
No Beep Symptom
FRU/Action
No beep and the system
operates correctly.
1. Check speaker cables
2. Speaker
3. System Board
No Beeps occur after
successfully completing
POST
(The Power-On Status is
disabled.)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
set the Start Options
Power-On Status to
enable.
2. Check speaker
connection.
3. Speaker
4. System Board
No AC power
(Power supply AC LED is
off)
1. Check the power
cord
2. Power Supply (If two
are installed, swap
them to determine if
one is defective.)
3. Power Backplane
4. Hot Swap Power AC
Inlet Box
No beep and no video
1. See “Undetermined
Problems” on
page 322.
System will not power-up
(Power supply AC LED is
on)
1. See “Power Supply
LED Errors.” on
page 302.
Control Panel System Error LED
The system error LED is turned on on when an error is
detected. If the system error LED is on, remove the cover
and check the diagnostic panel LEDs. The following is a
complete list of diagnostic panel LEDs followed by the
FRU/Action for replacing the problem.
Notes
1. To locate the LEDs on the processor board see
“Processor Board Component Locations” on
page 255.
2. To locate the LEDs on the system board see
“System Board Component Locations” on
page 280.
3. Check the system error log for additional
information before replacing a FRU.
Diagnostic Panel LED
CPU LED on
(The LED next to the failing
CPU is on.)
FRU/Action
1. Processor 1 or 2 on
(Processor 1 or 2).
2. Processor Board
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
291
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
DASD 1 LED on
(The LED located next to
the drive bay that the failing
drive is installed in will be
turned on.)
1. Failing drive.
2. Be sure the fans are
operating correctly and
the air flow is good.
3. SCSI Backplane
FAN 1 LED on
1. Fan 1
2. Fan Cable
3. System Board
FAN 2 LED on
1. Fan 2
2. Fan Cable
3. System Board
FAN 3 LED on
1. Fan 3
2. Fan Cable
3. System Board
MEM LED on
(The LED next to the failing
DIMM is on.)
1. Failing DIMM in slot
J1, J2, J3, or J4).
2. System Board
3. Processor Board
NMI LED on
1. Reboot the system.
2. Check the system
Board LED(s); if on,
see “System Board
LEDs” on page 320.
3. Check the system error
log.
PCI 1 LED on
1. PCI Card for the PCI
slot LED that is
turned on
2. System Board
3. Processor Board
PCI 2 LED on
1. Card in slot 1 or 4
2. System Board
3. Processor Board
PS1 LED on
1. Check the DC Good
LED on power supply
1. If off, replace
power supply 1.
2. Power Backplane
PS2 LED on
1. Check the DC Good
LED on power supply
2. If off, replace
power supply 2.
2. Power Backplane
SMI LED on
1. Reboot the system.
2. Check the system
Board LED(s); if on,
see “System Board
LEDs” on page 320.
292
Netfinity Server HMM
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
TEMP LED on
1. Be sure the fans are
operating correctly
and the air flow is
good.
2. Check processor 1 and
2 LEDs
3. Be sure the power
supply fans are
operating correctly and
the air flow is good.
4. Processor Board
5. System Board
VRM LED on
(Check the VRM (voltage
regulator module) LEDs on
the processor board.)
1. Voltage regulator
module for the VRM
LED on the
processor board that
is turned on
2. Processor 1, if the
VRM 1 LED on the
processor board is on.
Processor 2, if the
VRM 2 LED on the
processor board is on.
3. Processor Board
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
293
Diagnostic Error Codes
Attention
In the following error codes, if XXX is 000, 195, or 197
do not replace a FRU. The description for these error
codes are:
000
195
197
The test passed.
The Esc key was pressed to abort the
test.
This a warning error and may not
indicate a hardware failure.
For all error codes, replace/follow the FRU/Action
indicated.
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
001-XXX-000
(Failed core tests)
1. System Board
005-XXX-000
(Failed Video test)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
011-XXX-000
(Failed COM1 Serial Port
test)
1. System Board
011-XXX-001
(Failed COM2 Serial Port
test)
1. System Board
014-XXX-000
(Failed Parallel Port test)
1. System Board
015-XXX-001
(Failed USB test)
1. System Board
020-XXX-000
(Failed PCI Interface test)
1. Processor Board
2. System Board
020-XXX-001 (Failed Hot
Swap Slot 1 PCI Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
020-XXX-002
(Failed Hot Swap Slot 2 PCI
Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
020-XXX-003
(Failed Hot Swap Slot 3 PCI
Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
020-XXX-004
(Failed Hot Swap Slot 4 PCI
Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
030-XXX-000
(Failed Internal SCSI
interface test)
1. System Board
035-XXX-000
(Failed System Board RAID
test)
1. System Board
294
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
035-XXX-001
(Failed RAID test for Fixed
Disk in bay 1, SCSI ID 0)
1. Fixed Disk 1 on SCSI
Backplane attached
to the RAID controller
on the system board
035-XXX-002
(Failed RAID test for Fixed
Disk in bay 2 SCSI ID 1
1. Fixed Disk 2 on SCSI
Backplane attached
to the RAID controller
on the system board
035-XXX-003
(Failed RAID test for Fixed
Disk in bay 3, SCSI ID 2)
1. Fixed Disk 3 on SCSI
Backplane attached
to the RAID controller
on the system board
035-XXX-004
(Failed RAID test for Fixed
Disk in bay 4, SCSI ID 3)
1. Fixed Disk 4 on SCSI
Backplane attached to
the RAID controller on
the system board
035-XXX-005
(Failed RAID test for Fixed
Disk in bay 5, SCSI ID 4)
1. Fixed Disk 5 on SCSI
Backplane attached
to the RAID controller
on the system board
035-XXX-006
(Failed RAID test for Fixed
Disk in bay 6, SCSI ID 5)
1. Fixed Disk 6 on SCSI
Backplane attached
to the RAID controller
on the system board
035-XXX-100
(Failed test for RAID
adapter installed in PCI slot
1)
1. RAID Adapter in PCI
slot 1
035-XXX-101
(Failed PCI Slot 1 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 1 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 1
035-XXX-102
(Failed PCI Slot 1 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 2 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 1
035-XXX-103
(Failed PCI Slot 1 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 3 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 1
035-XXX-104
(Failed PCI Slot 1 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 4 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 1
035-XXX-105
(Failed PCI Slot 1 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 5 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 1
035-XXX-106
(Failed PCI Slot 1 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 6 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 1
035-XXX-200
(Failed test for RAID
adapter installed in PCI slot
2)
1. RAID Adapter in PCI
slot 2
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
295
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
035-XXX-201
(Failed PCI Slot 2 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 1 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 2
035-XXX-202
(Failed PCI Slot 2 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 2 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 2
035-XXX-203
(Failed PCI Slot 2 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 3 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 2
035-XXX-204
(Failed PCI Slot 2 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 4 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 2
035-XXX-205
(Failed PCI Slot 2 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 5 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 2
035-XXX-206
(Failed PCI Slot 2 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 6 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 2
035-XXX-300
(Failed test for RAID
adapter installed in PCI slot
3)
1. RAID Adapter in PCI
slot 3
035-XXX-301
(Failed PCI Slot 3 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 1 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 3
035-XXX-302
(Failed PCI Slot 3 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 2 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 3
035-XXX-303
(Failed PCI Slot 3 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 3 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 3
035-XXX-304
(Failed PCI Slot 3 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 4 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 3
035-XXX-305
(Failed PCI Slot 3 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 5 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 3
035-XXX-306
(Failed PCI Slot 3 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 6 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 3
035-XXX-400
(Failed test for RAID
adapter installed in PCI slot
4)
1. RAID Adapter in PCI
slot 4
035-XXX-401
(Failed PCI Slot 4 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 1 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 4
035-XXX-402
(Failed PCI Slot 4 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 2 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 4
296
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
035-XXX-403
(Failed PCI Slot 4 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 3 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 4
035-XXX-404
(Failed PCI Slot 4 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 4 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 4
035-XXX-405
(Failed PCI Slot 4 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 5 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-406
(Failed PCI Slot 4 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 6 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 4
035-XXX-500
(Failed test for RAID
adapter installed in PCI slot
5)
1. RAID Adapter in PCI
slot 5
035-XXX-501
(Failed PCI Slot 5 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 1 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-502
(Failed PCI Slot 5 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 2 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-503
(Failed PCI Slot 5 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 3 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-504
(Failed PCI Slot 5 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 4 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-505
(Failed PCI Slot 5 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 5 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-506
(Failed PCI Slot 5 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 6 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 5
035-XXX-600
(Failed test for RAID
adapter installed in PCI slot
6)
1. RAID Adapter in PCI
slot 6
035-XXX-601
(Failed PCI Slot 6 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 1 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 6
035-XXX-602
(Failed PCI Slot 6 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 2 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 6
035-XXX-603
(Failed PCI Slot 6 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 3 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 6
035-XXX-604
(Failed PCI Slot 6 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 4 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 6
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
297
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
035-XXX-605
(Failed PCI Slot 6 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 5 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 6
035-XXX-606
(Failed PCI Slot 6 RAID
test)
1. Fixed Disk 6 attached
to RAID adapter
installed it PCI slot 6
075-XXX-000
(Failed Power Supply test)
1. Power Supply
089-XXX-001
(Failed Microprocessor test)
1. VRM for
Microprocessor
2. Microprocessor
089-XXX-002
(Failed Optional
Microprocessor test)
1. VRM for Optional
Microprocessor
2. Optional
Microprocessor
165-XXX-000
(Failed System Board test)
1.
2.
3.
4.
180-XXX-001
(Failed Information Panel
LED test)
1. Information LED
Panel
2. Power-on Panel
180-XXX-002
(Failed Diagnostics LED
Panel test)
1. Diagnostics LED
Panel
2. Power-on Panel
180-XXX-003
(Failed System Board LED
test)
1. System Board
180-XXX-004
(Failed Processor Board
LED test)
1. Processor Board
2. System Board
180-XXX-005
(Failed SCSI Backplane
LED test)
1. SCSI Backplane
2. SCSI Backplane Cable
3. System Board
201-XXX-001
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory Settings” on
page 63 )
1. DIMM Location J1
201-XXX-002
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory Settings” on
page 63 )
1. DIMM Location J2
201-XXX-003
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory Settings” on
page 63 )
1. DIMM Location J3
201-XXX-004
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory Settings” on
page 63 )
1. DIMM Location J4
298
Netfinity Server HMM
System Board
Processor Board
Power Backplane
Hot-Swap Drive
Backplane
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
201-XXX-999
(Multiple DIMM failure, see
error text.)
1. See error text for
failing DIMMs
202-XXX-001
(Failed System Cache test)
1. Microprocessor
202-XXX-002
(Failed System Cache test
on Optional Microprocessor)
1. Optional
Microprocessor
206-XXX-000
(Failed Diskette Drive test)
1. Diskette Drive cable
2. Diskette Drive
215-XXX-000
(Failed IDE test)
1. System Board
217-XXX-000
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 1
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the logical
drive.
217-XXX-001
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 2
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the logical
drive.
217-XXX-002
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 3
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the logical
drive.
217-XXX-003
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 4
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the logical
drive.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
299
Error Code/Symptom
217-XXX-004
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
FRU/Action
1. Fixed Disk 5
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the logical
drive.
217-XXX-005
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 6
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the logical
drive.
301-XXX-000
(Failed Keyboard test)
1. Keyboard
405-XXX-000
(Failed Ethernet test)
1. System Board
300
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Symptoms
Error Symptom
FRU/Action
CD is not working properly.
1. Clean the CD
2. Clean the optical-head
lens.
3. CD-ROM Drive
CD-ROM drive tray is not
working.
(The server must be
powered-on.) If the server
is on and the tray does not
eject,
1. Insert the end of a
paper clip into the
manual tray-release
opening.
2. CD-ROM Drive
CD-ROM drive is not
recognized.
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
enabled primary IDE
channel.
2. Check cables and
jumpers.
3. Check for correct
device driver.
Diskette drive in-use light
stays on, or the system
bypasses the diskette drive.
If there is a diskette in the
drive, verify that:
1. The diskette drive is
enabled in the
configuration
programs.
2. The diskette is good
and not damaged.
(Try another diskette if
you have one.)
3. The diskette is inserted
correctly in the drive.
4. The diskette contains
the necessary files to
start the server.
5. The software program
is OK.
If the diskette drive in-use
light stays on, or the system
continues to bypass the
diskette drive, replace the
diskette drive.
Monitor problems (general)
Some IBM monitors have
their own self-tests. If you
suspect a problem with your
monitor, refer to the
information that comes with
the monitor for adjusting
and testing instructions.
1. Monitor
2. Display
Adapter/System Board
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
301
Power Supply LED Errors.
Use the power supply LED information on the following
page to trouble shoot power supply problems.
Note
The minimum configuration required for the DC Good
light to come on is.
Power Supply
Power Backplane
Power AC Inlet Box
System Board (With pins 2 and 3 of J32
connected together to bypass the power switch
(button). The default is pins 1 and 2.)
Processor Board (Verify that the J10 and J17
connectors are are installed correctly.)
302
Netfinity Server HMM
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
303
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
DC Good LED
AC Good LED
Table 13. Power Supply LED Errors
Power is OK
Standby mode or DC problem.
No power to system or AC problem.
Description
Check AC power to system
Power Supply
Power Backplane
Power AC Inlet Box
N/A
1. Verify power supply switch is on.
2. Check processor connectors J10 and J17.
3. Move jumper J32 to pins 2-3 to bypass power control. If the DC Good
LED comes on, reseat the system power switch (button) assembly cable
connector to the system board.
4. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to
all internal and external devices. Power-on the system. If the DC Good
LED comes on, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until you
isolate the problem.
5. Power Supply
6. Power Backplane
7. System Board
8. Processor Board
1.
2.
3.
4.
FRU/Action
POST Error Codes
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
062
(Three consecutive boot
failures using the default
configuration.)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS Chip
3. System Board
101, 102
(System and processor
error)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
106
(System and processor
error)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
111
(Channel check error)
1. Failing ISA Adapter
2. Memory DIMM
3. System Board
114
(Adapter read-only memory
error)
1. Failing Adapter
2. Run Diagnostics
129
(Internal Cache error)
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
(if installed)
3. Processor Board
151
(Real time clock error)
1. Run Diagnostics
2. Battery/CMOS chip
3. System Board
161
(Real time clock battery
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS chip
3. System Board
162
(Device Configuration Error)
Important
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS Chip
3. Failing Device
4. System Board
Be sure to load the
default settings and
any additional desired
settings; then, save
the configuration.
163
(Real-Time Clock error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS Chip
3. System Board
164
(Memory configuration
changed, see “Memory
Settings” on page 63)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. DIMM
3. Processor Board
173
(System CMOS checksum
bad)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS Chip
3. System Board
175
(Hardware error)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
304
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
176
(Computer cover or cable
cover was removed without
a key being used)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
177, 178
(Security hardware error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
184
(Power-on password
corrupted)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
185
(Drive startup sequence
information corrupted)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
186
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
187
(VPD serial number not set.)
1. Set serial number in
Setup
2. System Board
188
(Bad EEPROM CRC #2)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
189
(An attempt was made to
access the server with
invalid passwords)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
enter the
administrator
password
201
(Memory test error, see
“Memory Settings” on
page 63)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
229
(Cache error)
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
(if installed)
3. Processor Board
262
(DRAM parity configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS Chip
3. System Board
289
(DIMM has been disabled
the user or system, see
“Memory Settings” on
page 63)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
if disabled by user
2. Disabled DIMM, if not
disabled by user.
3. Processor Board
301
(Keyboard or keyboard
controller error)
1. Keyboard
2. System Board
303
(Keyboard controller error)
1. Keyboard
2. System Board
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
305
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
602
(Invalid diskette boot record)
1. Diskette
2. Cable
3. Diskette Drive
604
(Diskette drive error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
and Diagnostics
2. Diskette Drive
3. Drive Cable
4. System Board
605
(Unlock failure)
1. Diskette Drive
2. Drive Cable
3. System Board
662
(Diskette drive configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
and Diagnostics
2. Diskette Drive
3. Drive Cable
4. System Board
762
(Coprocessor configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery/CMOS Chip
3. Processor
962
(Parallel port error)
1. Disconnect external
cable on parallel port.
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
3. System Board
11XX
(System-board serial port 1
or 2 error)
1. Disconnect external
cable on serial port.
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
3. System Board
1600
(The Service Processor is
not functioning)
Do the following before
replacing a FRU:
1. System Board
2. Processor Card
1. Ensure that a jumper is
not installed on J51.
2. Remove the AC power
to the system, wait 20
seconds; then,
re-connect the AC
power. Wait 30
seconds; then,
power-on the system.
306
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
1601
(The system is able to
communicate to the Service
Processor, but the Service
Processor failed to respond
at the start of POST.)
Do the following before
replacing a FRU:
FRU/Action
1. System Board
2. Processor Card
1. Remove the AC power
to the system, wait 20
seconds; then,
re-connect the AC
power. Wait 30
seconds; then,
power-on the system.
2. Flash update the
Service Processor.
1762
(Fixed Disk Configuration
error)
1. Fixed Disk Cables
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
3. Fixed Disk Adapter
4. Fixed Disk Drive
5. System Board
178X
(Fixed Disk error)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1800
(No more hardware interrupt
available for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
1801
(No room for PCI option
ROM)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
1802
(No more I/O space
available for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
1803
(No more memory (above
1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
1804
(No more memory (below
1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Move the failing
adapter to slot 1 or 2
3. Failing Adapter
4. System Board
1805
(PCI option ROM checksum
error)
1. Remove Failing PCI
Card
2. System Board
Fixed Disk Cables
Run Diagnostics
Fixed Disk Adapter
Fixed Disk Drive
System Board
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
307
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
1806
(PCI to PCI Bridge error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Move the failing
adapter to slot 1 or 2
3. Failing Adapter
4. System Board
1807, 1808, 1810
(General PCI error)
1. Remove Failing PCI
Card
2. System Board
1962
(Drive does not contain a
valid boot sector)
1. Verify a bootable
operating system is
installed
2. Run Diagnostics
3. Hard Disk Drive Cable
4. System Board
5. Hard Disk Drive
2400
(Video controller test failure)
1. Video Adapter
(if installed)
2. System Board
2462
(Video memory
configuration error)
1. Video Adapter
(if installed)
2. System Board
5962
(IDE CD-ROM configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. CD-ROM Drive
3. Battery/CMOS Chip
8603
(Pointing Device Error)
1. Pointing Device
2. System Board
8603
(Pointing Device Error)
1. Pointing Device
2. System Board
0001200
(Machine check architecture
error)
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
3. Processor Board
000120P0,
000120P1,000120P2,000120PF
(Processor cache error)
1. Failing Processor
2. Processor Board
00019501
(Processor 1 is not
functioning)
1.
2.
3.
4.
VRM 1
Processor 1
Processor Board
System Board
00019502
(Processor 2 is not
functioning)
1.
2.
3.
4.
VRM 2
Processor 2
Processor Board
System Board
01295085
(ECC checking hardware
test error)
1. Processor Board
2. Processor
00019701
(Processor 1 failed BIST)
1. Processor 1
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
308
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
00019702
(Processor 2 failed BIST)
1. Processor 2
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
I9990301
(Fixed boot sector error, no
operating system installed)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
for correct startup
2. Verify operating
system installed
I9990305
(Fixed boot sector error, no
operating system installed)
1. Install operating
system to hard disk
drive.
I9990650
(AC power has been
restored)
1. Check cable
2. Check for interruption
of power supply
3. Power Cable
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
309
SCSI Error Codes
Error Code
All SCSI Errors
One or more of the following
might be causing the
problem:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
310
A failing SCSI device
(adapter, drive,
controller)
An improper SCSI
configuration or SCSI
termination jumper
setting
Duplicate SCSI IDs in
the same SCSI chain
A missing or improperly
installed SCSI
terminator
A defective SCSI
terminator
An improperly installed
cable
A defective cable
Netfinity Server HMM
FRU/Action
1. External SCSI
devices must be
powered-on before
you power-on the
server.
2. The cables for all
external SCSI devices
are connected
correctly.
3. If you have attached
an external SCSI
device to the server,
make sure the external
SCSI termination is set
to automatic.
4. The last device in each
SCSI chain is
terminated correctly.
5. The SCSI devices are
configured correctly.
ServeRAID Controller Error Codes
Use the following ServeRAID controller error code
information when diagnosing ServeRAID problems. The
error codes are displayed on the screen in a line of text
immediately after the adapter BIOS version screen similar
to the following appears.
à
ð
IBM PC ServeRAID Adapter BIOS
Copyright IBM Corp. 1995,1997
BIOS Ver. x.xx.x
xx/xx/xx
á
ñ
Press Ctrl+I to start the MiniConfig Utility. The following
message is displayed on the screen.
Initializing Adapter Number 1.
Please Wait. Starting Drives.
Firmware Version: x.xx.xx
\ Adapter POST & configuration Error Codes:
IPSR=xxxx BCS=xx ECS=xx
The interrupt status port register (IPSR) codes, basic
configuration status (BCS) messages, and extended
configurations status (ECS) messages identify the
Controller State. The BCS and ECS codes indicate a
configuration change. Configuration change information is
displayed on the screen in text following the IPSR code.
Note
Do Not replace a planar (system board) for RAID
problems that has an integrated on-board ServeRAID
Controller if the system board is not listed as the
FRU/Action in the following index. Refer to RAID
adapter HMM S10L-9147-00 for recovery procedures
for DDD drives.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
311
312
Netfinity Server HMM
1. Controller is functioning
properly. DO NOT replace Controller.
1. RAID Controller. System Board, if integrated controller.
1. Install the download jumpers two jumpers on J15 parallel to PCI slots and Flash the Controller with the latest IBM
ServeRAID BIOS/Firmware from the IBM Web site, then; remove the jumpers.
2. RAID Controller System Board, if integrated controller.
1xxx
(Microcode Checksum Error)
2xxx thru 8xxx
(Code DRAM Error)
FRU/Action
EF10
(Default ISPR)
IPSR Error
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
313
9xxx thru Bxxx(hex)
(SCSI bus error caused by
either defective drives,
termination, etc.)
IPSR Error
Note
The Controller will detect a configuration change. Do not select Save Changes. Press F10 to bypass any save options.
b. Confirm that the channel(s) identified by the error code(s) is/are the cause of the error by verifying that the error
presents itself when the offending channel is reconnected.
c. Ensure that channel is properly terminated.
d. Ensure that the backplane configuration jumpers settings are correct.
e. Replace the failing cable.
f. Replace the failing backplane.
g. Disconnect one drive at a time that is attached to the failing channel, then; reboot to the system to determine which
drive is causing the error.
= Channel 1
ISPR = B2xx = Channel 2
ISPR = B3xx = Channel 1 and 2
Isolate between the SCSI subsystem and the controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables and reboot. If the IPSR
code still occurs, replace the planar.
2. If the IPSR code does not occur after disconnecting the cables, follow the steps below until the error is eliminated:
a. Identify which channel is causing the error by the second digit of the original IPSR code:
1.
FRU/Action
314
Netfinity Server HMM
1. N/A, controller is functioning properly.
1. Verify that the download jumpers (J15) are not in place.
2. Flash the controller firmware with the download jumpers in place (two jumpers on J15, installed parallel to PCI slots), then
remove the download jumpers.
3. RAID Controller. System Board, if integrated controller.
1. Isolate between SCSI Subsystem and Controller by disconnecting all attached SCSI cables and reboot. IF IPSR code
is NOT PRESENT after disconnecting cables, follow the steps below until the error is eliminated:
a. Identify which channel is causing the error by reconnecting cables one at a time and rebooting until the error
returns.
b. Verify correct termination of the failing channel.
c. SCSI cable attached to the failing channel.
d. Backplane attached to the failing channel.
e. Disconnect one drive at a time attached to failing channel and reboot to determine which drive is causing the
problem.
2. If the IPSR code remains after disconnecting all SCSI cables then rebooting, replace system planar.
EFFE
(Firmware code corrupt or
download jumpers are in
place)
FFFF
FRU/Action
EF10
(Default ISPR)
IPSR Error
ServeRAID Startup Messages
During power-on self-test (POST), the ServeRAID adapter
or controller compares the stored configuration information
to the configuration that is actually present. If a
discrepancy exists, one or more status messages appear
after POST completes, but before the operating system
loads.
Notes
1. When the ServeRAID adapter or controller
requires your input, a list of function keys will
appear below the message.
2. Where the “Action” information tells you to start
the IBM ServeRAID configuration program, insert
the IBM ServeRAID Configuration CD into the
CD-ROM drive; then, restart the server. The
action column also provides general information
about the message.
3. Where SID and ch appear in these messages,
SID shows the SCSI ID for the device and ch
shows the channel to which the device is
attached.
4. Where m or n appears in these messages, a
number will appear in the actual message.
The following is a list of messages associated with the
ServeRAID subsystem.
Following new drives found (old state:
SID)
new state:
ch:
Explanation: This message appears when the ServeRAID
adapter or controller detects a new drive that is not part of the
current configuration.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Auto rearrange.
Explanation: Auto rearrange is enabled or disabled.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Following drives not responding (old state:
SID)
new state:
ch:
Explanation: Configured drives are missing. When the
ServeRAID adapter or controller detects that a previously
configured drive is missing.
Where:
old state is the configured state of the drive.
new state is the state that the ServeRAID adapter or
controller will assign to the drive.
ch is the channel where the drive was located
previously.
SID is the SCSI ID for where the drive was located
previously.
Examples of the possible state changes include:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
315
Online to Defunct
Ready to Empty
Standby to Empty
Rebuild to Defunct
Hot Spare to Defunct
Standby Hot Spare to Defunct
(ONL:
(RDY:
(SBY:
(RBL:
(HSP:
(SHS:
DDD
EMP
EMP
DDD
DHS
DHS
x:
x:
x:
x:
x:
x:
y)
y)
y)
y)
y)
y)
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F4
Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For
example, press F4 after you turn on the external
storage enclosure that contains the hard disk drive.
F5
Accept. Press this key to accept the new state that the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign to the drive.
For example, the ServeRAID adapter or controller will
assign the drive a state of defunct (DDD) or empty
(EMP).
You can also press F5 when you must remove a drive,
RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives are
present, and performance in a degraded mode is
acceptable. The ServeRAID adapter or controller will
assign the drive a state of defunct (DDD), but the
server can complete startup. However, the array will
remain in Critical mode and the potential for data loss
will exist until you replace and rebuild the defunct drive.
To prevent the loss of data, replace and rebuild the
defunct drive in a timely manner.
Note: A hard disk drive in the DDD state does not
necessarily mean that you need to replace the drive.
Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the backplane
and to the hard disk drive. Also, ensure that all
cables inside the server are connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the
drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild the
drive, try rebuilding it. See “Rebuilding a Defunct
Drive” on page 161 for more information.
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk drive
does not function properly, replace the drive.
F10
Continue. Press this key to continue without change to
the configuration.
Following drives found in new location (old ch:
new ch: new SID)
old SID: >
Explanation: Configured drives are not in the configured location.
This message will be preceded by the previous messages and the
F5 key choice because configured drives were not found in the
configured location. When the ServeRAID adapter or controller
detects that a previously configured drive is present, but the drive
is in a new location, the following message appears:
Where:
old ch is the channel that matches the existing drive
configuration information.
old SID is the SCSI ID that matches the existing drive
configuration information.
new ch is the channel where the drive is now located.
new SID is the SCSI ID where the drive is now located.
For example:
(1 :5 > 1: 14)
316
Netfinity Server HMM
In this example, the message indicates that the drive from Channel
1, SCSI ID 5 is now located at Channel 1, SCSI ID 14. The drive
might have been physically moved to the new drive bay.
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F4
Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For
example, press F4 after you move the hard disk drive to
its previously assigned location.
F5
Accept. Press this key to accept the new state that the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign to the drive.
For example, the ServeRAID adapter or controller will
assign the drive a state of defunct (DDD) or empty.
Note: A hard disk drive in the DDD state does not
necessarily mean that you need to replace the drive.
Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the backplane
and to the hard disk drive. Also, ensure that all
cables inside the server are connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the
drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild the
drive, try rebuilding it. See “Rebuilding a Defunct
Drive” on page 161 for more information.
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk drive
does not function properly, replace the drive.
F6
Modify. Press this key to modify the configuration to
match the current drive location.
You might remove the hot-swap drives from the server
for security or maintenance reasons. If you replace the
drives but install them in different drive bays, you can
press F6 to accept the new locations, and the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will update the
configuration.
Following new drives found: (host id:
new ch: new SID)
old ch:
old SID:
Explanation: New adapter installed in a configured server or
drives are imported This message might be preceded by the
previous two messages and the F5 and F6 key choices because
the drives were not found in the configured location. When the
ServeRAID adapter or controller detects that the identifiers of the
drives do not match the adapter configuration information.
Where:
host id identifies the System Name where the
ServeRAID adapter or controller resides.
old ch is the channel that matches the drive
configuration information.
old SID is the SCSI ID that matches the drive
configuration information.
new ch is the channel where the drive is now located.
new SID is the SCSI ID where the drive is now located.
For example, when drivers are imported from a server with the
System Name of My Machine: (My Machine: 1:6 > 1:1ð)
In this example, the message indicates that the drive from Channel
1, SCSI ID 6 is now located at Channel 1, SCSI ID 10. The drive
might have been physically moved to a new drive bay.
Action: Press one of the following keys:
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
317
F4
F5
Retry. Press this key after correcting the problem.
For example, press F4 after you move the hard disk
drive to its previously assigned location, or after you
install the original hard disk drives back in the server.
Accept. Press this key to accept the new state that
the ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign to the
drive. For example, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct
(DDD) or empty (EMP).
Note: A hard disk drive in the defunct state does not
necessarily mean that you need to replace the drive.
Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the
backplane or system board, and to the hard disk
drive. Also, ensure that all cables inside the
server are connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in
the drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild the
drive, try rebuilding it. See “Rebuilding a
Defunct Drive” on page 161 for more
information.
F6
F7
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk drive
does not function properly, replace the drive.
Modify. This choice is not always active. Press this
key to modify the configuration to match the current
drive location.
You might remove the hot-swap drives from the
server for security or maintenance reasons. If you
replace the drives but install them in different drive
bays, you can press F6 to accept the new locations,
and the ServeRAID adapter or controller will update
the configuration.
Import. Press this key to import the configuration
information from the drive and to update the
configuration information for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller. This choice is useful when you replace
the ServeRAID adapter or controller in an existing
ServeRAID subsystem.
You also might press F7 if you replace a whole set of
drives with drives that were configured in another
server with a ServeRAID adapter or controller.
Note: When you install drives in a server that has
no logical drives defined, the F7 choice will not
appear. The ServeRAID adapter or controller does
not contain any logical drives in its factory
configuration. Therefore, F7 will not appear. In this
case, do the following:
1. Restart the server and press Ctrl+I to enter the
Mini-Configuration program (see “ServeRAID
Mini-Configuration Program” on page 95).
2. Select Advanced Functions.
3. Select Import Configuration from Drives to
Adapter and follow the instructions on the
screen.
318
Netfinity Server HMM
Controller is not responding to commands. No logical drives
are installed.
Explanation: The ServeRAID adapter or controller is not
operational.
Action: Have the system serviced.
Error: Cannot disable this adapter BIOS.
Explanation: The ServeRAID adapter or controller was unable to
prevent an extra copy of its BIOS code from being stored on the
server. This condition occurs when the server contains multiple
ServeRAID adapters or controllers.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Following drives not responding (old state:
SID)
new state
ch:
Explanation: One or more drives did not respond to the
ServeRAID adapter or controller. For example, the ServeRAID
adapter or controller detected a new drive at an unconfigured SCSI
ID, and the drive is not part of the current configuration. This might
also occur if the ServeRAID adapter or controller detected that a
configured drive is missing.
Action: Select F5 to accept the new state that the ServeRAID
adapter or controller will assign to the drive. For example, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign the drive a state of
defunct (DDD) or empty (EMP).
A hard disk drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean
that you need to replace the drive. Before you replace the drive,
ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the backplane or system
board, and to the hard disk drive. Also, ensure that all cables
inside the server are connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild the drive, try
rebuilding it. See “Rebuilding a Defunct Drive” on page 161
for more information.
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk drive does not
function properly, replace the drive.
For more information, see “Configured drives are missing.” on page
315.
Following drives found in new location (old ch:
new ch: new SID)
old SID
>
Explanation: POST found that the location of one or more drives
does not match the stored configuration information.
Action: For more information, see “Configured drives are not in
the configured location.” on page 316.
Following new drives found (old state:
new state
ch: SID)
Explanation: One or more drives were found at an unconfigured
SCSI ID. For each drive listed, a new state of Ready (RDY)
appears.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
319
Installation stopped.
Explanation: The server cannot access the ServeRAID adapter
or controller.
Action: This is a follow-on message to a preceding message.
Follow the “Action” instructions for the preceding message to
resolve the problem.
n logical drives are installed.
Explanation: n represents the number of defined logical drives.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
NVRAM Cache Controller Not Responding
Explanation: BIOS code detected a bad or failed NVRAM.
Action: Press F9 to remove the NVRAM cache controller from the
configuration, or press F10 to exit without change.
NVRAM Cache Controller Replacement
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller detects that the NVRAM
cache controller is defective.
Action: Press F8 if you replaced the NVRAM cache controller, or
press F10 if you have not replaced the NVRAM cache controller.
Recoverable configuration error
Explanation: The configuration data stored in NVRAM does not
match the configuration data stored in the EEPROM.
Action:
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
2. Start the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program. (See
“ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program” on page 95 for
instructions.)
3. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu; then, select
Import Configuration from Drive(s). (See “Advanced
Configuration Functions” on page 97 for more information.)
WARNING:
n logical drives are critical; n logical drives are
offline.
Explanation: One or more hard disk drives have failed.
Action: Replace the defunct drives as soon as possible to prevent
data loss.
Your server has an error due to a Blocked Logical Drive.
Explanation: One or more logical drives are in a blocked state. A
blocked logical drive cannot be accessed. See “Logical Drive State
Descriptions” on page 82 for additional information.
Action: Press F4 to unblock the logical drive, or press F5 to
continue without unblocking.
System Board LEDs
The system board contains three SCSI LEDs and a
processor LED that are turned on when the system detects
an error.
320
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. To locate the LEDs on the system board see
“System Board Component Locations” on
page 280.
2. Check the system error log for additional
information before replacing a FRU.
System Board LED
FRU/Action
Service Processor LED
1. System Board
SCSI LED(s) on
(Blinking or solid)
1. See “System Board
SCSI LEDs.”
System Board SCSI LEDs
A solid on or blinking system board SCSI LED indicated an
error was detected. (The blinks are followed by a pause.)
Notes
1. To locate the LEDs on the system board see
“System Board Component Locations” on
page 280.
2. If you are instructed to flash the ServeRAID
controller on the system board, refer to the
ServerGuide that was shipped with the system
for instructions on creating a bootable ServeRAID
Flash diskette. Or refer to the WEB, see “Online
Support” on page iv.
3. Check the system error log for additional
information before replacing a FRU.
System Board SCSI LEDs
FRU/Action
1 blink followed by a
pause
(Boot block checksum error)
1. Check cables
2. System Board
3. DASD Backplane
2 blinks followed by a
pause
(DRAM parity error)
1. Check cables
2. System Board
3. DASD Backplane
3 blinks followed by a
pause
(Code block checksum
error, flash the ServeRAID
controller.)
1. Run the ServeRAID
Flash program.
2. Check cables
3. System Board
4. DASD Backplane
4 blinks followed by a
pause
(DRAM DATA)
1. Check cables
2. System Board
3. DASD Backplane
5 blinks followed by a
pause
(DRAM address error)
a. Check cables
b. System Board
c. DASD Backplane
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
321
System Board SCSI LEDs
FRU/Action
6 blinks followed by a
pause
(Code block checksum
error, flash the ServeRAID
controller.)
1. Run the ServeRAID
Flash program.
2. Check cables
3. System Board
4. DASD Backplane
On (solid)
1. Check jumper J11,
see “System Board
Jumpers” on
page 282.
2. Check cables
3. System Board
4. DASD Backplane
Undetermined Problems
You are here because the diagnostic tests did not identify
the failure, the Devices List is incorrect, or the system is
inoperative.
Notes
1. If you suspect a software mismatch is causing
failures (solid or intermittent), be sure to see
“Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 48.
2. A corrupt CMOS can cause undetermined
problems.
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies, see “Power
Supply LED Errors.” on page 302. If the LEDs indicate
the power supplies are working correctly, return here and
do the following:
1. Power-off the computer.
2. Be sure the system is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following (one at a time)
until you find the failure (power-on the computer and
reconfigure each time).
Ÿ Any external devices
Ÿ Surge suppressor device (on the computer)
Ÿ Modem, printer, mouse, or non-IBM devices
Ÿ Each adapter
Ÿ Drives
Ÿ Memory-Module Kits (Minimum requirement = 1
bank of 128 MB DIMMs)
322
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
Minimum operating requirements are:
Power Supply
Power Backplane
Power AC Inlet Box
System Board (With pins 2 and 3 of J32
connected together to bypass the power
switch (button). The default is pins 1 and
2.)
Processor Board (Verify that the J10 and
J17 connectors are are installed correctly.)
Memory-Module Kits (Minimum requirement
= 1 bank of 128 MB DIMMs)
4. Power-on the computer. If the problem remains,
suspect the following FRUs in the order listed:
Ÿ Power Supply
Ÿ Power Backplane
Ÿ System Board
Ÿ Processor Board
Note
If the problem goes away when you remove an
adapter from the system, and replacing that adapter
does not correct the problem, suspect the system
board then the processor board(s)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
323
Parts Listing (Type 8661)
1
2
25
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24
22
23
10
21
20
11
12
16
19
15
13
18
14
17
324
Netfinity Server HMM
System
Index
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
System (Netfinity Netfinity 5500-M10
- Type 8661)
Models Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY
FRU
No.
Top Cover (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Processor Card Support Tray
(Housing) (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Shuttle with Bracket (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Fan Assembly 92 mm with Connector
and Bracket (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Short Blower Fan Assembly with
Bracket (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY)
Long Blower Fan Assembly with
Bracket and Vane (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Fan/Blower 3x Power Cable (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Base Frame Assembly (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Hard Disk Drive
Hard Disk Drive Bezel (Black) (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
DASD Backplane Board (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
DASD 6-Drive Cage Assembly (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Front Bezel without Door Assembly
(Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY,
4RY)
1.44MB Diskette Drive, Black (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Diskette Holder Bracket (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Diskette Drive Signal Cable (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
MKE CR-504 32x CD-ROM Drive,
Black (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY)
CD-ROM Signal Cable (IDE) (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
5.25-Inch Blank Bezel (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
3-U Front Bezel Assembly
with Lock and Keys (Models 11Y, 31Y)
3-U Enclosure Frame (Models 11Y,
31Y)
Media and Switch Trim Panel (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Foot Pads, 4 each (Models 11Y, 31Y)
3-U Blank Panel (Models 11Y, 31Y)
DASD Door (Models 11Y, 31Y)
Front Bezel Cap (Models 11Y, 31Y)
Status Cover Lens (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
12J3063
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
10L6971
01K6998
01K6999
01K6988
01K6990
03K9168
01K6991
N/A
12J3072
76H6880
01K6987
01K6997
76H4091
12J3065
03K9340
02K1119
03K9338
12J3073
03K8798
03K8797
03K8773
03K8800
03K8799
03K8778
12J7041
12J7031
325
Index
22
23
24
25
326
System (Netfinity Netfinity 5500-M10
- Type 8661)
Models Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY
Front LED (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
400 Watt Hot Swap PFC Power Supply
Assembly with Bracket (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Side Access Cover (Models 11Y, 31Y)
Power AC Inlet Box (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
128 MB ECC 3.3v REG DIMM (Option)
(Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY,
4RY)
256MB ECC 3.3v REG DIMM (Option)
(Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY,
4RY)
512MB ECC 3.3v REG DIMM (Option)
(Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY,
4RY)
2 GB Processor Card without
Processor (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
400 MHz Processor with 512 KB L2
Cache (Models 11Y, 1RY)
400 MHz Processor with 1 MB L2
Cache (Model 2RY)
450 MHz Processor 512 KB L2 Cache
(Model 31Y)
450 MHz Processor 1 MB L2 Cache
(Model 3RY)
450 MHz Processor 512 KB L2 Cache
(Model 4RY)
Air Diffuser (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Cable Management Arm (Models 1RY,
2RY, 3RY, 4RY)
Cable Management Arm Bracket
(Models 1RY, 2RY, 3RY, 4RY)
Door Hinge (Models 11Y, 31Y)
Hot Swap Power Backplane Card with
5 Power Cables (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Interior LED and Speaker
Keyboard with Cable
See“Keyboards” on page 329 .
Keylock with Keys and Pawl (Models
11Y, 31Y)
Lock Linkage (Models 11Y, 31Y)
Left and Right EIA Flange (Models
1RY, 2RY, 3RY, 4RY)
Lift Handle (Models 1RY, 2RY, 3RY,
4RY)
Media Bracket (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY,
31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Netfinity Server HMM
FRU
No.
01K7001
03K8774
03K8776
01K6995
28L1015
01K7391
28L1016
61H0523
11L1569
11L1571
28L4557
28L4558
28L4557
01K7000
12J3088
12J3089
01K6637
01K6992
01K7002
N/A
01K6641
03K8777
01K6981
03K9069
12J5681
Index
System (Netfinity Netfinity 5500-M10
- Type 8661)
Models Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 1 (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Ÿ 32X5/16 Screws (4 each)
Ÿ M3.5X8 Plastite Screws (2 each)
Ÿ M3X5 CD/Bracket Screws (8 each)
M3.5X7 Processor Card Screws, (15
each)
Ÿ 6-32X3/16 Screws (8 each)
Ÿ 3.9ID Nylon Washers (2 each)
Ÿ EMC Springs (24 each)
Ÿ Lock Hole Plug (1 each)
Ÿ Cable Tie (1 each)
Ÿ Fan Grommet (4 each)
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 2 (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Ÿ EMI I/O Gasket (1 each)
Ÿ EMI PCI/ISA I/O Gasket (1 each)
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 3 (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Ÿ M3X5 Handle Screws (5 each)
Ÿ PCI Card/Housing to Shuttle Screws
(2 each)
Ÿ Insulator with Light Pipes (5 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap PCI Card Clamps (4 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap PCI Card Guides (5 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap PCI I/O Card Guides (6
each)
Ÿ ISA I/O Card Guide (1 each)
Ÿ PCI Filler Plate Bracket (4 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap Retention Handles (4
each)
Ÿ Switch Card Mounting to Chassis (1
each)
Miscellaneous Rack Kit 4 (Models 1RY,
2RY, 3RY, 4RY)
Ÿ M6X16 Screws, Slide/Bracket to
Rack (16 each)
Ÿ M3.5X7 (EIA FLANGES TO
CHASSIS SCREWS) (6 each)
Ÿ M4X8 Screws, Slides to Chassis (8
each)
Ÿ M6 Nut Clips, Slide/Bracket to Rack
(6 each)
Ÿ M6 Nuts, Flange Arm to Bracket (2
each)
Mouse (Models 11Y, 31Y)
PCI Switch Card (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Power Supply Bracket (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Power Supply Filler Plate (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Power Switch (Button) Assembly with
Bracket (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY)
Processor Terminator Card (Models
11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
FRU
No.
12J3079
03K8782
01K6982
12J3090
76H0889
03K8982
36L9535
01K6996
01K7003
94H0598
327
Index
328
System (Netfinity Netfinity 5500-M10
- Type 8661)
Models Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY
Rack Slide/Bracket Assembly (Models
1RY, 2RY, 3RY, 4RY)
SCSI Hard Disk Drive Cable (3X)
(Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY,
4RY)
SCSI Hard Disk Drive to Backplane
Cable (Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y,
3RY, 4RY)
SCSI to Rear Panel Cable (Option
only) (Models 1RY, 2RY)
Side Cover Retention Bracket (Models
11Y, 31Y)
Slot 2 Goalpost (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
System Battery (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
System Board without Memory and
Processor Card (Models 11Y, 1RY,
2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
System Board Shield (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
System Service Label (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Token Ring PCMCIA Card, option
(Models 11Y, 1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY,
4RY)
Token Ring Cable, option (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Voltage Regulator Card (Models 11Y,
1RY, 2RY, 31Y, 3RY, 4RY)
Netfinity Server HMM
FRU
No.
03K8775
12J3711
03K9342
03K9342
12J7040
36L9544
33F8354
36L9482
03K9054
28L0696
85H3656
03K9323
20L1010
Keyboards
Keyboards
FRU No.
Arabic
Belgian-French
Belgian-UK/Dutch
Brazil/Portugal
Bulgarian
Chinese/US
Czech
Danish
Dutch
French
French/Canadian-ID 058
French/Canadian-ID 445
German
Greek
Hebrew
Hungarian
Icelandic
Italian
Japan
Latin/Spanish
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Romania
Russian
Serbian/Cyrillic
Slovak
Spanish
Swed/Finn
Swiss French/German
Thailand
Turkish (ID 179)
Turkish (ID 440)
UK English
US English
UK English (ISO Compliant)
Yugoslavia/Lithuania
02K0870
02K0871
02K0872
02K0869
02K0873
02K0900
02K0874
02K0875
02K0876
02K0877
02K0863
02K0865
02K0878
02K0879
02K0880
02K0881
02K0882
02K0883
02K0899
02K0867
02K0884
02K0885
02K0886
02K0887
02K0888
02K0889
02K0890
02K0891
02K0892
02K0893
02K0902
02K0894
02K0895
02K0896
02K0861
02K0898
02K0897
Netfinity 5500-M10 - Type 8661
329
Power Cords
Power Cords
FRU No.
Arabic
Belgium
Bulgaria
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Israel
Italy
Latvia
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Serbia
Slovakia
South Africa
Spain
Switzerland
Switzerland (French/German)
U.S. English
U.K./Ireland
Yugoslavia
14F0033
1339520
1339520
1339520
13F9997
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
14F0087
14F0069
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
14F0015
1339520
1339520
14F0051
62X1045
14F0033
1339520
330
Netfinity Server HMM
Related Service Information
Important
The service procedures are designed to help you
isolate problems. They are written with the
assumption that you have model-specific training on
all computers, or that are familiar with the computers,
functions, terminology, and service information
provided in this manual.
Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Inspection Guide
. . . . . . . .
Handling Electrostatic Discharge-Sensitive
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . .
Send Us Your Comments! . . . . . . . . .
Problem Determination Tips . . . . . . . .
Phone Numbers, U.S. and Canada . . . . .
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1998
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
332
332
333
334
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
336
336
364
365
366
368
368
331
Safety Information
The following section contains the safety information that
you need to be familiar with before servicing an IBM
mobile computer.
General Safety
Follow these rules to ensure general safety:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
332
Observe good housekeeping in the area of the
machines during and after maintenance.
When lifting any heavy object:
1. Ensure you can stand safely without slipping.
2. Distribute the weight of the object equally
between your feet.
3. Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly
or twist when you attempt to lift.
4. Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg
muscles; this action removes the strain from the
muscles in your back. Do not attempt to lift any
objects that weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb) or
objects that you think are too heavy for you.
Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the
customer, or that makes the equipment unsafe.
Before you start the machine, ensure that other
service representatives and the customer's personnel
are not in a hazardous position.
Place removed covers and other parts in a safe
place, away from all personnel, while you are
servicing the machine.
Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that
other people will not trip over it.
Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the
moving parts of a machine. Ensure that your sleeves
are fastened or rolled up above your elbows. If your
hair is long, fasten it.
Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing
or fasten it with a nonconductive clip, approximately 8
centimeters (3 inches) from the end.
Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses,
or metal fasteners for your clothing.
Remember: Metal objects are good electrical
conductors.
Wear safety glasses when you are: hammering,
drilling soldering, cutting wire, attaching springs, using
solvents, or working in any other conditions that might
be hazardous to your eyes.
After service, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires. Replace any safety device
that is worn or defective.
Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the
machine to the customer.
Netfinity Server HMM
Electrical Safety
Caution
Electrical current from power, telephone, and
communication cables can be hazardous. To avoid
personal injury or equipment damage, disconnect the
attached power cords, telecommunication systems,
networks, and modems before you open the server
covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation
and configuration procedures.
Observe the following rules when working on electrical
equipment.
Important
Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some
hand tools have handles covered with a soft material
that does not insulate you when working with live
electrical currents.
Many customers have, near their equipment, rubber
floor mats that contain small conductive fibers to
decrease electrostatic discharges. Do not use this
type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch,
disconnecting switch, or electrical outlet. If an
electrical accident occurs, you can then operate the
switch or unplug the power cord quickly.
Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or
near equipment that has hazardous voltages.
Disconnect all power before:
– Performing a mechanical inspection
– Working near power supplies
– Removing or installing main units
Before you start to work on the machine, unplug the
power cord. If you cannot unplug it, ask the customer
to power-off the wall box that supplies power to the
machine and to lock the wall box in the off position.
If you need to work on a machine that has exposed
electrical circuits, observe the following precautions:
– Ensure that another person, familiar with the
power-off controls, is near you.
–
Remember: Another person must be there to
switch off the power, if necessary.
Use only one hand when working with
powered-on electrical equipment; keep the other
hand in your pocket or behind your back.
Related Service Information
333
–
–
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Remember: There must be a complete circuit to
cause electrical shock. By observing the above
rule, you may prevent a current from passing
through your body.
When using testers, set the controls correctly
and use the approved probe leads and
accessories for that tester.
Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally,
if necessary) to insulate you from grounds such
as metal floor strips and machine frames.
Observe the special safety precautions when you
work with very high voltages; these instructions are in
the safety sections of maintenance information. Use
extreme care when measuring high voltages.
Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand
tools for safe operational condition.
Do not use worn or broken tools and testers.
Never assume that power has been disconnected
from a circuit. First, check that it has been
powered-off.
Always look carefully for possible hazards in your
work area. Examples of these hazards are moist
floors, nongrounded power extension cables, power
surges, and missing safety grounds.
Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective
surface of a plastic dental mirror. The surface is
conductive; such touching can cause personal injury
and machine damage.
Do not service the following parts with the power on
when they are removed from their normal operating
places in a machine:
– Power supply units
– Pumps
– Blowers and fans
– Motor generators
and similar units. (This practice ensures correct
grounding of the units.)
If an electrical accident occurs:
– Use caution; do not become a victim
yourself.
– Switch off power.
– Send another person to get medical aid.
Safety Inspection Guide
The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in
identifying potentially unsafe conditions on these products.
Each machine, as it was designed and built, had required
safety items installed to protect users and service
personnel from injury. This guide addresses only those
items. However, good judgment should be used to identify
potential safety hazards due to attachment of non-IBM
features or options not covered by this inspection guide.
334
Netfinity Server HMM
If any unsafe conditions are present, you must determine
how serious the apparent hazard could be and whether
you can continue without first correcting the problem.
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they
present:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Electrical hazards, especially primary power (primary
voltage on the frame can cause serious or fatal
electrical shock).
Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or
bulging capacitor
Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing
hardware
The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a
checklist. Begin the checks with the power off, and the
power cord disconnected.
Checklist:
1. Check exterior covers for damage (loose, broken, or
sharp edges).
2. Power-off the computer. Disconnect the power cord.
3. Check the power cord for:
a. A third-wire ground connector in good condition.
Use a meter to measure third-wire ground
continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the
external ground pin and frame ground.
b. The power cord should be the appropriate type
as specified in the parts listings.
c. Insulation must not be frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use
good judgment as to the safety of any non-IBM
alterations.
6. Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe
conditions, such as metal filings, contamination, water
or other liquids, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Check that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws
or rivets) have not been removed or tampered with.
Related Service Information
335
Handling Electrostatic
Discharge-Sensitive Devices
Any computer part containing transistors or integrated
circuits (ICs) should be considered sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). ESD damage can occur when there is a
difference in charge between objects. Protect against ESD
damage by equalizing the charge so that the machine, the
part, the work mat, and the person handling the part are all
at the same charge.
Notes:
1. Use product-specific ESD procedures when they
exceed the requirements noted here.
2. Make sure that the ESD protective devices you use
have been certified (ISO 9000) as fully effective.
When handling ESD-sensitive parts:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Keep the parts in protective packages until they are
inserted into the product.
Avoid contact with other people.
Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to
eliminate static on your body.
Prevent the part from touching your clothing. Most
clothing is insulative and retains a charge even when
you are wearing a wrist strap.
Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide
a static-free work surface. The mat is especially
useful when handling ESD-sensitive devices.
Select a grounding system, such as those listed
below, to provide protection that meets the specific
service requirement.
Note: The use of a grounding system is desirable
but not required to protect against ESD
damage.
–
–
–
Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground,
ground braid, or green-wire ground.
Use an ESD common ground or reference point
when working on a double-insulated or
battery-operated system. You can use coax or
connector-outside shells on these systems.
Use the round ground-prong of the AC plug on
AC-operated computers.
Grounding Requirements
Electrical grounding of the computer is required for
operator safety and correct system function. Proper
grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a
certified electrician.
336
Netfinity Server HMM
DANGER
Para evitar choques elétricos, não conecte ou
desconecte nenhum cabo, nem efetue
instalação, manutenção ou reconfiguração
deste produto durante uma tempestade com
raios.
Para evitar choques elétricos:
Ÿ
O cabo de alimentação deve ser
conectado a um receptáculo
corretamente instalado e aterrado.
Ÿ
Todos os equipamentos aos quais este
produto será conectado devem também
ser conectados a receptáculos
corretamente instalados.
Quando possível, utilize uma das mãos para
conectar ou desconectar cabos de sinal, para
evitar um possível choque ao tocar duas
superfícies com potenciais elétricos
diferentes.
A corrente elétrica proveniente de cabos de
alimentação, de telefone e de comunicação é
perigosa. Para evitar choques elétricos,
conecte e desconecte os cabos conforme
descrito a seguir, ao instalar, movimentar ou
abrir tampas deste produto ou de
dispositivos conectados.
Para Conectar
Para Desconectar
1. DESLIGUE tudo.
1. DESLIGUE tudo.
2. Conecte primeiro todos os
cabos nos dispositivos.
2. Remova primeiro o(s)
cabo(s) de alimentação das
tomadas.
3. Conecte os cabos de sinal
nos receptáculos.
4. Conecte o(s) cabo(s) de
alimentação nas tomadas.
5. LIGUE o dispositivo.
3. Remova os cabos de sinal
dos receptáculos.
4. Remova todos os cabos
dos dispositivos.
Related Service Information
337
CAUTION:
Ao substituir a bateria, utilize apenas o Número de
Peça IBM 33F8354 ou um tipo de bateria equivalente
recomendado pelo fabricante. Se seu sistema possuir
um módulo com uma bateria de lítio, substitua-o
apenas pelo mesmo tipo de módulo, produzido pelo
mesmo fabricante. A bateria contém lítio e pode
explodir se não for utilizada, manuseada e descartada
de forma adequada.
Não:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Jogue ou coloque na água
Aqueça a mais de 100°C (212°F)
Conserte nem desmonte.
Descarte a bateria conforme requerido pelas
disposições e regulamentações locais.
CAUTION:
Quando uma unidade de CD-ROM estiver instalada,
observe o seguinte.
A utilização de controles ou ajustes ou a execução de
procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados
nesta publicação pode resultar em exposição perigosa
à radiação.
A remoção das tampas da unidade de CD-ROM pode
resultar em exposição a radiação perigosa de laser.
Não existem peças que possam ser consertadas no
interior da unidade de CD-ROM. Não remova as
tampas da unidade de CD-ROM.
DANGER
Algumas unidades de CD-ROM contém um
diodo de laser da Classe 3A ou da Classe 3B.
Observe o seguinte.
Radiação de laser quando aberto. Não olhe
diretamente para o feixe de laser, não olhe
diretamente com instrumentos óticos, e evite
exposição direta ao raio.
338
Netfinity Server HMM
k32 kg (70,5
lbs)
k55 kg (121,2
lbs)
CAUTION:
Utilize práticas seguras para levantamento de peso ao
levantar sua máquina.
CAUTION:
O botão de Controle de Energia na parte frontal do
servidor não desliga a corrente elétrica fornecida ao
servidor. O servidor pode também possuir mais que
um cabo de alimentação. Para remover toda a corrente
elétrica do servidor, assegure que todos os cabos de
alimentação estejam desconectados da fonte de
energia.
CAUTION:
Quando o suporte do cabo de alimentação estiver
instalado no cabo de alimentação, o servidor deve
estar conectado a uma fonte de energia de fácil
acesso.
>50 kg (110
lbs)
CAUTION:
Não coloque qualquer objeto com peso superior a 50
kg (110 lbs) sobre o modelo de gaveta do servidor.
Related Service Information
339
340
Netfinity Server HMM
Related Service Information
341
342
Netfinity Server HMM
Related Service Information
343
DANGER
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or
disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this
product during an electrical storm.
To avoid shock hazard:
Ÿ
The power cord must be connected to a
properly wired and earthed receptacle.
Ÿ
Any equipment to which this product will
be attached must also be connected to
properly wired receptacles.
When possible, use one hand to connect or
disconnect signal cables to prevent a
possible shock from touching two surfaces
with different electrical potentials.
Electrical current from power, telephone, and
communications cables is hazardous. To
avoid shock hazard, connect and disconnect
cables as described following when
installing, moving, or opening covers of this
product or attached devices.
To Connect
To Disconnect
1. Turn Everything OFF.
1. Turn Everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to
devices.
2. First, remove power cord(s)
from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to
receptacles.
3. Remove signal cables from
receptacles.
4. Attach power cord(s) to
outlet.
4. Remove all cables from
devices.
5. Turn device ON.
NOTE: In the UK, by law, the
telephone cable must be
connected after the power cord.
344
Netfinity Server HMM
NOTE: In the UK, the power
cord must be disconnected after
the telephone cable.
CAUTION:
When replacing the battery, use only IBM Part Number
33F8354 or an equivalent type battery recommended
by the manufacturer. If your system has a module
containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the
same module type made by the same manufacturer.
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not
properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Throw or immerse into water
Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances
or regulations.
CAUTION:
When a CD-ROM drive is installed, note the following.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein might
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Removing the covers of the CD-ROM drive could result
in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no
serviceable parts inside the CD-ROM drive. Do not
remove the CD-ROM drive covers.
DANGER
Some CD-ROM drives contain an embedded
Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the
following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into
the beam, do not view directly with optical
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.
Related Service Information
345
k32 kg (70.5
lbs)
k55 kg (121.2
lbs)
CAUTION:
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your machine.
CAUTION:
The Power Control button on the front of the server
does not turn off the electrical current supplied to the
server. The server also might have more than one
power cord. To remove all electrical current from the
server, ensure that all power cords are disconnected
from the power source.
CAUTION:
When the power cord bracket option is installed on the
power cord, the server must be plugged to a power
source that is easily accessible.
>50 kg (110
lbs)
CAUTION:
Do not place any object weighing more than 50 kg (110
lbs) on top of the rack model of the server.
346
Netfinity Server HMM
DANGER
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, ne
manipulez aucun câble et n'effectuez aucune
opération d'installation, d'entretien ou de
reconfiguration de ce produit au cours d'un
orage.
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique :
Ÿ
Les cordons d'alimentation du présent
produit et de tous les appareils qui lui
sont connectés doivent être branchés
sur des socles de prise de courant
correctement câblés et mis à la terre.
Afin d'éviter tout risque de choc électrique
provenant d'une différence de potentiel de
terre, n'utilisez qu'une main, lorsque cela est
possible, pour connecter ou déconnecter les
cordons d'interface.
Le courant électrique passant dans les
câbles de communication, ou les cordons
téléphoniques et d'alimentation peut être
dangereux. Pour éviter tout risque de choc
électrique, lorsque vous installez ou que
vous déplacez le présent produit ou des
périphériques qui lui sont raccordés,
reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous
pour connecter et déconnecter les différents
cordons.
Connexion
Déconnexion
1. Mettez les unités hors
tension.
1. Mettez les unités hors
tension.
2. Commencez par brancher
tous les cordons sur les
unités.
2. Commencez pas
débrancher les cordons
alimentation des socles de
prise de courant.
3. Branchez les câbles
d'interface sur les prises.
4. Branchez les cordons
d'alimentation sur un socle
de prise de courant.
3. Débranchez les câbles
d'interface des prises.
4. Débranchez tous les câbles
des unités.
5. Mettez les unités sous
tension.
Related Service Information
347
CAUTION:
Remplacez la pile usagée par une pile de référence
identique exclusivement - voir la référence IBM - ou
par une pile équivalente recommandée par le fabricant.
Si votre système est doté d'un module contenant une
pile au lithium, vous devez le remplacer uniquement
par un module identique, produit par le même
fabricant. La pile contient du lithium et présente donc
un risque d'explosion en cas de mauvaise
manipulation ou utilisation.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ne la jetez pas à l'eau.
Ne l'exposez pas à une température supérieure à
100 °C.
Ne cherchez pas à la réparer ou à la démonter.
Pour la mise au rebut, reportez-vous à la
réglementation en vigueur.
CAUTION:
Si une unité de CD-ROM est installée, prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes :
Pour éviter tout risque d'exposition au rayon laser,
respectez les consignes de réglage et d'utilisation des
commandes, ainsi que les procédures décrites dans le
présent document.
Pour éviter une exposition directe au rayon laser,
n'ouvrez pas l'unité de CD-ROM. Vous ne pouvez
effectuer aucune opération de maintenance à
l'intérieur.
348
Netfinity Server HMM
DANGER
Certaines unités de CD-ROM contiennent une
diode laser de classe 3A ou 3B. Prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes :
Rayonnement laser lorsque le carter est
ouvert. Évitez de regarder fixement le
faisceau ou de l'observer à l'aide
d'instruments optiques. Évitez une exposition
directe au rayon.
k32 kg
k55 kg
CAUTION:
Ce produit pèse un poids considérable. Faites-vous
aider pour le soulever.
CAUTION:
Le bouton de mise sous tension/hors tension situé sur
la face avant du serveur ne coupe pas l'arrivée de
courant électrique à l'intérieur de la machine. Il se peut
que votre serveur dispose de plusieurs cordons
d'alimentation. Pour isoler totalement le serveur du
réseau électrique, débranchez tous les cordons
d'alimentation des socles de prise de courant.
CAUTION:
Lorsqu'une patte de fixation du cordon d'alimentation
est installée, branchez le serveur sur une prise de
courant électrique facile d'accès.
Related Service Information
349
>50 kg
CAUTION:
Ne posez pas d'objet dont le poids dépasse 50 kg sur
les modèles tiroir de serveur.
350
Netfinity Server HMM
DANGER
Aus Sicherheitsgründen bei Gewitter an
diesem Gerät keine Kabel anschließen oder
lösen. Ferner keine Installations-, Wartungsoder Rekonfigurationsarbeiten durchführen.
Aus Sicherheitsgründen:
Ÿ
Gerät nur an eine
Schutzkontaktsteckdose mit
ordnungsgemäß geerdetem
Schutzkontakt anschließen.
Ÿ
Alle angeschlossenen Geräte ebenfalls
an Schutzkontaktsteckdosen mit
ordnungsgemäß geerdetem
Schutzkontakt anschließen.
Signalkabel möglichst einhändig anschließen
oder lösen, um einen Stromschlag durch
Berühren von Oberflächen mit
unterschiedlichem elektrischem Potential zu
vermeiden.
Elektrische Spannungen von Netz-, Telefonund Datenübertragungsleitungen sind
gefährlich. Um einen Stromschlag zu
vermeiden, nur nach den Anweisungen
arbeiten, die für Installation, Transport oder
Öffnen von Gehäusen dieses Produkts oder
angeschlossenen Einheiten gelten.
Kabel anschließen
Kabel lösen
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten und
Netzstecker ziehen.
2. Zuerst alle Kabel an
Einheiten anschließen.
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten.
2. Zuerst Netzstecker von
Steckdose lösen.
3. Signalkabel von
Anschlußbuchsen lösen.
3. Signalkabel an
Anschlußbuchsen
anschließen.
4. Alle Kabel von Einheiten
lösen.
4. Netzstecker an Steckdose
anschließen.
5. Gerät einschalten.
Related Service Information
351
CAUTION:
Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch eine Batterie mit
der IBM Teilenummer 33F8354 oder durch eine vom
Hersteller empfohlene Batterie ersetzen. Wenn Ihr
System ein Modul mit einer Lithium-Batterie enthält,
ersetzen Sie es immer mit dem selben Modultyp vom
selben Hersteller. Die Batterie enthält Lithium und
kann bei unsachgemäßer Verwendung, Handhabung
oder Entsorgung explodieren.
Die Batterie nicht
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
mit Wasser in Berührung bringen.
über 100 C erhitzen.
reparieren oder zerlegen.
Die örtlichen Bestimmungen für die Entsorgung von
Sondermüll beachten.
CAUTION:
Wenn ein CD-ROM-Laufwerk installiert ist, beachten
Sie folgendes. Steuer- und Einstellelemente sowie
Verfahren nur entsprechend den Anweisungen im
vorliegenden Handbuch einsetzen. Andernfalls kann
gefährliche Laserstrahlung auftreten.
Das Entfernen der Abdeckungen des
CD-ROM-Laufwerks kann zu gefährlicher
Laserstrahlung führen. Es befinden sich keine Teile
innerhalb des CD-ROM-Laufwerks, die vom Benutzer
gewartet werden müssen. Die Verkleidung des
CD-ROM-Laufwerks nicht öffnen.
352
Netfinity Server HMM
DANGER
Manche CD-ROM-Laufwerke enthalten eine
eingebaute Laserdiode der Klasse 3A oder
3B. Die nachfolgend aufgeführten Punkte
beachten.
Laserstrahlung bei geöffneter Tür. Niemals
direkt in den Laserstrahl sehen, nicht direkt
mit optischen Instrumenten betrachten und
den Strahlungsbereich meiden.
k32 kg
k55 kg
CAUTION:
Beim Anheben der Maschine die vorgeschriebenen
Sicherheitsbestimmungen beachten.
CAUTION:
Mit dem Betriebsspannungsschalter an der Vorderseite
des Servers wird die Stromversorgung für den Server
nicht unterbrochen. Der Server könnte auch mehr als
ein Netzkabel aufweisen. Um die gesamte
Stromversorgung des Servers auszuschalten, muß
sichergestellt werden, daß alle Netzkabel aus den
Netzsteckdosen herausgezogen wurden.
CAUTION:
Wenn am Netzkabel eine Kabelhalterung angebracht
ist, muß der Server an eine leicht zugängliche
Netzsteckdose angeschlossen werden.
Related Service Information
353
>50 kg
CAUTION:
Legen Sie keine Gegenstände, die mehr als 50 kg
wiegen, auf das Einschubmodell des Servers.
354
Netfinity Server HMM
PERICOLO
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche
durante i temporali, non collegare o
scollegare cavi, non effettuare l'installazione,
la manutenzione o la riconfigurazione di
questo prodotto.
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche:
Ÿ
collegare il cavo di alimentazione ad una
presa elettrica correttamente cablata e
munita di terra di sicurezza;
Ÿ
collegare qualsiasi apparecchiatura
collegata a questo prodotto ad una
presa elettrica correttamente cablata e
munita di terra di sicurezza.
Quando possibile, collegare o scollegare i
cavi di segnale con una sola mano per
evitare il rischio di scosse derivanti dal
contatto con due superfici a diverso
potenziale elettrico.
La corrente elettrica circolante nei cavi di
alimentazione, del telefono e di segnale è
pericolosa. Per evitare scosse elettriche,
collegare e scollegare i cavi come descritto
quando si effettuano l'installazione, la
rimozione o l'apertura dei coperchi di questo
prodotto o durante il collegamento delle
unità.
Per collegare
Per scollegare
1. SPEGNERE tutti i
dispositivi.
1. SPEGNERE tutti i
dispositivi.
2. Collegare prima tutti i cavi
alle unità.
2. Rimuovere prima il(i) cavo(i)
di alimentazione dalla presa
elettrica.
3. Collegare i cavi di segnale
alle prese.
4. Collegare il(i) cavo(i) di
alimentazione alla presa
elettrica.
3. Rimuovere i cavi di segnale
dalle prese.
4. Rimuovere tutti i cavi dalle
unità.
5. ACCENDERE le unità.
Related Service Information
355
ATTENZIONE:
Quando si sostituisce la batteria, utilizzare solo una
batteria IBM o batterie dello stesso tipo o di tipo
equivalente consigliate dal produttore. Se il sistema di
cui si dispone è provvisto di un modulo contenente
una batteria al litio, sostituire tale batteria solo con un
tipo di modulo uguale a quello fornito dal produttore.
La batteria contiene litio e può esplodere se utilizzata,
maneggiata o smaltita impropriamente.
Evitare di:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Gettarla o immergerla in acqua
Riscaldarla ad una temperatura superiore ai 100°
C
Cercare di ripararla o smaltirla
Smaltire secondo la normativa in vigore (D.Lgs 22 del
5/2/97) e successive disposizioni nazionali e locali.
ATTENZIONE:
Quando è installata un'unità CD-ROM, notare quanto
segue:
L'utilizzo di controlli, regolazioni o l'esecuzione di
procedure non descritti nel presente manuale possono
provocare l'esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.
L'apertura di un'unità CD-ROM può determinare
l'esposizione a radiazioni laser pericolose. All'interno
dell'unità CD-ROM non vi sono parti su cui effettuare
l'assistenza tecnica. Non rimuovere i coperchi
dell'unità CD-ROM.
PERICOLO
Alcune unità CD-ROM contengono all'interno
un diodo laser di Classe 3A o Classe 3B.
Prestare attenzione a quanto segue:
Aprendo l'unità vengono emesse radiazioni
laser. Non fissare il fascio, non guardarlo
direttamente con strumenti ottici ed evitare
l'esposizione diretta al fascio.
356
Netfinity Server HMM
k32 kg
k55 kg
ATTENZIONE:
Durante il sollevamento della macchina seguire delle
norme di di sicurezza.
ATTENZIONE:
Il pulsante del controllo dell'alimentazione situato nella
parte anteriore del servente non disattiva la corrente
elettrica fornita al servente. Il servente potrebbe anche
avere più di un cavo di alimentazione. Per disattivare
la corrente elettrica del servente, assicurarsi che tutti i
cavi di alimentazione siano scollegati dalla sorgente di
alimentazione.
ATTENZIONE:
Quando sul cavo di alimentazione è installata l'opzione
di sostegno del cavo, il servente deve essere collocato
in prossimità di una presa elettrica facilmente
accessibile.
>50 kg
ATTENZIONE:
Non poggiare oggetti che pesano più di 50 kg sulla
parte superiore del servente.
Related Service Information
357
358
Netfinity Server HMM
Related Service Information
359
DANGER
Para evitar una posible descarga eléctrica, no
conecte ni desconecte los cables ni lleve a
cabo ninguna operación de instalación, de
mantenimiento o de reconfiguración de este
producto durante una tormenta eléctrica.
Para evitar una posible descarga:
Ÿ
El cable de alimentación debe
conectarse a un receptáculo con una
instalación eléctrica correcta y con toma
de tierra.
Ÿ
Los aparatos a los que se conecte este
producto también deben estar
conectados a receptáculos con la debida
instalación eléctrica.
Cuando sea posible, utilice una sola mano
para conectar o desconectar los cables de
señal a fin de evitar una posible descarga al
tocar dos superficies con distinto potencial
eléctrico.
La corriente eléctrica de los cables de
comunicaciones, teléfono y alimentación
puede resultar peligrosa. Para evitar una
posible descarga, siga las indicaciones de
conexión y desconexión de los cables
siempre que tenga que instalar, mover o abrir
las cubiertas de este producto o de los
dispositivos acoplados.
Instrucciones de conexión
Instrucciones de desconexión
1. Apague todos los
componentes (OFF).
1. Encienda todos los
componentes (ON).
2. En primer lugar, conecte
todos los cables a los
dispositivos.
2. En primer lugar, retire los
cables de alimentación de
las tomas.
3. Conecte los cables de señal
a los receptáculos.
3. Retire los cables de señal
de los receptáculos.
4. Conecte los cables de
alimentación a las tomas.
4. Retire todos los cables de
los dispositivos.
5. Encienda el dispositivo
(ON).
360
Netfinity Server HMM
CAUTION:
Al cambiar la batería, utilice únicamente la batería IBM
Número de pieza 33F8354 o un tipo de batería
equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Si el
sistema tiene un módulo que contiene una batería de
litio, sustitúyalo únicamente por el mismo tipo de
módulo del mismo fabricante. La batería contiene litio
y puede explotar si no se utiliza, manipula o desecha
correctamente.
Lo que no debe hacer
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Tirar o sumergir el producto en agua.
Exponer el producto a una temperatura superior a
100°C.
Reparar o desmontar el producto.
Cuando quiera desechar la batería, siga las
disposiciones y reglamentaciones locales.
CAUTION:
Cuando instale una unidad de CD-ROM, tenga en
cuenta la siguiente información.
Si se llevan a cabo controles o ajustes o se utilizan
métodos que no se atengan a lo aquí especificado, se
puede producir una exposición peligrosa a las
radiaciones.
Si se retiran las cubiertas de la unidad de CD-ROM, se
puede producir una peligrosa exposición a radiaciones
de láser. Dentro de la unidad de CD-ROM no existen
piezas reparables. No retire las cubiertas de la unidad
de CD-ROM.
Related Service Information
361
DANGER
Algunas unidades de CD-ROM tienen
incorporado un diodo de láser de Clase 3A o
de Clase 3B Tenga en cuenta la siguiente
información.
Cuando la unidad está abierta se generan
emisiones de rayos láser. No dirija la mirada
al haz, no lo observe directamente con
instrumentos ópticos y evite la exposición
directa.
k32 kg
k55 kg
CAUTION:
Alce la máquina con cuidado; el sobrepeso podría
causar alguna lesión.
CAUTION:
El botón de control de alimentación del panel frontal
del servidor no apaga la corriente eléctrica
suministrada al servidor. Puede suceder que el
servidor tenga más de un cable de alimentación. Para
eliminar por completo la corriente eléctrica del
servidor, asegúrese de desconectar todos los cables
de alimentación del suministro de alimentación.
CAUTION:
Cuando la opción de soporte del cable de alimentación
está instalada en el cable de alimentación, el servidor
debe estar conectado a un suministro de alimentación
de fácil acceso.
362
Netfinity Server HMM
>50 kg
CAUTION:
No coloque ningún objeto cuyo peso sea superior a
los 50 kilos sobre la bandeja modelo del servidor.
Related Service Information
363
Send Us Your Comments!
We want to know your opinion about this manual (part
number 37L5210). Your input will help us to improve our
publications.
Please photocopy this survey, complete it, and then fax it
to IBM HMM Survey at 919-543-8167 (USA).
Name
Phone Number
1. Do you like this manual?
Ø Yes
Ø No
2. What would you like to see added, changed, or
deleted in this manual?
3. What is your service experience level?
Ø Less than five years
Ø More than five years
4. Which Servers do you service most?
Thanks in advance for your response!
364
Netfinity Server HMM
Problem Determination Tips
Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations
that can be encountered, use the following information to
assist you in problem determination. If possible, have this
information available when requesting assistance from
Service Support and Engineering functions.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Machine type and model
Processor or hard disk upgrades
Failure symptom
– Do diagnostics fail?
– What, when, where, single, or multiple systems?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– If it has been working, what changes were made
prior to it failing?
– Is this the original reported failure?
Reference/Diagnostics Diskette Version
– Type and version level
Hardware configuration
– Print (print screen) configuration currently in use
– BIOS level
Operating system software
– Type and version level
Important
To eliminate confusion, identical systems are
considered identical only if they:
1. Are the exact machine type and models
2. Have the same BIOS level
3. Have the same adapters/attachments in the
same locations
4. Have the same address
jumpers/terminators/cabling
5. Have the same software versions and levels
6. Have the same Reference/Diagnostics Diskette
(version)
7. Have the same configuration options set in the
system
8. Have the same setup for the operation system
control files
Comparing the configuration and software set-up
between “working and non-working” systems will often
lead to problem resolution.
Related Service Information
365
Phone Numbers, U.S. and Canada
Note
EMEA customers should contact their Dealer or IBM
Service organization.
Before you place a call to the Support Center, refer to
“Problem Determination Tips” on page 365.
Authorized Dealers or Servicers
Number
Information
919-517-0001
800-528-7705
800-937-3737
800-426-2472
Bulletin Board Service - PC Company
Bulletin Board Service - TSS Only
IBM Business Partner Education
IBM Customer Engineer Technical
Support
IBM Dealer Support Center
IBM Direct Desktop Software Sales
IBM Part Number ID and Look Up
IBM PC HelpCenter
IBM Software Defect Support (CSDs)
IBM Software Ordering (Publications)
IBM Supplies Technical Hotline
IBM Warranty Parts Claims Center
800-IBM-DEAL
800-342-6672
303-924-4015
800-426-7763
800-237-5511
800-327-5711
800-426-1484
800-388-7080
U.S. Customers and Helpware Subscribers
Number
Information
919-517-0001
800-426-8322
800-999-0052
800-237-4824
800-964-8523
800-742-2493
800-447-4700
800-426-2468
800-426-3333
800-IBM-SERV
800-772-2227
800-426-7282
800-426-9402
(Ext. 150)
800-241-1620
800-342-6672
800-237-5511
800-284-5933
914-962-0310
800-547-1283
Bulletin Board Service - PC Company
Customer Education Business Unit
Customized Operational Services
EduQuest (Educational Computers)
End User HelpDesk Support
IBM Anti-Virus Services
IBM Authorized Dealer Referrals
IBM Dealer Referral
IBM Information Referral Service
IBM Service
IBM PC HelpCenter and HelpDesk
IBM Technical Manuals
Multimedia Information Center
800-551-2832
366
Multimedia HelpCenter
OS/2 Information Line
OS/2 Support Services
Prodigy
Prodigy User Questions
Technical Coordinator Program
SystemXtra for Personal Systems
LAN Automated Distribution/2
OS/2 Bulletin Board
OS/2 Application Assistance Center
Technical Solutions Magazine
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM Canada Customer and Servicer Support
Number
Information
800-661-PSMT
905-316-5556
Business Partner Marketing Support
Business Partner Marketing Support Toronto
Business Partner Marketing Support French
Customer Relations
Customer Service Dispatch
Customer Service Parts
Customer Support Center (ISC)
Customer Service Repair Centre
Dealer Support Group (DSG)
HelpClub Registration / IBM Direct
HelpFax
HelpFax - Toronto
HelpPC
IBM Certification Administrator
Mail to: 50 Acadia Drive
Markham, Ontario L3R 0B3
IBM Education (A+ Course)
IBM Information Network Support
IBM PC Service Partners
International Warranty Registration
Lexmark Product Information
PartnerLine
Parts Orders, Exchange or Emergency
Parts Regular Orders, Exchange
514-938-6048
800-465-4YOU
800-IBM-SERV
800-263-2769
800-465-2222
416-443-5701
800-505-1855
800-465-7999
800-465-3299
905-316-3299
800-565-3344
905-513-3355
800-661-2131
800-268-3100
800-387-8343
800-487-7426
800-663-7662
800-IBM-9990
800-263-2769
416-443-5808
(Fax)
416-443-5755
514-938-3022
905-316-4255
604-664-6464
204-934-2735
800-661-7768
800-565-3344
800-387-8483
800-465-1234
905-316-4148
905-316-4100
(Fax)
905-316-4150
905-316-4100
(Fax)
905-316-4872
905-316-4100
(Fax)
800-661-2131
800-565-3344
416-443-5835
(Fax)
905-316-2445
905-316-3515
(Fax)
416-443-5778
800-505-1855
800-267-7472
Parts Orders, Inquiries
PC Co Bulletin Board - Montreal
PC Co Bulletin Board - Markham
PC Co Bulletin Board - Vancouver
PC Co Bulletin Board - Winnepeg
PS Marketing Support (PSMT)
PS/1 Warranty Customer Helpline
PS/1 Warranty Service (DOAs)
Publications Ordering
Service Management Support
Service Management Support
Service (Warranty) Manager
Service (Warranty) Manager
Service Quality Programs
Service Quality Programs
Skill Dynamics (Education)
ThinkPad EasyServe
Warranty Claim Fulfillment
Warranty Claim Reimbursement
Warranty Claim Reimbursement
Warranty Claim Parts Inquiry
Warranty Provider Support Hotline
Warranty Service, ThinkPad
Related Service Information
367
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs,
or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these
available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not
intended to state or imply that only that IBM product,
program, or service may be used. Subject to IBM’s valid
intellectual property or other legally protectable rights, any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service may be
used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. The
evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with
other products, except those expressly designated by IBM,
are the responsibility of the user.
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation
in the United States or other countries or both:
HelpCenter
IBM
Netfinity
OS/2
ServeRAID
ThinkPad
HelpFax
NetBAY3
Netfinity Manager
Predictive Failure Analysis
SystemXtra
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks or
registered. trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MMX is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel
Corporation Microsoft Corporation.
Notes is a trademark or registered trademark of Lotus
Development Corporation.
Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel
Corporation
UNIX is a trademark or registered trademark of X/Open
Company Limited.
368
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM

Part Number: 37L5210
Printed in U.S.A.
S1ðL-9838-ð1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement